Home

HP 2600-PWR User's Manual

1. If the ports in VLAN 2 are configured to allow a dynamic trunk and GVRP is disabled adding a second link in VLAN 2 automatically forms a dynamic LACP trunk and moves the trunk to VLAN 1 the default VLAN which creates a traffic loop in VLAN 1 between the two switches and eliminates the link in VLAN 2 between the two switches Figure 12 11 A Dynamic LACP Trunk Forming in a VLAN Can Cause a Traffic Loop Easy control methods include either disabling LACP on the selected ports or configuring them to operate in static LACP trunks STP and IGMP Ifspanning tree STP and or IGMP is enabled in the switch a dynamic LACP trunk operates only with the default settings for these features and does not appear in the port listings for these features 12 24 Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration Half Duplex and or Different Port Speeds Not Allowed in LACP Trunks The ports on both sides of an LACP trunk must be configured for the same speed and for full duplex FDx The 802 3ad LACP standard speci fies a full duplex FDx requirement for LACP trunking A port configured as LACP passive and not assigned to a port trunk can be configured to half duplex HDx However in any of the following cases a port cannot be reconfigured to an HDx setting Ifa portis set to LACP Active you cannot configure it to HDx Ifaportis already amember of astatic or dynamic LACP trunk you cannot configure it to HDx Ifaporti
2. 2 5 Advantages of Using HP ProCurve Manager or HP ProCurve Manager Plus 00 c eee eee eee eens 2 6 2 1 Selecting a Management Interface Overview Overview This chapter describes the following Switch management interfaces m Advantages of using each interface type Understanding Management Interfaces Management interfaces enable you to reconfigure the switch and to monitor switch status and performance Interface types include Menu interface a menu driven interface offering a subset of switch commands through the built in VT 100 ANSI console page 2 3 m CLI a command line interface offering the full set of switch commands through the VT 100 ANSI console built into the switch page 2 4 m Web browser interface a switch interface offering status information and a subset of switch commands through a standard web browser such as Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet Explorer page 2 5 HP ProCurve Manager PCM a windows based network manage ment solution included in box with all manageable HP ProCurve devices Features include automatic device discovery network status summary topology and mapping and device management HP ProCurve Manager Plus PCM a complete windows based network management solution that provides both the basic features offered with PCM as well as more advanced management features including in depth traffic analysis group and policy management
3. 0 0 c cece eee een eeren Related Publications 0 00 c cece eee eens Terminology serria a Er E E ee ak Rhee ices Stes Soko ee ae S General PoE Operation 0 0 cece eee ene eens Configuration Options 00 0 c eee eee eee PD Support ws atin esas aa rk oie Ae ee dena Power Priority 202 boos Seek ee ota ee ee A SES Configuring PoE Operation 0 0 0 eee eee eens Viewing PoE Configuration and Status 02 2 eee Displaying the Switch s Global PoE Power Status Displaying an Overview of PoE Status on All Ports Displaying the PoE Status on Specific Ports Planning and Implementing a PoE Configuration Assigning PoE Ports to VLANS 00 eee eee ee eens Applying Security Features to PoE Configurations PoE Operating Notes 00 0 cece eee cider etea tida PoE Event Log Messages 0 0 cece cece eee eee ences Power Over Ethernet PoE Operation for the Series 2600 PWR Switches Applicable Switch Models Note Applicable Switch Models The Power Over Ethernet PoE feature described in this chapter operates on these switches m HP ProCurve Switch 2626 PWR J8164A m HP ProCurve Switch 2650 PWR J8165A Introduction PoE technology allows IP telephones wireless LAN access points and other appliances to receive power and transfer data over existing LAN c
4. 10 22 Troubleshooting 00 0 cece cece eee eae 10 25 QoS Pass Through Mode on the Series 2800 Switches 10 25 General Operation 0 c cece eee eee 10 25 QoS Priority Mapping With and Without QoS Pass Through Mode 10 26 How to enable disable QoS Pass Through Mode 10 27 Configuring Port Based Priority for Incoming Packets on the 4100gl and 6108 MWALCNES oie bite Bice Pa ack See edhe dared Ada oon bat tha ENA 10 29 The Role of 802 1Q VLAN Tagging 0 0 cee ee eee 10 29 10 1 Port Status and Basic Configuration Contents Outbound Port Queues and Packet Priority Settings 10 30 Operating Rules for Port Based Priority 0 10 31 Configuring and Viewing Port Based Priority 10 32 Messages Related to Prioritization 0 0008 10 33 Troubleshooting Prioritization 0 0 cc cece een ee 10 33 Using Friendly Optional Port Names 0 200 e eee 10 34 Configuring and Operating Rules for Friendly Port Names 10 34 Configuring Friendly Port Names 0 02 0 eee 10 35 Displaying Friendly Port Names with Other Port Data 10 37 10 2 Note On Connecting Transceivers to Fixed Configuration Devices Port Status and Basic Configuration Overview Overview This chapter describes how to view the current port configuration and how to configure ports t
5. 13 13 operator password 5 8 5 10 OS version A 5 A 12 A 15 OS download failure indication A 17 switch to switch download A 14 troubleshooting A 17 using TFTP A 3 out of band 2 4 over temperature See temperature password 5 8 5 10 creating 5 8 delete 3 7 5 11 if you lose the password 5 11 lost 5 11 manager 5 8 operator 5 8 set 3 7 setting 5 9 using to access browser and console 5 10 ping test description C 35 for troubleshooting C 35 disabling a port 11 16 address table B 14 auto negotiation 10 4 10 5 broadcast limit 10 11 CLI access 10 7 context level 10 10 control configuration 10 1 12 1 counters B 10 counters reset B 10 fiber optic 10 5 full duplex LACP 10 5 MAC address D 3 D 4 menu access 10 6 queues See port based priority traffic patterns B 10 trunk See port trunk utilization 5 16 web browser interface 5 16 web browser access 10 17 port names friendly configuring 10 35 displaying 10 37 summary 10 34 port security port trunk restriction 12 4 trunk restriction 12 9 port trunk 12 2 caution 12 5 12 10 12 17 CLI access 12 12 default trunk type 12 11 Index 5 enabling dynamic LACP 12 16 FEC 12 7 12 25 IGMP 12 9 LACP 10 5 LACP full duplex required 12 5 link requir
6. A 16 Troubleshooting TFTP Downloads 0 0 eee eee eee A 17 Transferring Switch Configurations 00 e cece eens A 18 Copying Diagnostic Data to a Remote Host PC or Unix Workstation A 21 Copying Command Output to a Destination Device A 21 Copying Event Log Output to a Destination Device A 22 Copying Crash Data Content to a Destination Device A 22 Copying Crash Log Data Content to a Destination Device A 23 A 1 File Transfers Overview Note Overview You can download new switch software and upload or download switch configuration files These features are useful for acquiring periodic switch software upgrades and for storing or retrieving a switch configuration This appendix includes the following information Downloading switch software begins below m Transferring switch configurations begins on page A 18 For information on how switch memory operates including primary and secondary flash see Chapter 6 Switch Memory and Configuration In the switch console interface the switch software is referred to as the OS for switch operating system Downloading Switch Software HP periodically provides switch software updates through the HP ProCurve website http www hp com go hpprocurve For more information see the support and warranty booklet shipped with the switch After you acquire a new switch software file you can use one of the follo
7. Current Boot Primary Figure 6 10 Example Indicating Two Different Software Versions in Primary and Secondary Flash Execute the copy command as follows HPswitch config copy flash flash primary Erasing the Contents of Primary or Secondary Flash This command deletes the software image file from the specified flash location Before using this command in one flash image location primary or second ary ensure that you have a valid software file in the other flash image location secondary or primary Ifthe switch has only one flash image loaded in either primary or secondary flash and you erase that image then the switch does not have a software image stored in flash In this case if you do not reboot or power cycle the switch you can recover by using xmodem or tftp to download another software image Syntax erase flash lt primary secondary gt For example to erase the software image in primary flash do the following 1 First verify that a usable flash image exists in secondary flash The most reliable way to ensure this is to reboot the switch from the flash image you want to retain For example if you are planning to erase the primary image then first reboot from the secondary image to verify that the secondary image is present and acceptable for your system HPswitch boot system flash secondary 2 Then erase the software image in the selected flash in this case primary 6 16 Switch
8. HPswitch gt show console Interface Access Console Serial Link EraulenDsable Inbound Telnet Enabled Yes Web Agent Enabled Yes ae Terminal Type vTioo oa Ee Screen Refresh Interval sec 3 Displayed Events AlI Event Log Event Types To List Baud Rate speed sense I XON XOFF Console Control Flow Control xX f Options Session Inactivity Time min Figure 7 2 Listing of Show Console Command Reconfigure Inbound Telnet Access In the default configuration inbound Telnet access is enabled Syntax no telnet server To disable inbound Telnet access HPswitch config no telnet server To re enable inbound Telnet access HPswitch config telnet server 7 5 Interface Access and System Information Interface Access Console Serial Link Web and Telnet Note Outbound Telnet to Another Device This feature operates indepen dently of the telnet server status and enables you to Telnet to another device that has an IP address Syntax telnet lt ip address gt For example HPswitch telnet 10 28 27 204 Reconfigure Web Browser Access In the default configuration web browser access is enabled Syntax no web management To disable web browser access HPswitch config no web management To re enable web browser access HPswitch config web management Reconfigure the Console Serial Lin
9. To provide the most information on network problems in the Alert Log the recommended sensitivity level for Log Network Problems is High Sensitivity The Fault Detection settings are 5 23 Using the HP Web Browser Interface Status Reporting Features High Sensitivity This policy directs the switch to send all alerts to the Alert Log This setting is most effective on networks that have none or few problems Medium Sensitivity This policy directs the switch to send alerts related to network problems to the Alert Log If you want to be notified of problems which cause a noticeable slowdown on the network use this setting Low Sensitivity This policy directs the switch to send only the most severe alerts to the Alert Log This policy is most effective on a network that normally has a lot of problems and you want to be informed of only the most severe ones m Never Disables the Alert Log and transmission of alerts traps to the management server in cases where a network management tool such as HP ProCurve Manager is in use Use this option when you don t want to use the Alert Log The Fault Detection Window also contains three Change Control Buttons m Apply Changes This button stores the settings you have selected for all future sessions with the web browser interface until you decide to change them m Clear Changes This button removes your settings and returns the settings for the list box to the level it was
10. m Ethernet Statistics except the numbers of packets of different frame sizes Alarm History of the supported Ethernet statistics Event The RMON agent automatically runs in the switch Use the RMON manage ment station on your network to enable or disable specific RMON traps and events 13 24 Configuring for Network Management Applications CDP CDP CDP Features Feature Default Menu CLI Web view the switch s CDP configuration n a EE page 13 32 view the switch s CDP Neighbors table n a page 13 32 clear reset the CDP Neighbors table n a page 13 33 enable or disable CDP on the switch enabled page 13 34 enable or disable CDP operation on an enabled page 13 35 individual port change the transmit interval forthe switch s 60 seconds page 13 36 CDP packets change the hold time time to live for CDP 180 seconds page 13 36 packets the switch generates Introduction In the switches covered in this guide CDP v1 Cisco Discovery Protocol version 1 provides data that aids SNMP based network mapping utilities designed to discover devices running CDP in a network To make this data available the switch transmits information about itself via CDP packets to adjacent devices and also receives and stores information about adjacent devices running CDP This enables each CDP device to receive and maintain identity data on each of its CDP neighbors and pass this information of
11. 3 7 status and counters menu B 5 status overview screen 5 6 subnet 8 9 subnet mask 8 5 8 6 See also IP subnetting 8 9 support changing default URL 5 13 Index 7 URL 5 12 URL Window 5 12 switch console See console switch setup menu 3 8 switch software See OS switch to switch download A 14 Syslog facility user C 34 See debug logging severity debug C 34 system configuration screen 7 9 System Name parameter 7 10 T TACACS SSH exclusion A 10 Telnet 3 4 terminate session kill command 7 8 Telnet enable disable 7 4 Telnet outbound 7 6 Telnet problem C 7 temperature fan failure C 5 messages C 5 terminal access lose connectivity 7 6 terminal type 7 3 terminate remote session 7 8 TFTP download A 4 OS download A 3 threshold setting 13 5 thresholds SNMP 13 20 time format C 23 time protocol selecting 9 3 time server 8 3 time configure 7 13 TimeP 8 4 8 5 assignment methods 9 2 disabling 9 20 enabling and disabling 9 18 poll interval 9 20 selecting 9 3 viewing and configuring menu 9 15 viewing CLI 9 17 8 Index timesync disabling 9 20 Time To Live 8 4 8 5 traffic monitoring 13 5 B 24 traffic port B 10 transceiver fiber optic 10 5 trap 5 24 authentication 13 20 authentication trap 13 23
12. Running out all ports stream Devices Router Y Drops CDP packets describing Switch A With CDP Also does not transmit any CDP packets Disabled or describing itself Router Y Nonexistent Device Z Forwards CDP packets from Switch A out a all ports except the port receiving the Hub or Other packets from A without any awareness Non CDP of CDP operation Device Figure 13 11 Example of Outgoing CDP Packet Operation Incoming CDP Packets When a CDP enabled switch receives a CDP packet from another CDP device it enters that device s data in the CDP Neighbors table along with the port number where the data was received and does not forward the packet The switch also periodically purges the table of any entries that have expired The hold time for any data entry in the switch s CDP Neighbors table is configured in the device transmitting the CDP packet and cannot be controlled in the switch receiving the packet A switch reviews the list of CDP neighbor entries every three seconds and purges any expired entries Non CDP devices such as some hubs and other devices that do not have CDP capability are transparent to CDP operation Other hubs are CDP aware but still forward CDP packets as if they were transparent to CDP operation See CDP Capable Hubs on page 13 41 However an intervening CDP aware device that is CDP disabled is not transparent For example in figur
13. System Location Inactivity Timeout min 0 0 MAC Age Time sec 300 300 Inbound Telnet Enabled Yes Yes Web Agent Enabled Yes Yes Time Sync Method TIMEP TIMEP lt Time Protocol Selection Parameter TimeP Mode Disabled Disabled E Time Zone 0 0 None Daylight Time Rule None None Actions gt Edit Save Help Cancel changes and return to previous screen Use arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Figure 9 9 The System Information Screen Default Values 2 Press E for Edit The cursor moves to the System Name field 3 Use J to move the cursor to the Time Sync Method field 4 If TIMEP is not already selected use the Space bar to select TIMEP then press 1 once to display and move to the TimeP Mode field 5 Do one of the following e Use the Space bar to select the DHCP mode then press J to move the cursor to the Poll Interval field and go to step 6 9 15 Time Protocols TimeP Viewing Selecting and Configuring Time Syne Method None TIMEP TimeP Mode Disabled DHCP Poll Interval min 720 Time Zone 0 O Daylight Time Rule None None e Use the Space bar to select the Manual mode i Press gt to move the cursor to the Server Address field ii Enter the IP address of the TimeP server you want the switch to use for time synchronization Note This step replaces any previously conf
14. contact ProCurve Gwi 200 Corie products index HP ProCurve Networking Technical support HP ProCurve Networking manuals printable version Choose a product Technical support Services HP ProCurve Routing Switches and Modules Software why ProCurve HP ProCurve routing switch 9300 series and 6308M Sx sad gt Manuals HP ProCurve Switches and Modules Configuration examples HP ProCurve switch 5300XL series Support forms HP ProCurve switch 4100GL series Problem reports gt convergence HP ProCurve switch 8000M 4000M 2424M 2400M and 1600M Podu inten mobility HP ProCurve 2626 2626 PWR 2650 2650 PWR and 6108 HP ProCurve switch 2800 series products index HP ProCurve switch 2700 series HP ProCurve switch 2312 2324 2512 and 2524 HP ProCurve switch 212M and 224M product services HP ProCurve switch 2224 HP ProCurve switch 2124 product support HP ProCurve switch 408 networking solutions security Figure 1 2 Finding Product Manuals on the HP ProCurve Website 1 6 Getting Started Sources for More Information Sources for More Information m Ifyouneed information on specific parameters in the menu interface refer to the online help provided in the interface For example CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Switch Configuration Internet IP Service Default Gateway 10 35 204 1 Default TTL 64 Online Help IP Address 10 35 204 104
15. 00 00 e eee ee eee eee 13 18 Trap Features 400nieotopieageaee ot hea e ieee ened eae 13 20 Using the CLI To Enable Authentication Traps 13 23 Advanced Management RMON 00002 cee ee ee eee 13 24 CDP aie chee aad siti a h ae ea lod REC AS AIS oo Bite oid oh ae eae 13 25 Introduction meros pe ena pE RE ET EA TAE acne eas 13 25 CDP Terminology seriene E E E E E eeee 13 26 General CDP Operation 00 0c cece eee eee eee 13 27 Outgoing Packets iesirea renci neei iaa aa eens 13 27 Incoming CDP Packets 0 cece nennen 13 28 Configuring CDP on the Switch 2 0 0 0 eee eee eee 13 31 CLI Viewing and Configuring CDP 13 31 Viewing the Switch s Current CDP Configuration 13 32 Viewing the Switch s Current CDP Neighbors Table 13 32 Clearing Resetting the CDP Neighbors Table 13 33 13 1 Configuring for Network Management Applications Contents Configuring CDP Operation 0 00 0 unran nerne 13 34 Effect of Spanning Tree STP On CDP Packet Transmission 13 36 How the Switch Selects the IP Address To Include in Outbound CDP Packets ere acachans shia wis uae dew tian nates E E E oat EA EER 13 37 CDP Neighbor Data and MIB Objects 000 13 38 Operating Notes erener Me nen AS aban le ae nace oe Uae ean re 13 40 13 2 Note Configuring for Network Management Application
16. Getting Documentation From the Web 1 Goto the HP ProCurve website at http www hp com go hpprocurve Click on technical support Click on manuals 4 Click on the product for which you want to view or download a manual HP ProCurve Networking HP ProCurve Networking support printable version For quick access to our most requested support information Switch 5300xI users click on the specific links called out within the general If you are running software categories below version E 06 02 or earlier why ProCurve please read an important For all the support listings on a particular category click on the FAG highlighted header networking solutions security convergence Most commonly requested current manuals read Most commonly requested versions including me first product notes previous manuals summary description and release date Switch 1600m 2424m 4000m 8000m Switch 25x version F 05 17 management and configuration guide pdf Switch 8000m 1 600m 4000mi 2424m 2400m Switch 2512 24 management and version C 09 19 product services configuration guide pdf Switch 26 61 08 version H 07 31 Switch 23 0d25xx installation guide pdf 5 72 MB Switch 53x version E 07 37 Software update C 09 19 release notes Switch 41x version G 07 27 product support Switches 1600m 2400m 2424m 4000m 8000m technical support pdf 2 19 MB Software updates Switch 250 release notes version F 05 17 pdf
17. Logout ow ma non SON Provides the menu to display configuration status and counters To select menu item press item number or highlight item and press lt Enter gt Figure 3 6 The Reboot Switch Option in the Main Menu Asterisk indicates a configuration change that requires a reboot in order to take effect Reminder to reboot the switch to activate configuration changes Note Using the Menu Interface Rebooting the Switch Rebooting To Activate Configuration Changes Configuration changes for most parameters in the menu interface become effective as soon as you save them However you must reboot the switch in order to implement a change in the Maximum VLANs to support parameter To access this parameter go to the Main Menu and select 2 Switch Configuration 8 VLAN Menu 1 VLAN Support If you make configuration changes in the menu interface that require a reboot the switch displays an asterisk next to the menu item in which the change has been made For example if you change and save the value for the Maximum VLANs to support parameter an asterisk appears next to the VLAN Support entry in the VLAN Menuscreen below and also next to the Switch Configuration entry in the Main Menu as shown in figure 3 2 on page 3 6 222 CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Switch Configuration Menu System Information Port Trunk Settings Network Monitoring Port Spa
18. The Default The Auto MDIX features apply only to copper port switches using twisted pair copper Ethernet cables 10 14 Port Status and Basic Configuration Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters Syntax interface lt port list gt mdix mode lt automdix mdi mdix gt automdix is the automatic default setting This configures the port for automatic detection of the cable either straight through or crossover mdi is the manual mode setting that configures the port for connecting to either a PC or other MDI device with a crossover cable or to a switch hub or other MDI X device with a straight through cable mdix is the manual mode setting that configures the port for connecting to either a switch hub or other MDI X device with a crossover cable or to a PC or other MDI device with a straight through cable Syntax show interfaces config Lists the current per port Auto MDI MDI X configuration Syntax show interfaces brief Where a port is linked to another device this command lists the MDI mode the port is currently using In the case of ports configured for Auto auto mdix the MDI mode appears as either MDI or MDIX depending upon which option the port has negotiated with the device on the other end of the link In the case of ports configured for MDI or MDIX the mode listed in this display matches the configured setting If the link to another device was up but has gone down th
19. Using Friendly Optional Port Names Feature Default Menu CLI Web Configure Friendly Port Names Standard Port n a page 35 n a Numbering Display Friendly Port Names n a n a page 37 n a This feature enables you to assign alphanumeric port names of your choosing to augment automatically assigned numeric port names This means you can configure meaningful port names to make it easier to identify the source of information listed by some Show commands Note that this feature augments port numbering but does not replace it Configuring and Operating Rules for Friendly Port Names At either the global or context configuration level you can assign a unique name to any port on the switch You can also assign the same name to multiple ports The friendly port names you configure appear in the output of the show name port list show config and show interface lt port number gt commands They do not appear in the output of other show commands or in Menu interface screens See Displaying Friendly Port Names with Other Port Data on page 10 37 Friendly port names are not a substitute for port numbers in CLI com mands or Menu displays Trunking ports together does not affect friendly naming for the individual ports If you want the same name for all ports in a trunk you must individually assign the name to each port A friendly port name can have up to 64 contiguous alphanumeric charac ters Blank spaces within friend
20. config file For example in an otherwise default configuration executing show config lists the startup config file with QoS pass through mode enabled as follows HP ProCurve Switch 2824f config show config J4903A Configuration Editor Created on release 1 07 52 hostname HP ProCurve Switch 2824 Indicates QoS Pass cdp run Through mode enabled qos passthrough mode snmp server community public Unrestricted vlan 1 name DEFAULT_ LAN untagged 1 24 ip address dhcp bootp exit Figure 11 Example of the Startup Config File Listing with QoS Pass Through Mode Enabled 10 28 Port Status and Basic Configuration Configuring Port Based Priority for Incoming Packets on the 4100gl and 6108 Switches Configuring Port Based Priority for Incoming Packets on the 4100gl and 6108 Switches Feature Default Menu CLI Web Assigning a priority level to traffic on the basis Disabled n a page 10 32 n a of incoming port When network congestion occurs it is important to move traffic on the basis of relative importance However without prioritization m Traffic from less important sources can consume bandwidth and slow down or halt delivery of more important traffic Most traffic from all ports is forwarded as normal priority and competes for bandwidth with all other normal priority traffic regardless of its relative importance Traffic received in tagged VLAN packets carries a specific 802 1p priority level
21. m Ona given port when port based priority is configured as 0 7 an inbound tagged packet with a priority of 0 zero adopts the specified priority and is sent to the corresponding outbound queue on the outbound port See table 10 3 Mapping Priority Settings to Device Queues on page 10 30 If the outbound port is a tagged member of the applicable VLAN then the packet carries a tag with that priority setting to the next downstream device 10 31 Port Status and Basic Configuration Configuring Port Based Priority for Incoming Packets on the 4100gl and 6108 Switches m Ona given port an inbound tagged packet received on the port with a preset priority of 1 7 in its tag keeps that priority and is assigned an outbound queue on the basis of that priority regardless of the port based priority configured on the port Refer to table 10 3 Mapping Priority Settings to Device Queues on page 10 30 m Ifa packet leaves the switch through an outbound port configured as an untagged member of the packet s VLAN then the packet leaves the switch without a VLAN tag and thus without an 802 1p priority setting m Trunked ports do not allow non default 1 7 port based priority settings If you configure a non default port based priority value on a port and then add the port to a port trunk then the port based priority for that port is returned to the default 0 Configuring and Viewing Port Based Priority This command e
22. on page B 10 B 11 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Status and Counters Data CLI Access To Port and Trunk Group Statistics To Display the Port Counter Summary Report This command provides an overview of port activity for all ports on the switch Syntax show interfaces To Display a Detailed Traffic Summary for Specific Ports This com mand provides traffic details for the port s you specify Syntax show interfaces ethernet lt port list gt To Reset the Port Counters for a Specific Port This command resets the counters for the specified ports to zero for the current session See the Note on Reset on page B 10 Syntax clear statistics lt ethernet port list gt Web Browser Access To View Port and Trunk Group Statistics 1 Click on the Status tab 2 Click on Port Counters 3 To reset the counters for a specific port click anywhere in the row for that port then click on Refresh Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Status and Counters Data Viewing the Switch s MAC Address Tables Feature Default Menu CLI viewing MAC addresses on all n a page B 14 page B 16 ports on a specific VLAN viewing MAC addresses on a n a page B 15 page B 16 specific port searching for a MAC address n a page B 15 page B 17 Web These features help you to view m The MAC addresses that the switch has learned from network devices attached to the switch m The port on which each MA
23. ver2c ver3 gt noaut auth priv gt Establish the msg processing for algorithm for messages passed to the target address If ver3 is used and sec model is ver3 then you must select a security services level lt noauth auth priv gt params value matches params name tagvalue matches taglist value HP Switch config snmpyv3 notify MyWotificati tagy e not tag HP Switch config smmpy3 targetaddrless not_ad arans not parms 15 255 123 1093 filter not inf amp taglist not tag HP Switch config snmpyr3 params not_parms user NetworkMgr sec model ver3 message processing ver3 priv Both ver3 means you must select a security service level Figure 13 8 Example of SNMPv3 Configuration Session 13 19 Configuring for Network Management Applications Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch Note Trap Features Feature Default Menu CLI Web snmp server host trap receiver public page 13 22 snmp server enable authentication trap none page 13 23 A trap receiver is a management station designated by the switch to receive SNMP traps sent from the switch An authentication trap is a specialized SNMP trap sent to trap receivers when an unauthorized management station tries to access the switch Fixed or Well Known Traps The switch automatically sends fixed traps such as coldStart warmStart linkDown and linkUp to trap receivers using the public community name These traps ca
24. 0 7 that the switch recognizes and uses to assign packet priority at the outbound port With the default port based priority the switch handles traffic received in untagged packets as Normal priority level 0 You can assign a priority level to Inbound untagged VLAN packets Inbound tagged VLAN packets having a priority level of 0 zero The switch does not alter the existing priority level of inbound tagged VLAN packets carrying a priority level of 1 7 Thus for example high priority tagged VLAN traffic received on a port retains its priority in the switch However you have the option iguring the port to assign a priority level to untagged traffic and 0 prior ged traffic the port receives The Role of 802 1Q VLAN Tagging An 802 1Q tagged VLAN packet carries the packet s VLA aua gnment and the 802 1p priority setting 0 7 By contrast an untagged packet does not have a tag and does not carry a priority setting Generally the switch preserves and uses a packet s priority setting to determine which outbound queue the packet belongs in on the outbound port If the outbound port is a tagged 10 29 Port Status and Basic Configuration Configuring Port Based Priority for Incoming Packets on the 4100gl and 6108 Switches member of the VLAN the packet carries its priority setting to the next downstream device Ifthe outbound port is not configured as a tagged member of the VLAN then the tag is stri
25. 13 5 assigning users to groups 13 8 communities 13 12 enable command 13 7 enabling 13 6 group access levels 13 11 13 12 groups 13 10 network management problems with snmpv3 only 13 6 notification 13 18 restricted access option 13 6 set up 13 5 traps 13 18 users 13 5 SNTP 9 3 broadcast mode 9 2 9 9 broadcast mode requirement 9 3 configuration 9 4 disabling 9 11 enabling and disabling 9 9 event log messages 9 24 menu interface operation 9 24 operating modes 9 2 poll interval 9 12 See also TimeP selecting 9 3 unicast mode 9 3 9 10 unicast time polling 9 21 unicast address priority 9 22 unicast deleting addresses 9 23 unicast replacing servers 9 23 viewing 9 4 9 8 software version B 6 sorting alert log entries 5 19 source port filter 10 23 spanning tree fast uplink troubleshooting C 16 global information B 18 information screen B 18 problems related to C 15 show tech copy output C 40 statistics B 18 using with port trunking 12 9 spanning tree and CDP 13 36 SSH debug logging C 27 TACACS exclusion A 10 troubleshooting C 16 standard MIB 13 4 starting a console session 3 4 startup config viewing 6 5 See also configuration statistics 3 7 B 4 statistics clear counters 3 12 6 10 status and counters access from console
26. 3 responses received 3 Link Test Over a Specific VLAN Link Test Over a HPswitch link 0030c1 7fcc40 repetitions 3 timeout 1 Specific VLAN vlan 222 Test Fail 602 2 TEST packets sent 3 responses received O ee ee ae Figure C 16 Example of Link Tests C 38 Troubleshooting Diagnostic Tools Displaying the Configuration File The complete switch configuration is contained in a file that you can browse from either the web browser interface or the CLI It may be useful in some troubleshooting scenarios to view the switch configuration CLI Viewing the Configuration File Using the CLI you can display either the running configuration or the startup configuration For more on these topics see appendix C Switch Memory and Configuration Syntax write terminal Displays the running config file show running config Displays the running config file show config Displays the startup config file Web Viewing the Configuration File To display the running configuration through the web browser interface 1 Click on the Diagnostics tab 2 Click on Configuration Report 3 Use the right side scroll bar to scroll through the configuration listing C 39 Troubleshooting Diagnostic Tools Listing Switch Configuration and Operation Details for Help in Troubleshooting Release G 04 05 and greater includes the show tech command This command outputs in a single listing switch operating and running
27. A minimal entry in the Bootp table file etc bootptab to update an IP address and subnet mask to the switch or a VLAN configured in the switch would be similar to this entry 34108switch ht ether ha 0030c1123456 ip 10 66 77 88 sm 255 255 248 0 gw 10 66 77 1 hn vm rfcl1048 An entry in the Bootp table file etc bootptab to tell the switch or VLAN where to obtain a configuration file download would be similar to this entry 34108switch ht ether ha 0030c1123456 ip 10 66 77 88 sm 255 255 248 0 gw 10 66 77 1 1g 10 22 33 44 T144 switch cfg vm rfcl1048 where j4108switch is a user defined symbolic name to help you find the correct section of the bootptab file If you have multiple switches that will be using Bootp to get their IP configuration you should use a unique symbolic name for each switch ht is the hardware type For the switches covered in this guide set this to ether for Ethernet This tag must precede the ha tag ha is the hardware address Use the switch s or VLAN s 12 digit MAC address 8 14 Note Note Configuring IP Addressing IP Configuration ip is the IP address to be assigned to the switch or VLAN sm is the subnet mask of the subnet in which the switch or VLAN is installed gw is the IP address of the default gateway lg TFTP server address source of final configuration file T144 is the vendor specific tag identifying the conf
28. Configuring for Network Management Applications CDP This page is intentionally unused 13 42 File Transfers Contents Overview ick Bee BAAS BA bile Sect teed ela A be de E A 2 Downloading Switch Software 00 0 cece eee eee eee A 2 General Switch Software Download Rules 2085 A 3 Using TFTP To Download Switch Software from a Server A 3 Menu TFTP Download from a Server to Primary Flash A 4 CLI TFTP Download from a Server to Primary or Secondary Flash sae s 48 aah e iei hs es oc gk easel a ace a A 6 Using Secure Copy and SFTP 0 0 eee eee eens A 7 How Tt Works erison rea raea nhe ed inhuadien nie tat eral A 8 The SCP SFTP Process 00 cece cece cence een e eens A 9 Command Options s s s susana seanse uneneen A 9 Authentication oeiee taaa a a anina A 10 SCP SFTP Operating Notes 00 c eee eee eee A 10 Using Xmodem to Download Switch Software From a PC or UNIX Workstation i s4s ats08 abetare vague se ontausd eaa EA a eed A 11 Menu Xmodem Download to Primary Flash A 11 CLI Xmodem Download from a PC or Unix Workstation to Primary or Secondary Flash 2 0 eee eee A 12 Switch to Switch Download 2 cece cece eee eee A 14 Menu Switch to Switch Download to Primary Flash A 14 CLI Switch To Switch Downloads 0000 00 ee A 15 Using HP PCM to Update Switch Software
29. E for Edit 3 Use the Space bar to select XMODEM in the Method field 4 Press Enter then X for eXecute to begin the switch software download The following message then appears Press enter and then initiate Xmodem transfer from the attached computer 5 Press Enter and then execute the terminal emulator command s to begin Xmodem binary transfer For example using HyperTerminal a Click on Transfer then Send File b Type the file path and name in the Filename field c Inthe Protocol field select Xmodem d Click on the Send button The download will then commence It can take several minutes depend ing on the baud rate set in the switch and in your terminal emulator 6 After the primary flash memory has been updated with the new operating system you must reboot the switch to implement the newly downloaded software Return to the Main Menu and press 6 for Reboot Switch You will then see this prompt Continue reboot of system No Press the space bar once to change No to Yes then press Enter to begin the reboot 7 To confirm that the switch software downloaded correctly a From the Main Menu select 1 Status and Counters 1 General System Information b Check the Firmware revision line CLI Xmodem Download from a PC or Unix Workstation to Primary or Secondary Flash Using Xmodem and a terminal emulator you can download a switch software file to either primary or secondary flash Syntax
30. FEC Provides static trunking to forwarding devices that also support FEC Fast EtherChannel such as some Cisco switches and routers and some HP UX and Windows NT servers Refer to Trunk Operation Using the FEC Option on page 12 25 12 7 Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration Table 12 3 General Operating Rules for Port Trunks Media All ports on both ends of a trunk group must have the same media type and mode speed and duplex The switch blocks any trunked links that do not conform to this rule For the switches covered in this guide HP recommends leaving the port Mode setting at Auto or in networks using Cat 3 cabling Auto 10 Port Configuration The default port configuration is Auto which enables a port to sense speed and negotiate duplex with an Auto enabled port on another device HP recommends that you use the Auto setting for all ports you plan to use for trunking Otherwise you must manually ensure that the mode setting for each port in a trunk is compatible with the other ports in the trunk Recommended Port Mode Setting for LACP HPswitch config show interface config Port Settings Port Type Enabled Mode mmm seeeeeee Seeeeeee eseseeeeeeeeee aglaw eee Ci 10 100TX Yes Auto C2 10 100TZ Yes Auto Disable All of the following operate on a per port basis regardless of trunk membership e Enable Disable e Flow control Flow Ctrl LACP is a full duplex protocol See Trunk
31. Guide for your switch C 7 Troubleshooting Unusual Network Activity Unusual Network Activity Network activity that fails to meet accepted norms may indicate a hardware problem with one or more of the network components possibly including the switch Such problems can also be caused by a network loop or simply too much traffic for the network as it is currently designed and implemented Unusual network activity is usually indicated by the LEDs on the front of the switch or measured with the switch console interface or with a network management tool such as the HP ProCurve Manager Refer to the Installation Guide you received with the switch for information on using LEDs to identify unusual network activity A topology loop can also cause excessive network activity The event log FFI messages can be indicative of this type of problem General Problems The network runs slow processes fail users cannot access servers or other devices Broadcast storms may be occurring in the network These may be due to redundant links between nodes e Ifyou are configuring a port trunk finish configuring the ports in the trunk before connecting the related cables Otherwise you may inad vertently create anumber of redundant links i e topology loops that will cause broadcast storms e Turn on Spanning Tree Protocol to block redundant links i e topol ogy loops e Check for FFI messages in the Event Log Duplicate IP Addresses Thi
32. HPswitch config interface 1 power 11 16 PoE Event Log Messages PoE operation generates these Event Log messages You can also configure the switch to send these messages to a configured debug destination terminal device or SyslogD server I 1MM DD YY HH MM SS chassis Message header with severity date system time and system module type For more information on Event Log operation refer to the Troubleshooting appendix in the Management and Configuration Guide for your switch Ext Power Supply connected supplying lt actual power gt W of lt avail power gt W max PO F py The switch detected an EPS External Power Supply and began receiving the wattage indicated by lt actual power gt The lt avail power gt field indicates the maximum power wattage the detected EPS is capable of delivering Ext Power Supply disconnected The switch has lost contact with an external power supply usage is below configured threshold of lt 1 99 gt lt slot gt POE usage is below configured threshold of lt 1 99 gt Indicates that POE usage in the switch or indicated slot if the switch includes module slots has decreased below the threshold specified by the last execution of the global power threshold lt 1 99 gt command This message occurs if after the last reboot the PoE demand on the switch exceeded the power threshold and then later dropped below the threshold val
33. HPswitch gt show interfaces brief Current Operating Mode Status and Counters Port Status Intrusion Flow Alert Enabled Status Mode 10 100TX 10 100TX 10 100TX 10 100TX 10 100TX A 10 100TX A Trk2 10 100TX A8 Trk2 10 100TX Al 10 100TX No Yes Down 10HDx off MORE next page Space next line Enter quit Control C HPswitch gt show interface config Current Configured Mode Port Settings Type Enabled Mode Flow Ctrl 107100TX Yes Auto Disable 10 7100TX Yes Auto Disable 10 100TE Yes Auto Disable 10 100TE Yes Auto Disable 10 100TE Yes Auto Disable 10 100TE Yes Auto Disable A Trk2 10 100TE Yes Auto Disable A8 Trk2 10 100TE Auto Disable A1s 10 100TE Yes Auto Disable MORE next page Space next line Enter quit Control C Figure 10 4 Example Show Interface Config Command Listing 4100g Switch HPswitch config show interface brief Current Operating Mode Status and Counters Port Status Intrusion MDI Flow Enabled Status Mode 10 100TX No 10 OFDx 10 100TX No Yes Down 10 OFDx 10 100TX No Yes Down 10 OFDx 10 100TX Yes Down 10 OFDx 10 100TX Yes Down OFDx 10 100TX Yes Down OFDx 10 100TX Yes Down OFDx 10 100TX Yes OFDx 10 100TX Yes OFDx 10 100TX Yes OFDx 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 Figure 10 5 Example Show Interface Brief Command Listing 2600 Switch 10 9 Port Status and Basic Configuration Viewing Port Status and Configu
34. Manual _ _10 27 33 101 Figure 8 5 Example of Multinetting on the Default VLAN Note The Internet IP Service screen in the Menu interface figure 8 1 on page 8 6 displays only the primary IP address for each VLAN You must use the CLI show ip command to display the full IP address listing for multinetted VLANs Removing or Replacing IP Addresses in a Subnetted VLAN To remove an IP address from a subnetted VLAN use the no form of the IP address command shown on page 8 9 Generally to replace one IP address with another you should first remove the address you want to replace and then enter the new address However in a subnetted VLAN if you remove the primary IP address from a VLAN the next sequential secondary IP address becomes the primary address If you later re enter the former primary IP address the switch configures it as a secondary address Thus if you need to change the primary IP address in a subnetted VLAN you must remove the secondary IP addresses configured for that VLAN before you replace the primary address 8 10 Note Configuring IP Addressing IP Configuration Configure the Optional Default Gateway Using the Global configura tion level you can assign one default gateway to the switch Syntax ip default gateway lt ip address gt For example HPswitch config ip default gateway 10 28 227 115 The switch uses the IP default gateway only while operating as a Layer 2 dev
35. Module addrMgr chassis bootp console dhcp download FFI garp igmp ipx lacp Event Description Address table switch hardware bootp addressing Console interface DHCP addressing file transfer Find Fix and Inform available in the console event log and web browser interface alert log GARP GVRP IP Multicast IP related Novell Netware Dynamic LACP trunks Module mgr ports snmp stack stp sys system telnet tcp tftp timep vlan Xmodem Event Description Console management Change in port status static trunks SNMP communications Stacking Spanning Tree Switch management Telnet activity Transmission control File transfer for new OS or config Time protocol VLAN operations Xmodem file transfer C 24 Log Status Line Troubleshooting Using Logging To Identify Problem Sources Menu Entering and Navigating in the Event Log From the Main Menu select Event Log Terminal SWITCH TRM Phone Transfers Help DEFAULT_CONFIG File Edit Settings 65 61 02 11 45 22 65 61 82 11 45 22 stp Spanning Tree Protocol enabled 65 01 62 11 45 22 ip entity enabled 65 61 02 11 45 22 tftp entity enabled 65 61 02 11 45 22 bootp entity enabled 05 61 62 11 45 22 tcp configuration complete Range of Events in the Log 65 01 82 11 45 22 tcp entity enabled 65 61 62 11 45 23 telnet Inbound telnet enabl 65 61 62 11 45 23 telnet Outbound telnet
36. Module Information 0 0 cece cee tenn en ees B 8 Menu Displaying Port Status 000 2 eee eee B 8 CLI ACCESS oneceieesd peda ee saeta e ah eea aaan B 8 Port Status aa er urena e AE car or E A E A AEE B 9 Menu Displaying Port Status 00 0000 e eee B 9 GELACCESS el eae plies elit ENEA B 9 Web Accessi caaaeii oe eae ede eee ble ba B 9 Viewing Port and Trunk Group Statistics and Flow Control Status B 10 Menu Access to Port and Trunk Statistics B 11 CLI Access To Port and Trunk Group Statistics B 12 Web Browser Access To View Port and Trunk Group Statistics B 12 Viewing the Switch s MAC Address Tables B 13 Menu Access to the MAC Address Views and Searches B 14 CLI Access for MAC Address Views and Searches B 16 Spanning Tree Protocol STP Information B 18 Menu Access to STP Data 00 0 cece eee B 18 CLL Access to STP Data eines reno eai at earar a EIR EE aa a B 19 Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Status B 20 VLAN Information 0 0 0 000000 c cece eee eee eee B 21 Web Browser Interface Status Information B 23 Port and Static Trunk Monitoring Features B 24 Switch 6108 and Series 4100gl Switches 4 B 24 Series 2600 2600 PWR and 2800 Switches B 24 Menu Configuring Port and Static Trun
37. N CDP Packets on All Ports A Port CDP Per Port CDP Enable Disable enabled p enabled enabled Figure 13 14 Example of Show CDP with the Default CDP Configuration Viewing the Switch s Current CDP Neighbors Table Devices are listed by the port on which they were detected Syntax show cdp neighbors Lists the neighboring CDP devices the switch detects with a subset of the information collected from the device s CDP packet For more on this topic refer to table 13 4 CDP Neighbors Data on page 13 39 e port numb detail Lists the CDP aware device connected to the specified port Allows only one port at a time Using detail provides a longer list of details on the CDP aware device the switch detects on the specified port detail e port num Provides a list of the details for all of the CDP aware devices the switch detects Using port num produces a list of details for the selected port For more on this topic see CDP Neighbor Data and MIB Objects on page 13 38 13 32 Configuring for Network Management Applications CDP Figure 13 15 lists six CDP devices four switches and two workstations that the switch has detected by receiving their CDP packets HPswitch gt show cdp neighbors CDP neighbors information Port Device ID Accounting 0030c1 7Ffacd0 Research 0060b0 889443 Support 0060b0 761a45 Marketing 0030c5 38dc59 Mgmt NIC 099a05 09df9b Mgmt NIC 09
38. Port and Static Trunk Monitoring Features Port Al A2 A3 Use arrow keys to change field selection lt Space gt to toggle field choices and lt Enter gt to go to Actions Actions gt Type 10 100TX 10 100TX 10 100TX 10 100TX 10 100TX 10 100TX 10 100TX 10 100TX CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Switch Configuration Network Monitoring Port Monitoring Enabled No Yes lt Movethe cursorto the Monitoring Port parameter Monitoring Port Monitor Ports Cancel Action Port Type Action _ __ i A110 10 100TX All 10 100TX Al2 10 100TX Al3 10 100TX Al4 10 100TX Als 10 100TX A20 10 100TX Trki Trunk Edit Save Help Figure B 20 How To Select a Monitoring Port 5 6 Use the Space bar to select the port to use for monitoring Use the downarrow key to move the cursor to the Action column for the individual ports and position the cursor at a port you want to monitor Press the Space bar to select Monitor for each port and trunk that you want monitored Use the downarrow key to move from one interface to the next in the Action column When you finish selecting ports to monitor press Enter then press S for Save to save your changes and exit from the screen Return to the Main Menu B 26 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Port and Stat
39. See the chapter on stack management in the Advanced Traffic Management Guide Logout Closes the Menu interface and console session and disconnects Telnet access to the switch See How to End a Menu Session and Exit from the Console on page 3 5 3 8 Screentitle identifies the location within the menu structure Actions line Help line describing the selected action or selected parameter field Using the Menu Interface Screen Structure and Navigation Screen Structure and Navigation Menu interface screens include these three elements m Parameter fields and or read only information such as statistics m Navigation and configuration actions such as Save Edit and Cancel m Help line to describe navigation options individual parameters and read only data For example in the following System Information screen assent zgz zzz22z2z22222222 CONSOLE MANAGER MODE zzzazz22z222222222222222222E Switch Configuration System Information System Name HPswitch System Contact System Location o Parameter fields Inactivity Timeout min 0 0 MAC Age Time sec 300 300 Inbound Telnet Enabled Yes Yes Web Agent Enabled Yes Yes Time Sync Method None TIMEP TimeP Mode Disabled Disabled Time Zone 0 0 Help describing each of the Daylight Time Rule None None ra items in the parameter fields Edit save Help Cancel changes and return to previ re
40. Sntp SNTP Mode Unicast Poll Interval sec 720 720 il io Rl iene ahne aie IP Address Protocol Version Version appear at their default settings 10 28 227 141 Note Protocol Version appears only when there is an IP address configured for an SNTP server Figure 9 5 Example of Configuring SNTP for Unicast Operation If the SNTP server you specify uses SNTP version 4 or later use the sntp server command to specify the correct version number For example suppose you learned that SNTP version 4 was in use on the server you specified above IP address 10 28 227 141 You would use the following commands to delete the server IP address and then re enter it with the correct version number for that server 9 11 Time Protocols SNTP Viewing Selecting and Configuring HPswitch config no sntp server E eat ae nee HPswitch config sntp server 10 28 227 141 4 HPswitch config show sntp a ae Deletes unicast SNTP server entry Re enters the unicast server with a non SNTP Contiguration default protocol version Time Sync Mode Sntp SNTP Mode Broadcast Poll Interval sec 720 600 IP Address Protocol Version show sntp displays the result 10 28 227 141 Figure 9 6 Example of Specifying the SNTP Protocol Version Number Changing the SNTP Poll Interval Syntax sntp poll interval lt 30 720 gt Specifies how long the switch waits between time polling intervals The default is 720 seconds and the r
41. Status and Counters General System Information System Contact System Location Firmware revision 6 05 01 Base MAC Addr 0001e7 a09900 ROM Version G 05 00 Serial Number 82600017409 Up Time 2 hours Memory Total 24 588 136 CPU Util 1 Free 19 613 568 IP Mgmt Pkts Rx 0 Packet Total 832 Pkts Tx 0 Buffers Free 793 Lowest 769 Missed 0 Actions gt Return to p Use arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Figure B 2 Example of General Switch Information This screen dynamically indicates how individual switch resources are being used See the online Help for details CLI Access Syntax show system information B 6 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Status and Counters Data Switch Management Address Information Menu Access From the Main Menu select 1 Status and Counters 2 Switch Management Address Information TE CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Status and Counters Management Address Information Time Server Address Disabled VLAN Name MAC Address IP Address DEFAULT VLAN 7 a09900 10 VLAN 22 O0001e7 a09901 Disabled VLAN 33 O0001e7 a09902 Disabled Actions gt Back Help Return to previous screen Use arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Figure B 3 Example of Management Address Information with VLANs Configured This screen disp
42. This is done with the snmpv3 group command For more details on the MIBs access for a give group see Group Access Levels on page 13 11 Add NetworkAdmin to operator noauth group ees HP Switch config snmpv3 group operatornoauth user NetworkAdmin sec model ver3 HP Switch config snmpv3 group managerpriv user NetworkMgr sec model ver3 HP Switch config show snmpyv3 group Add NetwrokMgr to managerpriv group Status and Counters SNMP v3 Global Configuration Information Security Model Group Name Pre assigned groups for access by Version 2c and CommunityManager ReadOnly z ComManagerR version 1 management CommunityManagerReadWrite 4 ComManager RW applications CommunityOperatorReadOnly ComOperatorRi CommunityOperatorReadWrite ComOperatorRW CommunityManagerReadOnly c ComManagerR CommunityManagerReadWrite 2 ComManager RW CommunityOperatorReadtOnly ComO0peratorRil CommunityOperatorReadWrite verZzc ComO0peratorRwU NetworkMNgr ver3 ManagerPriv NetworkAdmin ver3 OperatorNod uth Figure 13 3 Assign Users to group for SNMPv3 Caution Adding a user without authentication and or privacy to a group that requires it will cause the user to not be able to access the switch You should only add users to the group that is appropriate for their security parameters 13 10 Group Access Levels Configuring for Network Management Applications Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch The switch supports eight predefined gr
43. Time Since Last Change 4 mins Root MAC Address 0030c1 7fec40 Root Path Cost 0 Root Port This switch is root Root Priority 32768 Return to previous screen Use arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Actions gt Show ports Help Figure B 12 Example of Spanning Tree Information Use this screen to determine current switch level STP parameter settings and statistics You can use the Show ports action at the bottom of the screen to display port level information and parameter settings for each port in the switch including port type cost priority operating state and designated bridge as shown in figure B 13 B 18 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Status and Counters Data Seeessseseeesessessssee CONSOLE MANAGER MODE 22222ss2seseeses2ee2e222222 Status and Counters Spanning Tree Port Information Port Type Cost Priority State Designated Bridge in A2 100 1000T 5 128 Forwarding 0001e7 a09900 43 100 1000T 5 128 Disabled a4 100 1000T 5 128 Disabled 4s 100 1000T 5 128 Disabled 46 100 1000T 5 128 Disabled ci 10005x 5 128 Forwarding 0001e7 a09900 c2 10005x 5 128 Forwarding 0001e7 a09900 c3 10005X 5 128 Forwarding 0001e7 a09900 Actions gt Help Return to previo Use up down arrow keys to scroll to other entries left right arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Figure B 13 Ex
44. VLAN Support If configuration changes requiring a reboot have been made the switch displays an asterisk next to the menu item in which the change has been made For example if you change and save parameter values for the Maximum VLANs to support parameter an asterisk appears next to the VLAN Support entry in the VLAN Menu screen and also next to the Switch Configuration entry in the Main menu as shown in figure 4 6 S sSSSS Ss CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Switch Configuration Menu System Information Port Trunk Settings Network Monitoring Port Spanning Tree Operation IP Configuration SNMP Community Names IP Authorized Managers x OMDOAHUKSPUWUNE VLAN Menu Return to Main Menu Displays the menu to activate and configure or deactivate 1 support To select menu item press item number or highlight item an Needs reboot to activate changes press lt Enter gt Figure 6 6 Indication of a Configuration Change Requiring a Reboot Configuration Changes Using the Web Browser Interface You can use the web browser interface to simultaneously save and implement asubset of switch configuration changes without having to reboot the switch That is when you save a configuration change in most cases by clicking on Apply Changes or Apply Settings you simultaneously change both the running config file and the startup config file If you reconfigure a parameter
45. above switches 1 3 ignore these entries because the file implements IP Preserve and their current IP addressing was not acquired through DHCP Bootp Switch 4 ignores IP Preserve and implements the DHCP Bootp addressing and IP Gateway specified in this file because its last IP addressing was acquired from a DHCP Bootp server Figure 8 8 Configuration File in TFTP Server with DHCP Bootp Specified as the IP Addressing Source If you apply this configuration file to figure 8 7 switches 1 3 will still retain their manually assigned IP addressing However switch 4 will be configured with the IP addressing included in the file 8 18 Configuring IP Addressing IP Preserve Retaining VLAN 1 IP Addressing Across Configuration File Downloads J48654 Configuration Editor Created on release 4G 07 5X hostname HP4108 time daylight time rule None cdp run interface All no lacp exit interface Al2 no lacp exit trunk A1l1 A12 Trki Trunk ip default gateway 10 33 32 1 Because switch 4 figure 8 7 received snmp server community public Unrestricted its most recent IP addressing from a vlan 1 DHCP Bootp server the switch ignores the ip preserve command and name DEFAULT_VLAN implements the IP addressing forbid A3 included in this file untagged Al A A10 A13 A14 Trkl tagged Ad As no untagged A2 A3 ip address 10 31 22 255 255 255 248 0 exit password manager password operator ip preserve Figure 8 9 Configuration Fil
46. and the third lowest decimal value as the last address If the first octet is the same between two of the addresses the second octet is compared and so on For example SNTP Server Server Ranking According to IP Address Decimal Value of IP Address 10 28 227 141 Primary 10 28 227 153 Secondary 10 29 227 100 Tertiary Adding and Deleting SNTP Server Addresses Adding Addresses As mentioned earlier you can configure one SNTP server address using either the Menu interface or the CLI To configure a second and third address you must use the CLI For example suppose you have already configured the primary address in the above table 10 28 227 141 To configure the remaining two addresses you would do the following 9 22 Time Protocols SNTP Unicast Time Polling with Multiple SNTP Servers HPswitch config sntp server 10 29 227 100 HPswitch config sntp server 10 28 227 153 HPswitch config show sntp SNTP Configuration Time Syne Mode Sntp Prioritized listof SNTP SNTP Mode disabled IP Address Protocol Version Server IP Addresses Mie ies Interval sec 720 720 28 227 141 28 227 153 29 227 100 Figure 9 16 Example of SNTP Server Address Prioritization Note If there are already three SNTP server addresses configured on the switch and you want to use the CLI to replace one of the existing addresses with a new one you must delete the unwanted address before you configure the new one Dele
47. connected to the switch see the Installation and Getting Started Guide shipped with your switch or that you have already configured an IP address on the switch required for Telnet access 3 3 Using the Menu Interface Starting and Ending a Menu Session How To Start a Menu Interface Session In its factory default configuration the switch console starts with the CLI prompt To use the menu interface with Manager privileges go to the Manager level prompt and enter the menu command 1 Use one of these methods to connect to the switch e APC terminal emulator or terminal e Telnet You can also use the stack Commander if the switch is a stack member See Do one of the following e Ifyou are using Telnet go to step 3 e Ifyou are using a PC terminal emulator or a terminal press Enter one or more times until a prompt appears When the switch screen appears do one of the following e Ifa password has been configured the password prompt appears Password _ Type the Manager password and press Enter Entering the Manager password gives you manager level access to the switch Entering the Operator password gives you operator level access to the switch Refer to the chapter on local manager and operator usernames and passwords in the Access Security Guide for your switch e Ifno password has been configured the CLI prompt appears Go to the next step When the CLI prompt appears display the Menu interfa
48. copy xmodem flash lt primary secondary gt A 12 File Transfers Downloading Switch Software Note that if you do not specify the flash destination the Xmodem download defaults to primary flash For example to download a switch software file named G0103 swi from a PC running a terminal emulator program such as HyperTerminal to primary flash 1 Execute the following command in the CLI HPswitch copy xmodem flash The Primary OS Image will be deleted continue y n y Press Enter and start XMODEM on your host Figure A 4 Example of the Command to Download Switch Software Using Xodem 2 Execute the terminal emulator commands to begin the Xmodem transfer For example using HyperTerminal a Click on Transfer then Send File b Type the file path and name in the Filename field c Inthe Protocol field select Xmodem d Click on the Send button The download can take several minutes depending on the baud rate used in the transfer 3 When the download finishes you must reboot the switch to implement the newly dowloaded switch software To do so use one of the following commands boot system flash lt primary secondary gt Reboots the switch from the selected flash memory OY reload Reboots the switch from the flash image currently in use For more on these commands refer to Rebooting the Switch on page 6 17 4 Toconfirm that the operating system downloaded correctly use the show sy
49. m A general report of traffic on all LAN ports and trunk groups in the switch along with the per port flow control status On or Off m A detailed summary of traffic on a selected port or trunk group You can also reset the counters for a specific port The menu interface and the web browser interface provide a dynamic display of counters summarizing the traffic on each port The CLI lets you see a static snapshot of port or trunk group statistics at a particular moment As mentioned above rebooting or resetting the switch resets the counters to zero You can also reset the counters to zero for the current session This is useful for troubleshooting See the Note On Reset below The Reset action resets the counter display to zero for the current session but does not affect the cumulative values in the actual hardware counters In compliance with the SNMP standard the values in the hardware counters are not reset to zero unless you reboot the switch Thus using the Reset action resets the displayed counters to zero for the current session only Exiting from the console session and starting a new session restores the counter displays to the accumulated values in the hardware counters B 10 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Status and Counters Data Menu Access to Port and Trunk Statistics To access this screen from the Main Menu select 1 Status and Counters 4 Port Counters CONSOLE
50. reload The switch implements the Event Log change immediately The switch implements the other console changes after executing write memory and reload Figure 7 3 Example of Executing the Console Command with Multiple Parameters You can also execute a series of console commands and then save the configuration and boot the switch For example Configure HPswitch config console baud rate speed sense the Command will take effect after saving configuration and reboot individual parameters HPswitch config console flow control xon xoff Command will take effect after saving configuration and reboot HPswitch config console inactivity timer 0 Save the Command will take effect after saving configuration and reboot changes Boot the N HPswitch contiq write memory Salen HPswitch config reload Figure 7 4 Example of Executing a Series of Console Commands 7 7 Interface Access and System Information Denying Interface Access by Terminating Remote Management Sessions Denying Interface Access by Terminating Remote Management Sessions The switch supports up to four management sessions You can use show ip ssh to list the current management sessions and kill to terminate a currently running remote session Kill does not terminate a Console session on the serial port either through a direct connection or via a modem Syntax kill lt session number gt For example if you are using the switch
51. remove power from the switch and contact your HP service and support representative m Ifthere are no fan failures ensure that the ambient temperature in the switch s operating area is not causing the over temperature condition If the condition persists remove power from the switch until you can find the cause and apply an effective remedy C 5 Troubleshooting Browser or Telnet Access Problems Browser or Telnet Access Problems Cannot access the web browser interface Access may be disabled by the Web Agent Enabled parameter in the switch console Check the setting on this parameter by selecting 2 Switch Configuration 1 System Information The switch may not have the correct IP address subnet mask or gateway Verify by connecting a console to the switch s Console port and selecting 2 Switch Configuration 5 IP Configuration Note If DHCP Bootp is used to configure the switch the IP addressing can be verified by selecting 1 Status and Counters 2 Switch Management Address Information also check the DHCP Bootp server configuration to verify correct IP addressing If you are using DHCP to acquire the IP address for the switch the IP address lease time may have expired so that the IP address has changed For more information on how to reserve an IP address refer to the documentation for the DHCP application that you are using If one or more IP Authorized managers are configure
52. such as System Name See figure 2 4 Press E for Edit on the Actions line Use Tab or the arrow keys lt 4 or to highlight the item or field Do one of the following Ifthe parameter has preconfigured values either use the Space bar to select a new option or type the first part of your selection and the rest of the selection appears automatically The help line instructs you to Select a value Ifthere are no preconfigured values type in a value the Help line instructs you to Enter a value Ifyou want to change another parameter value return to step 3 If you are finished editing parameters in the displayed screen press Enter to return to the Actions line and do one of the following Tosave and activate configuration changes press S for the Save action This saves the changes in the startup configuration and also implements the change in the currently running configuration See Chapter 6 Switch Memory and Configuration To exit from the screen without saving any changes that you have made or if you have not made changes press C for the Cancel action Note In the menu interface executing Save activates most parameter changes and saves them in the startup configuration or flash memory and itis therefore not necessary to reboot the switch after making these changes But if an asterisk appears next to any menu item you reconfigure
53. 00 0002 eee 12 26 Outbound Traffic Distribution Across Trunked Links 12 26 Port Trunking Overview Overview This chapter describes creating and modifying port trunk groups This includes non protocol trunks LACP 802 3ad trunks and FEC trunks Port Status and Configuration Feature Default Menu CLI Web configuring a static trunk none page 12 10 page 12 16 group configuring a dynamic LACP LACP passive page 12 16 trunk group Port trunking allows you to assign physical links to one logical link trunk that functions as a single higher speed link providing dramatically increased bandwidth This capability applies to connections between backbone devices as well as to connections in other network areas where traffic bottlenecks exist Port Trunking Support HP ProCurve HP ProCurve HP ProCurve HP ProCurve Series 2600 Series 2800 Series 4100g 6108 Switch 2600 PWR Switch Switch Switch Ports per trunk maximum 4 8 4 4 Trunks per switch maximum 6 24 6 6 A trunk group is a set of ports configured as members of the same port trunk Note that the ports in a trunk group do not have to be consecutive For example 12 2 Note Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration The multiple physical links in a trunk behave as one logical link Switch 1 portcl port al Switch 2 Ports c1 c4 ae r Bah r Ports a2 and configured pore R a4 a6 are g ort c4 ort a4 a
54. 100Tx Yes Auto Disable c5 10 100TX Yes Auto Disable Trki Trunk c6 10 100TX Yes Auto Disable Trki Trunk Actions gt Cancel Edit Save Help Select whether the port is part of a trunk or Mesh Use arrow keys to change field selection lt Space gt to toggle field choices and lt Enter gt to go to Actions Figure 12 5 Example of the Configuration for a Two Port Trunk Group 6 Move the cursor to the Type column for the selected port and use the Space bar to select the trunk type LACP Trunk the default type if you do not specify a type FEC Fast EtherChannel trunk All ports in the same trunk group on the same switch must have the same Type LACP Trunk or FEC 7 When you are finished assigning ports to the trunk group press Enter then S for Save and return to the Main Menu It is not necessary to reboot the switch 12 11 Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration During the Save process traffic on the ports configured for trunking will be delayed for several seconds If the Spanning Tree Protocol is enabled the delay may be up to 30 seconds 8 Connect the trunked ports on the switch to the corresponding ports on the opposite device If you previously disabled any of the trunked ports on the switch enable them now See Viewing Port Status and Configur ing Port Parameters on page 10 3 Check the Event Log Using Logging To Identify Problem Sources on page C 23 t
55. 15 management and jumbo packets 10 22 management VLAN SNMP block 13 3 monitoring B 3 multinetting 8 9 multiple 13 3 multiple IP addresses 8 9 OS download A 3 port configuration C 20 primary 8 4 reboot required 3 8 subnet 8 9 support enable disable 3 8 tagging broadcast multicast and unicast traffic C 20 VLAN ID 4 15 See also VLAN VT 100 terminal 7 3 W warranty l ii web agent enabled 5 2 web agent advantages 2 5 web browser access configuration 7 3 web browser enable disable 7 4 web browser interface access parameters 5 8 alert log 5 6 5 19 alert log details 5 20 bandwidth adjustment 5 17 bar graph adjustment 5 17 disable access 5 2 enabling 5 4 error packets 5 16 fault detection policy 5 8 5 23 fault detection window 5 23 features 2 5 first time install 5 7 first time tasks 5 7 main screen 5 15 online help 5 13 online help location specifying 5 13 online help inoperable 5 13 overview 5 15 Overview window 5 15 password lost 5 11 password setting 5 9 port status 5 18 port utilization 5 16 port utilization and status displays 5 16 screen elements 5 15 security 5 2 5 8 standalone 5 4 status bar 5 22 status indicators 5 22 status overview screen 5 6 system requirements 5 4 troubleshooting access problems
56. 9 6 belonging to the public red team and blue team communities HPswitch show snmp server Example of r Community l Name Data See page 13 12 SNMP Communities L I I 1 Community Name I l l Operator Restricted L blue team Manager Unrestricted red team Trap Receivers Authentication 7 Send Authentication Traps No lt _____ Trap Setting I Example of Trap Receiver Data Address Community Events Sent in Trap 10 28 227 105 red team Critical I 10 28 227 200 I 10 28 227 120 blue team Not INFO Figure 13 9 Example of Show SNMP Server Listing 13 21 Configuring for Network Management Applications Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch Note Configuring Trap Receivers This command specifies trap receivers by community membership management station IP address and the type of Event Log messages to send to the trap receiver If you specify a community name that does not exist that is has not yet been configured on the switch the switch still accepts the trap receiver assign ment However no traps will be sent to that trap receiver until the community to which it belongs has been configured on the switch Syntax snmp server host lt community string gt lt ip address gt Using community name and destination IP address this command designates a destination network man agement station for receiving SNMP event log messages from
57. Although you can create and save configurations for both time proto cols without conflicts the switch allows only one active time protocol at any time m Inthe factory default configuration the time synchronization option is set to TimeP with the TimeP mode itself set to Disabled TimeP Time Synchronization You can either manually assign the switch to use a TimeP server or use DHCP to assign the TimeP server In either case the switch can get its time synchro nization updates from only one designated Timep server This option enhances security by specifying which time server to use SNTP Time Synchronization SNTP provides two operating modes Broadcast Mode The switch acquires time updates by accepting the time value from the first SNTP time broadcast detected In this case the SNTP server must be configured to broadcast time updates to the network broadcast address Refer to the documentation provided with your SNTP server application Once the switch detects a partic 9 2 Time Protocols Overview Selecting a Time Synchronization Protocol or Turning Off Time Protocol Operation ular server it ignores time broadcasts from other SNTP servers unless the configurable Poll Interval expires three consecutive times without an update received from the first detected server Note To use Broadcast mode the switch and the SNTP server must be in the same subnet Unicast Mode The switch requests a time update fr
58. C 43 failure OS download A 17 fan failure C 5 Fast EtherChannel See FEC fault detection 5 8 policy 5 8 setting the policy 5 23 window 5 23 fault detection policy 5 23 fault tolerance 12 5 FEC benefits 12 25 filter source port 10 23 firmware version B 6 flash memory 3 10 6 2 flow control 10 5 jumbo packets 10 18 10 22 flow control status B 10 flow control terminal 7 3 format date C 23 format time C 23 friendly port names See port names friendly G gateway 8 3 8 5 gateway IP address 8 4 8 6 giant packets 10 25 global config level CLI 8 11 H Help 3 11 5 13 Help line location on menu screen 3 9 help online inoperable 5 13 HP Procurve support URL 5 13 HP web browser interface 2 5 I IEEE 802 1d C 15 IEEE 802 3ab 10 5 IGMP host not receiving C 10 not working C 10 statistics B 20 inactivity timeout 7 4 Inbound Telnet Enabled parameter C 7 invalid input 4 13 IP CLI access 8 7 configuration 8 3 DHCP Bootp 8 3 duplicate address C 8 duplicate address DHCP network C 8 effect when address not used 8 11 gateway 8 3 gateway IP address 8 4 menu access 8 5 multinetting 8 9 multiple addresses in VLAN 8 9 stacking 8 5 subnet 8 9 subnet mask 8 3 8 6 subnetting 8 9 using for web browser interface 5
59. C 6 URL default 5 13 URL management server 5 14 URL support 5 14 web site HP 13 4 world wide web site HP See HP ProCurve write access 13 13 write memory effect on menu interface 3 13 X Xmodem OS download A 11 Index 9 10 Index O invent Technical information in this document is subject to change without notice Copyright 2000 2004 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws October 2004 Manual Part Number 5990 6023
60. CLI Contents oia e na a ee Rh etek digesta Gaines a 4 1 OVELVICW 28s ieee eases e tle EOE hod A E ae A Be e AES 4 2 Accessing the GUD S risiga gap etd y rasa EA nE aaa rE EN dos aera 4 2 Using the CHD i e seas se Gace e e E ene E E E E fave mibied wate eaves 4 2 Privilege Levels at Logon 0 0 ccc ec ence eee eens 4 3 Privilege Level Operation 0 0 cee cece eee eee eee 4 4 Operator Privileges 0 00 cece eee eee eee 4 4 Manager Privileges 00 cee cee eee eee ene 4 5 How To Move Between Levels 0 0 cee eee eee eee 4 7 Listing Commands and Command Options 0005 4 8 Listing Commands Available at Any Privilege Level 4 8 Command Option Displays 0 0 e eee eee eee 4 10 Displaying CLI Help 0 002 rannen nea 4 11 Configuration Commands and the Context Configuration Modes 4 13 CLI Control and Editing 0 4 16 5 Using the HP Web Browser Interface CONTENTS aea ec E E E ate A E KA SOR E A oe AN 5 1 CV ET VIC We a BLA OE TIE TA EA AOD ANAD E Sea Bast E watchs EA 5 2 General Features zis eck comiees Ero een EAEE O E it ges 5 3 Starting an HP Web Browser Interface Session with the Switch 5 4 Using a Standalone Web Browser in a PC or UNIX Workstation 5 4 Using HP ProCurve Manager PCM or HP ProCurve Manager Plus CREM piaeas cata E EAE EA E ncn tibiae Mauser tes 5 5 Tasks for Your First HP Web Browse
61. CLI access 13 20 event levels 13 22 limit 13 20 receiver 13 20 SNMP 13 20 trap receiver 13 4 13 5 configuring 13 20 13 22 troubleshooting approaches C 3 browsing the configuration file C 39 console access problems C 6 diagnosing unusual network activity C 8 diagnostics tools C 34 fast uplink C 15 OS download A 17 ping and link tests C 35 restoring factory default configuration C 43 spanning tree C 15 SSH C 16 switch won t reboot shows gt prompt C 44 unusual network activity C 8 using the event log C 23 web browser access problems C 6 trunk See port trunk trunk group FEC 12 20 TTL 8 4 8 5 types of alert log entries 5 20 U unauthorized access 13 23 undersize packets 10 25 Universal Resource Locator See URL Unix Bootp 8 14 unrestricted write access 13 13 unusual network activity C 8 up time B 6 URL browser interface online help location 5 13 HP Procurve 5 13 13 4 management 5 13 management server 5 12 5 13 support 5 12 5 13 user name using for browser or console access 5 8 5 10 users SNMPv3 See SNMPvs3 using the passwords 5 10 utilization port 5 16 V version OS A 5 A 12 A 15 VLAN 8 4 C 21 D 2 address 13 3 Bootp 8 14 configuring Bootp 8 14 device not seen C 20 event log entries C 23 link blocked C
62. Duplex Port Mode Notes Ensure that the device attached to the port is configured for the same setting that you select here If using Auto the device to which the port connects must also be using Auto and operate in compliance with the IEEE 802 3ab Auto Negotiation standard for 1000Base T networks Gigabit fiber optic ports Gigabit SX Gigabit LX and Gigabit LH e 1000FDx 1000 Mbps 1 Gbps Full Duplex only e Auto default The port operates at 1000FDx and auto negotiates flow control with the device connected to the port Auto MDIX 2600 2600 PWR and 2800 Only The switch supports Auto MDIX on 10Mb 100Mb and 1 Gb T TX copper ports Fiber ports and 10 gigabit ports do not use this feature e Automdix Configures the port for automatic detection of the cable type straight through or crossover e MDI Configures the port for connecting to a PC or other MDI device with a crossover cable e MDIX Configures the port for connecting to a switch hub or other MDI X device with a straight through cable Flow Control e Disabled default The port does not generate flow control packets and drops any flow control packets it receives e Enabled The port uses 802 3x Link Layer Flow Control generates flow control packets and processes received flow control packets With the port mode set to Auto the default and Flow Control enabled the switch negotiates Flow Control on the indicated port I
63. Flash Option In the above example typing either a y or n at the second prompt initiates the reboot operation Also if there are no pending configuration changes in the running config file then the reboot commences without the pause to display Boot from secondary flash 6 18 Switch Memory and Configuration Using Primary and Secondary Flash Image Options Booting from the Current Software Version Reload reboots the switch from the flash image on which the switch is currently running and saves to the startup config file any configuration changes currently in the running config file Because reload bypasses some subsystem self tests the switch reboots faster than if you use either of the boot command options Syntax reload For example if you change the number of VLANs the switch supports you must reboot the switch in order to implement the change Reload automati cally saves your configuration changes and reboots the switch from the same software image you have been using HPswitch config max vlans 12 Command will take effect after saving configuration and reboot HPswitch config reload Device will be rebooted do you want to continue y n y Do you want to save current configuration y n Figure 6 15 Using Reload with Pending Configuration Changes Operating Notes Default Boot Source The switch reboots from primary flash by default unless you specify the secondary flash Boot Attempts from an Empty Fl
64. Group Operation Using LACP on page 12 18 Trunk Configuration All ports in the same trunk group must be the same trunk type LACP Trunk or FEC All LACP ports in the same trunk group must be either all static LACP or all dynamic LACP A trunk appears as a single port labeled Dyn1 for an LACP dynamic trunk or Trk1 for a static trunk of any type LACP Trunk or FEC on various menu and CLI screens For a listing of which screens show which trunk types see How the Switch Lists Trunk Data on page 12 26 For STP or VLAN operation configuration for all ports in a trunk is done at the trunk level You cannot separately configure individual ports within a trunk for STP or VLAN operation Traffic Distribution All of the switch trunk protocols use the SA DA Source Address Destination Address method of distributing traffic across the trunked links See Outbound Traffic Distribution Across Trunked Links on page 12 26 Trunk Group Boundary Requirement for the Series 2800 Switches When IP Routing is Enabled On the Switch 2824 and Switch 2848 manually or dynamically configuring a trunk with ports belonging to different port groups is not supported if IP routing is enabled Each trunk group must be comprised only of ports from the same port group as shown below e Ports 1 12 Switch 2824 and 2848 e Ports 13 24 Switch 2824 and 2848 e Ports 25 36 Switch 2848 only e Ports 37 48 Switch 2848 only For example you ca
65. HPswitch z z2 222222222222222222 2 2222 CONSOLE MANAGER MODE s sessesesessesesesssseces Status and Counters Port Status Intrusion Flow Port Type Alert Enabled a2 10 100TX No Down 10FDx off 43 10 100TZ No Down 10FDx off 44 10 100TX No Down 10FDx off 45 10 100TX No Down 10FDx off 46 107 100TZ No Down 10FDx off A 10 100TX No Down 10FDx off 4s 10 100TX No Down 10FDx off 49 107 100TZ No Down 10FDx off 410 10 100TX No Down 10FDx off ii 10 100TX No Down 10FDx off Actions gt Intrusion log Help Return to previous screen Use up down arrow keys to scroll to other entries left right arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Figure B 5 Example of Port Status on the Menu Interface CLI Access Syntax show interfaces brief Web Access 1 Click on the Status tab 2 Click on Port Status B 9 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Status and Counters Data Note on Reset Viewing Port and Trunk Group Statistics and Flow Control Status Feature Default Menu CLI Web viewing port and trunk statistics for all n a page B 11 page B 12 page B 12 ports and flow control status viewing a detailed summary for a n a page B 11 page B 12 page B 12 particular port or trunk resetting counters n a page B 11 page B 12 page B 12 These features enable you to determine the traffic patterns for each port since the last reboot or reset of the switch You can display
66. If an SNTP time change of more than three seconds occurs the switch s event log records the change SNTP time changes of less than three seconds do not appear in the Event Log 9 24 10 Port Status and Basic Configuration Contents QVCIVIEW easset ig eh ts Gag age ea GR eA Sb ae REE Ee lee 10 3 Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters 10 3 Menu Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters 10 6 CLI Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters 10 7 Using the CLI To View Port Status 00 10 8 weet got acide scene tebe 6 Weed sete cag ea iat ese Y 10 9 Using the CLI To Configure Ports 2 5 10 10 Using the CLI To Configure a Broadcast Limit 10 11 Configuring HP Auto MDIX 0 002 e eee eee 10 13 Manual Auto MDIX Override 00 c eee eee 10 14 Web Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters 10 17 Jumbo Packets on the Series 2800 Switches 10 17 Terminology 3 006 8 004 Wee laid bia Eat ole dg ee he ee bea 10 18 Operating Rules 0 6c eee ce bea ie bbe AATE Dae ee RE 10 18 Configuring Jumbo Packet Operation 00 eee 10 19 OVEFVIEW noi ee ele Me a la ed Rk er ass 2h a 10 19 Viewing the Current Jumbo Configuration 10 20 Enabling or Disabling Jumbo Traffic ona VLAN 10 22 Operating Notes for Jumbo Traffic Handling
67. Indicators and Legend The Port Status indicators show a symbol for each port that indicates the general status of the port There are four possible statuses m Port Connected the port is enabled and is properly connected to an active network device m Port Not Connected the port is enabled but is not connected to an active network device A cable may not be connected to the port or the device at the other end may be powered off or inoperable or the cable or connected device could be faulty m Port Disabled the port has been configured as disabled through the web browser interface the switch console or SNMP network manage ment Port Fault Disabled a fault condition has occurred on the port that has caused it to be auto disabled Note that the Port Fault Disabled symbol will be displayed in the legend only if one or more of the ports is in that status See appendix B Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Opera tion for more information 5 18 Using the HP Web Browser Interface Status Reporting Features The Alert Log The web browser interface Alert Log shown in the lower half of the screen shows a list of network occurrences or alerts that were detected by the switch Typical alerts are Broadcast Storm indicating an excessive number of broadcasts received on a port and Problem Cable indicating a faulty cable For more information on alerts see Alert Types and Detailed Views on page 5 20 Status Ale
68. Memory and Configuration Using Primary and Secondary Flash Image Options The prompt shows which flash s location will be erased HPswitch erase flash primary The Primary OS Image will be deleted continue y n Figure 6 11 Example of Erase Flash Prompt 3 Type y at the prompt to complete the flash erase 4 Use show flash to verify erasure of the selected software flash image HPswitch show flash The 0 here an ee shows that primary flash has been erased Compressed Primary Code size 0 Compressed Secondary Code size 2555802 Boot Rom Version G O5 X1 Current Boot Secondary Figure 6 12 Example of Show Flash Listing After Erasing Primary Flash Rebooting the Switch The switch offers reboot options through the boot and reload commands plus the options inherent in a dual flash image system Generally using boot provides more comprehensive self testing using reload gives you a faster reboot time Table 6 2 Comparing the Boot and Reload Commands Actions IncludediIn IncludediIn Note Boot Reload Save all configuration Optional Yes Config changes saved to the changes since the last boot with prompt automatic startup config file or reload Perform all system self tests Yes No Reload provides a faster system reboot Choice of primary or Yes No Uses secondary the current flash image 6 17 Switch Memory and Configuration Using Primary and Secondary Flash Image Options Booting fr
69. Menu Viewing the Switch s MAC Addresses 2 D 3 CLI Viewing the Port and VLAN MAC Addresses D 4 Viewing theMAC Addresses of Connected Devices on Series 2600 2600 PWR 2800 and 4100gl Switches D 6 E Daylight Savings Time on HP ProCurve Switches Configuring Daylight Savings Time 00 0 eee eee eee E 1 Index Xiv Getting Started Contents Mntrod ction epee een TA EE O a 1 2 About the Feature Descriptions 00 00 unran eee ee eee 1 2 CONVENTIONS acio 201 det eshk hed ek aces hdl eae boa ieee stb be Sed Gute NE Aaland 1 3 Command Syntax Statements 0 00 eee eee eee eee 1 3 Command Prompts 0 0 cece eee eee n eens 1 3 Screen Simulations 2 0 cece eee eee en a 1 4 Port Identity Convention for Examples 000000 e eee eee 1 4 Related Publications 0 c ccc cee ene eee 1 4 Getting Documentation From the Web 02 0 eee ee eee 1 6 Sources for More Information 00 cece cece eee eee 1 7 Need Only a Quick Start 2 0 2 0 0 ccc ec eee een 1 8 IP Addressing l 4005 b a4 dsb tease ann eee AR ea Ate ea raa GM 1 8 To Set Up and Install the Switch in Your Network 1 8 1 1 Getting Started Introduction Introduction This Management and Configuration Guide is intended to support the following switches HP ProCurve Series 2600 HP ProCurve
70. Overview Selecting a Time Synchronization Protocol or Turning Off Time Protocol Operation sssri rustoer a koen eae eee eee eer Eee ene 9 3 General Steps for Running a Time Protocol on the Switch 9 3 Disabling Time Synchronization 2 0 0 e eee eee ee 9 4 SNTP Viewing Selecting and Configuring 004 9 4 Menu Viewing and Configuring SNTP 2 0 00 9 5 CLI Viewing and Configuring SNTP 2 0 eee eee 9 8 Viewing the Current SNTP Configuration 9 8 Configuring Enabling or Disabling the SNTP Mode 9 9 TimeP Viewing Selecting and Configuring 2 9 14 Menu Viewing and Configuring TimeP 0 5 9 15 CLI Viewing and Configuring TimeP 2 4 9 16 Viewing the Current TimeP Configuration 9 17 Configuring Enabling or Disabling the TimeP Mode 9 18 SNTP Unicast Time Polling with Multiple SNTP Servers 9 21 Address Prioritization 0 0 an A ene eee 9 22 Adding and Deleting SNTP Server Addresses 9 22 Menu Interface Operation with Multiple SNTP Server Addresses Configured exes heats eek SUE Ea ened ta OS Rae ath aeetass 9 24 SNTP Messages in the Event Log 00 0 ce eee eee eee eee 9 24 10 Port Status and Basic Configuration Contents iaeaea BAGS wa eS BR ed eck Sead eae 10 1 Overview icles vag tin ese
71. Passive Either of the above link configurations allow a dynamic LACP trunk link Standby Links A maximum of four 2600 2600 PWR 4100gl and 6108 or eight 2800 operating links are allowed in the trunk but with dynamic LACP you can configure one or more backup links that the switch automatically activates if a primary link fails To configure a link as a standby for an existing dynamic LACP trunk ensure that the ports in the standby link are configured the same as either of the above examples Displaying Dynamic LACP Trunk Data To list the configuration and status for a dynamic LACP trunk use the CLI show lacp command Note The dynamic trunk is automatically created by the switch and is not listed in the static trunk listings available in the menu interface or in the CLI show trunk listing Static LACP The trunk operates if the trunk group on the opposite device is running one of the following trunking protocols e Active LACP e Passive LACP e Trunk e FEC This option uses LACP for the port Type parameter and TrkX for the port Group parameter where X is an automatically assigned value from 1 to 6 2600 2600 PWR 4100gl and 6108 or 1 to 24 2800 depending on how many static trunks are currently operating on the switch The switch allows the maximum number of trunk groups in any combination of static and dynamic trunks Displaying Static LACP Trunk Data To list the configuration and status for a
72. Security Guide for your switch The show port access authenticator lt port list gt command shows one or more ports remain open after they have been configured with control unauthorized 802 1X is not active on the switch After you execute aaa port access authenticator active all ports configured with control unauthorized should be listed as Closed C 12 Troubleshooting Unusual Network Activity HPswitch config show port access authenticator e AS PortA9showsan Open status even Port Access Authenticator though Access Control is set to Port access auth Cator activated No No Unauthorized Force Auth This is Authenticator Authenticater because the port access Port Stats Control State Backend State Bee ein wager e activated Ag FU Force Auth Idle HPswitch config aaa port access authenticator active HPswitch config show port access authenticator e A9 Port Access Authenticator Status Port access authenticator activated No Yes Access Authenticator Authenticator Port Status Control State Backend State Force Unauth Idle Figure C 2 Example of a Port Remaining Open After Being Configured with Control Unauthorized RADIUS server fails to respond to a request for service even though the server s IP address is correctly configured in the switch Use show radius to verify that the encryption key RADIUS secret key the switch is using is correct for the server being contacted Ifthe switch ha
73. Series 2600 PWR HP ProCurve Series 2800 HP ProCurve Series 4100gl HP ProCurve Switch 6108 This guide describes how to use the command line interface CLI Menu interface and web browser interface to configure manage and monitor switch operation A troubleshooting chapter is also included For information on other product documentation for the above switches refer to Related Publications on page 1 4 The Product Documentation CD ROM shipped with the switch includes a copy of this guide You can also download a copy from the HP ProCurve website http www hp com go hpprocurve See Getting Documentation From the Web on page 1 6 About the Feature Descriptions In cases where a software feature is not available in all of the switch products covered by this guide the text specifically indicates which device s offer the feature 1 2 Getting Started Conventions Conventions This guide uses the following conventions for command syntax and displayed information Command Syntax Statements Syntax aaa port access authenticator lt port list gt control lt authorized auto unauthorized gt m Vertical bars separate alternative mutually exclusive elements m Square brackets indicate optional elements m Braces lt gt enclose required elements m Braces within square brackets lt gt indicate a required element within an optional choice Boldface indica
74. Switches Release 1 07 52 introduced a new command to enhance the performance of line rate traffic transfers through the Series 2800 switches This feature should only be used in environments where Quality of Service QoS is not of major importance but where lossless data transfers are key This command essen tially disables any discrimination of QoS queues for traffic consolidating packet buffer memory to provide line rate flows with no loss of data General Operation The port buffering design for the Series 2800 switches has been optimized for gigabit to gigabit traffic flows For this reason some flows from Gigabit to 100Base or even 100Base to 10Base may not perform as well as would be expected The QoS Pass Through mode enhancement can provide a signifi 10 25 Port Status and Basic Configuration QoS Pass Through Mode on the Series 2800 Switches cant performance improvement for high bandwidth traffic flows through the 2800 switches particularly when running traffic flows from 1000Base to either 100Base or 10Base connections QoS Pass Through mode is OFF by default and must be enabled via the config context of the CLI by entering the CLI command qos passthrough mode followed by write memory and rebooting the switch QoS Pass Through mode when enabled results in the following general changes to switch operation m Alters the switch s default outbound priority queue scheme from four queues low normal medium a
75. TACACS servers are not configured to provide service to the switch Access Is Denied Even Though the Username Password Pair Is Correct Some reasons for denial include the following parameters controlled by your TACACS server application m The account has expired m The access attempt is through a port that is not allowed for the account m The time quota for the account has been exhausted m The time credit for the account has expired m The access attempt is outside of the time frame allowed for the account m The allowed number of concurrent logins for the account has been exceeded For more help refer to the documentation provided with your TACACS server application Unknown Users Allowed to Login to the Switch Your TACACS appli cation may be configured to allow access to unknown users by assigning them the privileges included in a default user profile Refer to the documentation provided with your TACACS server application System Allows Fewer Login Attempts than Specified in the Switch Configuration Your TACACS server application may be configured to allow fewer login attempts than you have configured in the switch with the aaa authentication num attempts command C 19 Troubleshooting Unusual Network Activity TimeP SNTP or Gateway Problems The Switch Cannot Find the Time Server or the Configured Gateway TimeP SNTP and Gateway access are through the primary VLAN which in the default configurat
76. Through Mode 002 e eee eee eee eee ees 10 26 How to enable disable QoS Pass Through Mode 10 27 Configuring Port Based Priority for Incoming Packets on the 4100gl and 6108 Switches 2 0 0 e cc cee eens 10 29 The Role of 802 1Q VLAN Tagging 2 02 cee eee ee 10 29 Outbound Port Queues and Packet Priority Settings 10 30 Operating Rules for Port Based Priority 10 31 Configuring and Viewing Port Based Priority 10 32 Messages Related to Prioritization 0200 05 10 33 Troubleshooting Prioritization 0 cece eee eee ee 10 33 Using Friendly Optional Port Names 00 02 eee eee 10 34 Configuring and Operating Rules for Friendly Port Names 10 34 Configuring Friendly Port Names 0 0200 eee 10 35 Displaying Friendly Port Names with Other Port Data 10 37 viii 11 Power Over Ethernet PoE Operation for the Series 2600 PWR Switches Contents osage a n E a AE a a a Ea A E AE 11 1 Applicable Switch Models 00 0 nnana 11 2 introduction ma soa g 8G aad eas Sand o A a E PAE Seats AAE a 11 2 General Operation 00 00 cece eee eee ete n eee 11 2 Related Publications 00 0 cece cece cence nee 11 3 FPEFTMINOLO SY ice uy scene sete Sed eas A wae doce GUMS oa oR TE elas bh R Mach ate 11 3 General PoE Operation 0 e eee eee een ene
77. Unicast mode with an SNTP server at 10 28 227 141 and a server version of 3 the default no sntp changes the SNTP configuration as shown below and disables time synchronization on the switch HPswitch config no sntp HPswitch config show snt Swi eohi g i p Even though the Time Sync Mode is setto Sntp SNTP Configuration time synchronization is disabled because no Time Sync Mode Sntp sntp has disabled the SNTP Mode parameter SNTP Mode disabled Poll Interval sec 720 720 IP Address Protocol Version 10 28 227 141 Figure 9 8 Example of Disabling Time Synchronization by Disabling the SNTP Mode 9 13 Time Protocols TimeP Viewing Selecting and Configuring TimeP Viewing Selecting and Configuring TimeP Feature Default Menu CLI Web view the Timep time synchronization n a page 9 15 page 9 17 configuration select Timep as the time synchronization TIMEP page 9 13 pages 9 18 S method ff disable time synchronization timep page 9 15 page 9 20 _ enable the Timep mode Disabled DHCP page 9 15 page 9 18 manual page 9 16 page 9 19 none disabled page 9 15 page 9 21 change the SNTP poll interval 720 seconds page 9 16 page 9 20 _ Table 9 2 Timep Parameters SNTP Parameter Operation Time Sync Method Timep Mode Disabled DHCP Server Address Poll Interval minutes Used to select either TIMEP the default SNTP or None as the time synchronization metho
78. adapt this procedure to the operation of your particular emulator 1 Start the terminal emulator program 2 Ensure that the terminal program is configured as follows m Baudrate 9600 1 stop bit m No parity No flow control m 8Bits 3 Use the Reset button to reset the switch The following prompt should then appear in the terminal emulator Enter h or for help gt C 44 Troubleshooting Restoring a Flash Image Since the OS file is large you can increase the speed of the download by changing the switch console and terminal emulator baud rates to a high speed For example a Change the switch baud rate to 115 200 Bps gt sp 115200 b Change the terminal emulator baud rate to match the switch speed i In HyperTerminal select Call Disconnect ii Select File Properties iii Click on Configure iv Change the baud rate to 115200 v Click on 0K In the next window click on 0K again vi Select Call Connect vii Press Enter one or more times to display the gt prompt Start the Console Download utility by typing do at the gt prompt and pressing Enter gt do You will then see this prompt You have invoked the console download utility Do you wish to continue Y N gt _ At the above prompt a Type y for Yes b Select Transfer File in HyperTerminal c Enter the appropriate filename and path for the OS image d Select the Xmodem protocol and not the 1k X
79. are making topology changes Status Up The port senses a linkbeat read only Down The port is not enabled has no cables connected or is experiencing a network error For troubleshooting information see the installation manual you received with the switch See also chapter 11 Troubleshooting in this manual Mode The port s speed and duplex data transfer operation setting 10 100Base T ports e Auto default Senses speed and negotiates with the port at the other end of the link for data transfer operation half duplex or full duplex Note Ensure that the device attached to the port is configured for the same setting that you select here If Auto is used the device to which the port connects must operate in compliance with the IEEE 802 3u Auto Negotiation standard for 100Base T networks Ifthe other device does not comply with the 802 3u standard or is not set to Auto then the port configuration on the switch must be manually set to match the port configuration on the other device To see what the switch negotiates for the Auto setting use the CLI show interfaces command or the 3 Port Status option under 1 Status and Counters in the menu interface e Auto 10 Allows the port to negotiate between half duplex HDx and full duplex FDx while keeping speed at 10 Mbps Also negotiates flow control enabled or disabled HP recommends Auto 10 for links between 10 100 autosensing ports connected with Cat
80. are marked with an asterisk next to the config ured item in the menu and also next to the Switch Configuration item in the Main Menu 3 5 Using the Menu Interface Starting and Ending a Menu Session Asterisk indicates a configuration change that requires a reboot to activate Displays To select menu item Needs reboot to activate changes SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Main Menu Status and Counters Switch Configuration Console Passwords Event Log Command Line CLI Reboot Switch Download OS Run Setup Stacking Logout CH DAKHNEWYNE the menu for customizing the switch configuration or highlight item and press lt Enter gt press item number Figure 3 2 An Asterisk Indicates a Configuration Change Requiring a Reboot 1 In the current session if you have not made configuration changes that require a switch reboot to activate return to the Main Menu and press 0 zero to log out Then just exit from the terminal program turn off the terminal or quit the Telnet session If you have made configuration changes that require a switch reboot thatis if an asterisk appears next to a configured item or next to Switch Configuration in the Main Menu a Return to the Main Menu b Press 6 to select Reboot Switch and follow the instructions on the reboot screen Rebooting the switch terminates the menu
81. cdp run interface 5 broadcast limit 45 exit interface 6 broadcast limit 45 interface 7 broadcast limit 45 exit snnp server community public Unrestricted vlan 1 name DEFAULT_VLAN untagged 1 24 ip address dhcp bootp exit Figure 10 1 Configuring and Displaying a Per Port Broadcast Limit on Switch 2800 Series Device Configuring HP Auto MDIX Copper ports on the switch can automatically detect the type of cable config uration MDI or MDI X on a connected device and adjust to operate appro priately This means you can use a straight through twisted pair cable or a cross over twisted pair cable for any of the connections the port makes the necessary adjustments to accommodate either one for correct operation The following port types on your switch support the IEEE 802 3ab standard which includes the Auto MDI MDI X feature HP ProCurve Series HP ProCurve Series HPProCurveSwitch HP ProCurve 6108 2600 Switch 2800 Switch Series 4100gl Switch 10 100 TX ports 10 100 1000 T ports 10 100 TX gl 10 100 1000 T ports module ports 10 100 1000 T ports 100 1000 T gl module ports 10 100 1000 T gl module ports 10 13 Port Status and Basic Configuration Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters Using the above ports m If you connect a copper port using a straight through cable to a port on another switch or hub that uses MDI X ports the switch port automati cally operate
82. cee eee eee eee 13 34 Effect of Spanning Tree STP On CDP Packet Transmission 13 36 How the Switch Selects the IP Address To Include in Outbound CDP Packets gcse tiveiach ostra tiot a theo atatevelg alate Sia I ee see dona EE Bue 13 37 CDP Neighbor Data and MIB Objects 000 13 38 Operating NOt S o oaaae po EdE ron EErEE E wk Mane be eee 13 40 A File Transfers CONTENTS cea eed Pe NEERA E ave Reh gee E E Bees a A 1 OVERVIEW tories a nna eA a a n etre iden ines cade es E ede A 2 Downloading Switch Software 00 0 cece cece eee eee A 2 General Switch Software Download Rules A 3 Using TFTP To Download Switch Software from a Server A 3 Menu TFTP Download from a Server to Primary Flash A 4 CLI TFTP Download from a Server to Primary or Secondary Flash 66 00 3 cece cee eee bene et ese enen A 6 Using Secure Copy and SFTP 0 ce eee eee eee A 7 How It Works naoui erunt cece eee e enn ene A 8 The SCP SFTP Process 000 cece eee enn ene AY Command Options 00 0 0 eee A 9 A thenti ation sese eie wide rare nirai dee a ade ee aoe A 10 SCP SFTP Operating Notes 00 c eee eee eee ee A 10 Using Xmodem to Download Switch Software From a PC or UNIX Workstation aai a see ani eaves dates ented Hee SG Dee A 11 Menu Xmodem Download to Primary Flash A 11 CLI Xmodem Download from a PC or Unix Workstation to Primary
83. configuration and management access to system operators and administrators experienced in command prompt interfaces m Provides help at each level for determining available options and vari ables CLI Usage m For information on how to use the CLI refer to chapter 3 Using the Command Line Interface CLI To perform specific procedures such as configuring IP addressing or VLANs use the Contents listing at the front of the manual to locate the information you need m For monitoring and analyzing switch operation refer to appendix B 2 4 Selecting a Management Interface Advantages of Using the HP Web Browser Interface For information on individual CLI commands refer to the Index or to the online Help provided in the CLI interface Advantages of Using the HP Web Browser Interface Stack Access Information O Commander v Stack Closeup Stack Management invent oy Information 0 Status Non Critical Identity Status Configuration Security Diagnostics Support First time installation SOOO OOO OOOOOO OO B1 B2 B3 B4 BS B6 C1 C2 C3 C4 CI Legend E Unicast Rx or All Tx E Non Unicast Pkts Rx E Error Packets Rx Port Connected Port Not Connected Por Disabled LOO ROR OR OCRORORORORORCRORORO OR ORORORORO LOROCRORORG 06 Sept 02 8 59 24 AM Important installation information for your switch Open Event Acknowledge Selected Events Delete Selected Events Figure 2 3 Example of the HP Web Browser
84. configuration details from several internal switch sources including Image stamp software version data Running configuration Event Log listing Boot History Port settings Status and counters port status IP routes Status and counters VLAN information GVRP support Load balancing trunk and LACP Stacking status this switch Stacking status all Syntax show tech Executing show tech outputs a data listing to your terminal emulator However using your terminal emulator s text capture features you can also save show tech data to a text file for viewing printing or sending to an associate For example if your terminal emulator is the Hyperterminal application available with Microsoft Windows software you can copy the show tech output to a file and then use either Microsoft Word or Notepad to display the data In this case Microsoft Word provides the data in an easier to read format To Copy show tech output to a Text File This example uses the Microsoft Windows terminal emulator To use another terminal emulator application refer to the documentation provided with that application C 40 Note Troubleshooting Diagnostic Tools 1 In Hyperterminal click on Transfer Capture Text Capture Text 12 xi Folder c temp File Ce Browse cee Figure C 17 The Capture Text window of the Hypertext Application Used with Microsoft Windows Software 2 Inthe File field ent
85. contact location mac age time page 7 13 time time zone page 7 13 daylight time rule page 7 13 date page 7 13 time Listing the Current System Information This command lists the current system information settings Syntax show system information This example shows the switch s default console configuration HPswitch gt show system information Status and Counters General System Information System Name HP ProCurve Switch 4104GL System Contact System Location Mac Age Interval sec 300 Time Zone O Daylight Time Rule None Figure 7 7 Example of CLI System Information Listing 7 11 Interface Access and System Information System Information Configure a System Name Contact and Location for the Switch To help distinguish one switch from another configure a plain language identity for the switch Syntax hostname lt name string gt snmp server contact lt system contact gt location lt system location gt Both fields allow up to 48 characters Blank spaces are not allowed in the variables for these commands For example to name the switch Blue with Ext 4474 as the system contact and North Data Room as the location HPswitch config hostname Blue Blue config snmp server contct Ext 4474 location North Data Room Blue config show system information Status and Counters General System Information system Name New hostname _ 5 H System Contact Ext 4474 c
86. default configuration all 10 100Base TX ports on the switch are config ured to support PoE operation You can m Disable or re enable per port PoE operation on some ports to help control power usage and avoid oversubscribing PoE on the switch Configure per port priority for allocating power in case the switch becomes oversubscribed and must drop power for some lower priority ports to support the demand on other higher priority ports Configure a global power threshold on the switch to act as a trigger for sending a notice when the switch exceeds or goes below a specific level of POE power consumption Note The PoE ports on your switch support standard networking links and PoE 11 4 Power Over Ethernet PoE Operation for the Series 2600 PWR Switches General PoE Operation links Thus you can connect either anon PoE device or a PD to a PoE enabled port without reconfiguring the port PD Support The switch must have a minimum of 15 4 watts of unused PoE power available when you connect an 802 3af compliant PD regardless of how much power the PD actually uses On the Switch 2626 PWR there will always be enough power available to connect and support 802 3af PoE operation on all 24 10 100 TX ports On the Switch 2650 PWR however it is possible to oversub scribe the available PoE power In this case one or more PoE devices connected to the switch will lose power That is Sufficient PoE Power Available When a Switch
87. devices 13 30 troubleshooting C 9 version data 13 40 chassis over temperature See temperature Class of Service Index 1 priority settings mapped to downstream devices 10 30 Clear button 5 11 restoring factory default configuration C 43 CLI context level 10 10 command line interface See CLI communities SNMP 13 14 viewing and configuring with the CLI 13 16 viewing and configuring with the menu 13 14 configuration 3 7 Bootp 8 14 comparing startup to running 6 5 console 7 3 copying A 18 download A 3 factory default 6 8 8 2 IP 8 3 network monitoring B 24 permanent 6 6 permanent change defined 6 4 port 10 1 12 1 port trunk groups 10 1 12 1 quick 3 8 reboot to activate 3 13 restoring factory defaults C 43 saving from menu interface 3 10 serial link 7 3 SNMP 13 4 13 5 13 12 SNMP communities 13 14 13 16 startup 3 10 system 7 9 Telnet access configuration 7 3 transferring A 18 trap receivers 13 20 viewing 6 5 web browser access 7 3 configuration file browsing for troubleshooting C 39 console C 8 configuring 7 3 ending a session 3 5 features 2 3 Main menu 3 7 navigation 3 9 3 10 operation 3 10 starting a session 3 4 2 Index status and counters access 3 7 troubleshooting access prob
88. disabled on the port To re enable PoE support refer to Configuring PoE Operation on page 11 9 Fault The switch detects a problem with the connected PD Over Current Cnt Shows the number of times a connected PD has attempted to draw more than 15 4 watts Each occurrence generates an Event Log message Power Denied Cnt Shows the number of times PDs requesting power on the port have been denied due to insufficient power available Each occurrence generates an Event Log message Voltage The total voltage in dV being delivered to PDs Power The total power in mW being delivered to PDs Configured Type Shows the type of PD detected on the port Continued 11 13 Power Over Ethernet PoE Operation for the Series 2600 PWR Switches Viewing PoE Configuration and Status e Power Denied Cnt Shows the number of times PDs requesting power on the port have been denied due to insufficient power available Each occurrence generates an Event Log message Voltage The total voltage in dV being delivered to PDs e Power The total power in mW being delivered to PDs Configured Type Shows the type of PD detected on the port e PowerClass Shows the power class of the PD detected on the indicated port Classes include 0 0 44w to 12 95w 1 0 44w to 3 84w 2 3 84w to 6 49w 3 6 49w to 12 95w 4 reserved e MPS Absent Cnt This value shows the number of times a detected PD has no longer requested power from
89. downloads of operating system OS updates and Stacking Comiiander configuration files modem e Link test e Telnet access to the CLI or the menu interface e IGMP e Port monitoring e Timep server configuration e Password authentication e Quality of Service QoS 2600 2600 PWR and 2800 only e TFTP download of configurations and OS updates e Authorized IP manager e IP routing e Ping test Although a Commander can operate without an IP address doing so makes it unavailable for in band access in an IP network DHCP Bootp Operation Overview DHCP Bootp is used to provide configuration data from a DHCP or Bootp server to the switch This data can be the IP address subnet mask default gateway Timep Server address and TFTP server address If a TFTP server address is provided this allows the switch to TFTP a previously saved configuration file from the TFTP server to the switch With either DHCP or Bootp the servers must be configured prior to the switch being connected to the network Note The switch is compatible with both DHCP and Bootp servers Note Configuring IP Addressing IP Configuration The DHCP Bootp Process Whenever the IP Config parameter in the switch or in an individual VLAN in the switch is configured to DHCP Bootp the default or when the switch is rebooted with this configuration 1 DHCP Bootp requests are automatically broadcast on the local network The switch sends one typ
90. e End DST at 2am the first Sunday on or after September 24th Southern Hemisphere e Begin DST at 2am the first Sunday on or after October 25th e End DST at 2am the first Sunday on or after March Ist Western Europe e Begin DST at 2am the first Sunday on or after March 23rd e End DST at 2am the first Sunday on or after October 23rd A sixth option named User defined allows you to customize the DST config uration by entering the beginning month and date plus the ending month and date for the time change The menu interface screen looks like this all month date entries are at their default values T CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Switch Configuration System Information System Name HP4108 System Contact System Location Inactivity Timeout min 0 0 MAC Age Interval sec 300 300 Inbound Telnet Enabled Yes Yes Web Agent Enabled Yes Yes Time Sync Method None TIMEP TimeP Mode Disabled Disabled Select User defined and press v to display the remaining parameters Time Zone 0 0 Daylight Time Rule None User defined Beginning month April Beginning day 1 1 Ending month October October Ending day 1 1 Actions gt Cancel Edit Save Help Use arrow keys to change field selection lt Space gt to toggle field choices and lt Enter gt to go to Actions Figure E 1 Menu Interface with User Defined Daylight Time Rule Option Daylight
91. eee 11 4 Configuration Options 0 cece eee eens 11 4 PD SUPPOVt saans farars a go Reade aad Eek RAG DATA 11 5 Power Priority s siere u cance ede i Eee dae ee id 11 7 Configuring PoE Operation 0 0 ccc eee eens 11 9 Viewing PoE Configuration and Status 00 0202 eee 11 11 Displaying the Switch s Global PoE Power Status 11 11 Displaying an Overview of PoE Status on All Ports 11 12 Displaying the PoE Status on Specific Ports 11 13 Planning and Implementing a PoE Configuration 11 15 Assigning PoE Ports to VLANS 00 0 eee eee eee eee 11 15 Applying Security Features to PoE Configurations 11 15 PoE Operating Notes 00 c cece eee eee eee ene 11 16 PoE Event Log Messages 0 00 c cece eee een eee eens 11 17 12 Port Trunking CONTENTS sett eee ae ee ea he ied ee ae S OVERVIEW sechas eos Gok bck san Ole AI a Seabee dR debra Hed e alie Port Status and Configuration 00 0 cece cee eee eee Port Connections and Configuration 2 ee eee Link Connections s v oeeie te re cece eee eee nee Trunk Group Boundary Requirement with IP Routing Enabled on the Series 2800 Switch 2 2 000 Trunk Group Boundary Requirement for the Series 4100g1 Switch 10 100 1000 Module J4908A 2 0 Port Trunk Options and Operation 0 202 eee ae
92. file press Y for yes This means that the changes you entered in the running config file will be saved in the startup config file Ifyou want to discard the changes you made to the running config file so that it will match the startup config file then press N for no This means that the switch will discard the changes you entered in the running config file and will update the running config file to match the startup config file If you use the CLI to make a change to the running config file you should either use the write memory command or select the save option allowed during a reboot figure 6 2 above to save the change to the startup config file That is if you use the CLI to change a parameter setting but then reboot the switch from either the CLI or the menu interface without first executing the write memory command in the CLI the current startup config file will replace the running config file and any changes in the running config file will be lost Using the Save command in the menu interface does not save a change made to the running config by the CLI unless you have also made a configuration change in the menu interface Also the menu interface displays the current running config values Thus where a parameter setting is accessible from both the CLI and the menu interface if you change the setting in the CLI the new value will appear in the menu interface display for that parameter However as indicated above un
93. for 30 seconds Diagnostic Tools Diagnostic Features Feature Default Port Autonegotiation n a Ping Test n a Link Test n a Display Config File n a Admin and Troubleshooting n a Commands Factory Default Config page C 43 Buttons Port Status n a Menu n a pages B 9 and B 10 CLI n a page C 37 page C 37 page C 39 page C 42 page C 43 pages B 9 and B 10 Web n a page C 36 page C 36 page C 39 pages B 9 and B 10 Port Auto Negotiation When a link LED does not light indicating loss of link between two devices the most common reason is a failure of port auto negotiation between the connecting ports If a link LED fails to light when you connect the switch to a port on another device do the following 1 Ensure that the switch port and the port on the attached end node are both set to Auto mode C 34 Note Troubleshooting Diagnostic Tools 2 Ifthe attached end node does not have an Auto mode setting then you must manually configure the switch port to the same setting as the end node port See Chapter 10 Port Status and Basic Configuration Ping and Link Tests The Ping test and the Link test are point to point tests between your switch and another IEEE 802 3 compliant device on your network These tests can tell you whether the switch is communicating properly with another device To respond to a Ping test or a Link test the device you are trying to reach must be IEE
94. gt lt slot gt POE usage has exceeded threshold of lt 1 99 gt Indicates that POE usage in the switch or indicated slot if the switch includes module slots has exceeded the configured threshold for the switch as specified by the last execution of the power threshold lt 1 99 gt command Note that the switch also generates an SNMP trap for this event Port lt port gt PD Denied power due to insufficient power allocation There is insufficient power available to power the PD on the indicated port and the port does not have sufficient PoE priority to take power from another active PoE port Port lt port gt PD Invalid Signature indication The switch has detected a non 802 3af compliant load 11 18 Power Over Ethernet PoE Operation for the Series 2600 PWR Switches PoE Event Log Messages Port lt port gt PD MPS Absent indication The switch no longer detects a device on lt port gt The device may have been disconnected powered down or stopped functioning Port lt port gt PD Other Fault indication There is a problem with the PD connected to the port Port lt port gt PD Over Current indication The PD connected to lt port gt has requested more than 15 4 watts of power This may indicate a short circuit or other problem in the PD 11 19 Power Over Ethernet PoE Operation for the Series 2600 PWR Switches PoE Event Log Messages This page is intentionally un
95. id master gt xmodem where _ slot id a h and retrieves the crash log or crash data from the processor on the module in the specified slot master Retrieves crash log or crash data from the switch s chassis processor For example to copy the Crash Log for slot C to a file in a PC connected to the switch At this point press HPswitch config copy crash log xmodem Enter and startthe Press Enter and start XMODEM on your host Xmodem command sequence in your terminal emulator Transfer complete Figure A 11 Example of sending a Crash Log for Slot C to a File on an Attached PC A 23 File Transfers Copying Diagnostic Data to a Remote Host PC or Unix Workstation This page is intentionally unused A 24 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Contents Overview ilo he SASS Bh lg fe ead poled whe tae en R En a ia B 3 Status and Counters Data 0 c cece eee eens B 4 Menu Access To Status and Counters 00000e B 5 General System Information 00 0 cece eee eens B 6 Menu Access ic aia ed halle ie a elle bot bed B 6 CLI ACCESS u an a heed elaine Beep We aa B 6 Switch Management Address Information B 7 Menu Access eote it ae ole ee tae Hd a bid cate eta E es ate eae B 7 CLI ACCESS wads ce ansh eed bea ahoae bata at wa ashcavanaye Merle B 7 Module Information 00 0 cece cece eee nee B 8 Menu Displaying
96. if there is power available after provisioning any active PoE ports at the higher priority levels 11 10 Power Over Ethernet PoE Operation for the Series 2600 PWR Switches Viewing PoE Configuration and Status Viewing PoE Configuration and Status Displaying the Switch s Global PoE Power Status Syntax show power management Displays the switch s global PoE power status including e Max Power Lists the maximum PoE wattage available to provision active PoE ports on the switch PowerlnUse Lists theamountofPoE powerpresently inuse Operational Status Indicates whether PoE power is available on the switch Default On shows Off if PoE power is not available Shows Faulty if internal or external PoE power is oversubscribed or faulty Usage Threshold Lists the configured percentage of available PoE power provisioning the switch must exceed to generate a usage notice in the form of an Event Log message and an SNMP trap If this event is followed by a drop in power provisioning below the threshold the switch generates another SNMP trap and Event Log message Event Log messages are also sent to any optionally configured debug destinations Default 80 For example in the default PoE configuration when the switch is running with several ports supporting PD loads show power management displays data similar to the following on a Switch 2626 PWR device HPswitch PWR show power management Status and Counters S
97. in the destina tion switch downloads the switch software from the source switch s primary flash to either the primary or secondary flash in the destination switch Syntax copy tftp flash lt ip addr gt flash primary secondary If you do not specify either a primary or secondary flash location for the destination the download automatically goes to primary flash For example to download switch software from primary flash in a switch with an IP address of 10 28 227 103 to the primary flash in the destination switch you would execute the following command in the destination switch s CLI HPswitch copy tftp flash 10 29 227 103 flash Device will be rebooted do you want to continue yrn OO1LOTE or Running Total of Bytes Downloaded Figure A 5 Switch To Switch from Primary in Source to Either Flash in Destination Downloading from Either Flash in the Source Switch to Either Flash in the Destination Switch This command executed in the destination switch gives you the most options for downloading between switches Syntax copy tftp flash lt ip addr gt lt os primary gt lt os secondary gt primary secondary A 15 File Transfers Downloading Switch Software If you do not specify either a primary or secondary flash location for the destination the download automatically goes to primary flash For example to download switch software from secondary flash in a switch with an I
98. in the upper left corner of the graph The button shows the current scale setting such as 40 In the resulting menu select the bandwidth scale you want the graph to show 8 10 25 40 75 or 100 as shown in figure figure 5 10 Note that when viewing activity on a gigabit port you may want to select a lower value such as 3 or 10 This is because the bandwidth utilization of current network applications on gigabit links is typically minimal and may not appear on the graph if the scale is set to show high bandwidth utilization Port Utilization A2 A3 A4 AS AG a AS A9 e 0 0 0 0 Figure 5 10 Changing the Graph Area Scale To display values for each graph bar Hold the mouse cursor over any of the bars in the graph and a pop up display is activated showing the port identification and numerical values for each of the sections of the bar as shown in figure 5 11 next Port Utilization Port3 26 of 10Mb 26 was highest value 426 Unicast Rx or All Tx 7 0 Non Unicast Rx 0 Error Rx Figure 5 11 Display of Numerical Values for the Bar Using the HP Web Browser Interface Status Reporting Features Port Status Port Utilization Legend E Unicast Rx or All Tx E Non Unicast Pkts Rx Port Status Indicators EE Error Packets Rx Port Connected MO A11 M2 A134 Port Not Connected MO A2 ASA A A ATO OAB AD e 0 0 0 0 000o Zgo O Port Disabled Figure 5 12 The Port Status
99. intentionally unused 3 16 Using the Command Line Interface CLI Contents Overview pcs tgecrt bed hese eed eeaa eek 4a a a ea e a 4 2 Accessing the GED onto s aie kei tas Nadiad ee het eR Le es 4 2 Using the CED seee as bs a hs eats E SARs Soe ieee eee ERs 4 2 Privilege Levels at Logon 00 0 cece cece eee nee 4 3 Privilege Level Operation 0 cece cece teens 4 4 Operator Privileges 0 cece cece eee nee 4 4 Manager Privileges 0 cece cee ieii diera ii 4 5 How To Move Between Levels 002 cece eee eee eee 4 7 Listing Commands and Command Options 4 4 8 Listing Commands Available at Any Privilege Level 4 8 Command Option Displays 00 e eee eee eee 4 10 Displaying CLI Help 0 cee eee EE nee 4 11 Configuration Commands and the Context Configuration Modes 4 13 CLI Control and Editing 0 eee een eee 4 16 4 1 Using the Command Line Interface CLI Overview Note Overview The CLlis a text based command interface for configuring and monitoring the switch The CLI gives you access to the switch s full set of commands while providing the same password protection that is used in the web browser interface and the menu interface Accessing the CLI Like the menu interface the CLI is accessed through the switch console and in the switch s factory default state is
100. is a possibility the downstream device must be config ured to accept the jumbo traffic Otherwise this traffic will be dropped by the downstream device 10 24 Port Status and Basic Configuration QoS Pass Through Mode on the Series 2800 Switches Troubleshooting A VLAN is configured to allow jumbo packets but one or more ports drops all inbound jumbo packets The port may not be operating at 1 gigabit or higher Regardless of a port s configuration if it is actually operating at a speed lower than 1 gigabit it drops inbound jumbo packets For example if a port is configured for Auto mode speed duplex auto but has negotiated a 100 Mbps speed with the device at the other end of the link then the port cannot receive inbound jumbo packets To determine the actual operating speed of one or more ports view the Mode field in the output for the following command show interfaces brief lt port list gt A non jumbo port is generating Excessive undersize giant packets messages in the Event Log The 2800 switch can transmit outbound jumbo traffic on any port regardless of whether the port belongs to a jumbo VLAN In this case another port in the same VLAN on the 2800 switch may be jumbo enabled through membership in a different jumbo enabled VLAN and may be forwarding jumbo packets received on the jumbo VLAN to non jumbo ports Refer to Outbound Jumbo Traffic on page 10 23 QoS Pass Through Mode on the Series 2800
101. its IP configuration from a DHCP or Bootp server at the IP Config field keep the value as DHCP Bootp and go to step 8 e Ifyou want to manually configure the IP information use the Space bar to select Manual and use the Tab key to move to the other IP configuration fields 6 Select the IP Address field and enter the IP address for the switch 7 Select the Subnet Mask field and enter the subnet mask for the IP address 8 Press Enter then S for Save 8 6 Configuring IP Addressing IP Configuration CLI Configuring IP Address Gateway and Time To Live TTL IP Commands Used in This Section show ip page 8 7 vlan lt vlan id gt ip page 8 8 address ip default gateway page 8 11 ip ttl page 8 11 Viewing the Current IP Configuration The following command displays the IP addressing for each VLAN configured in the switch If only the DEFAULT_VLAN exists then its IP configuration applies to all ports in the switch Where multiple VLANs are configured the IP addressing is listed per VLAN The display includes switch wide packet time to live and if config ured the switch s default gateway and Timep configuration Syntax show ip For example in the factory default configuration no IP addressing assigned the switch s IP addressing appears as HPswitch gt show ip Internet IP Service Default Gateway Default TTL 64 TimeP Config DHCP TimeP Poll Interval min 720 IP Config IP Addr
102. monitor sone O oe een HPswitch config no int e al a3 a5 monitor an interface context level Ref These two commands show how to disable monitoring at the global config level for a single port or a group of ports Figure B 23 Examples of Removing Ports as Monitoring Sources B 28 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Port and Static Trunk Monitoring Features Web Configuring Port Monitoring To enable port monitoring 1 2 3 Click on the Configuration tab Click on Monitor Port To monitor one or more ports a Click on the radio button for Monitor Selected Ports b Select the port s to monitor Click on Apply Changes To remove port monitoring 1 2 Click on the Monitoring Off radio button Click on Apply Changes For web based Help on how to use the web browser interface screen click on the button provided on the web browser screen B 29 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Port and Static Trunk Monitoring Features This page is intentionally unused B 30 Troubleshooting Contents OVERVIEW sented mediei beene ee eeade ta ale aa edeiloendad eda C 3 Troubleshooting Approaches 0000 e cece eee ee eee eens C 3 Chassis Over Temperature Detection 00002 eee eee C 5 Browser or Telnet Access Problems 0 000 ce eee cece C 6 Unusual Network Activity 2 0 0 0 0 eee eee C 8 General Problems 006 cc cece ce tee cee
103. move the cursor to the port you want to configure 5 Use the Space bar to choose a trunk group Trk1 Trk2 trunk group assignment for the selected port 12 10 Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration e All ports in a trunk must have the same media type and mode such as 10 100TX set to 100F Dx or 100FX set to 100FDx The flow control settings must also be the same for all ports in a given trunk To verify these settings see Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Param eters on page 10 3 e You can configure the trunk group with one two three or four ports per trunk 2600 2600 PWR 4100 1 and 6108 switches or with one to eight ports 2800 switches If multiple VLANs are configured all ports within a trunk will be assigned to the same VLAN or set of VLANS With the 802 1Q VLAN capability built into the switch more than one VLAN can be assigned to a trunk See the chapter Port Based Virtual LANs VLANs and GVRP in the Advanced Traffic Management Guide To return a port to a non trunk status keep pressing the Space bar until a blank appears in the highlighted Group value for that port SssssssSssSsSSSSS s CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Switch Configuration Port Trunk Settings Port Type Enabled Mode Flow Ctrl Group Type Ra A Peseetoes h aa AEE ESAE eea AERA c1 10 100Tx Yes Auto Disable c2 10 100TX Yes Auta Disable c3 10 100Tx Yes Auto Disable c4 10
104. multiple switches simultaneously and securely SFTP secure file transfer protocol is unrelated to FTP although there are some functional similarities Once you set up an SFTP session through an SSH tunnel some of the commands are the same as FTP commands Certain commands are not allowed by the SFTP server on the switch such as those that create files or folders If you try to issue commands such as create or remove using SFTP the switch server returns an error message You can use SFTP just as you would TFTP to transfer files to and from the switch but with SFTP your file transfers are encrypted and require authenti cation so they are more secure than they would be using TFTP SFTP works only with SSH version 2 SSH v2 A 7 File Transfers Downloading Switch Software Note SFTP over SSH version 1 SSH v1 is not supported A request from either the client or the switch or both using SSH v1 generates an error message The actual text of the error message differs depending on the client software in use Some examples are Protocol major versions differ 2 vs 1 Connection closed Protocol major versions differ 1 vs 2 Connection closed Received disconnect from lt ip addr gt usr local libexec sftp server command not supported Connection closed SCP secure copy is an implementation of the BSD rep Berkeley UNIX remote copy command tunneled through an SSH connection SCP is used to copy files to an
105. not in use HP recommends that you first disable the port or disconnect the link on that port Syntax no trunk lt port list gt This example removes ports C4 and C5 from an existing trunk group HPswitch config no trunk c4 c5 Enabling a Dynamic LACP Trunk Group In the default port configura tion all ports on the switch are set to LACP Passive However to enable the switch to automatically form a trunk group that is dynamic on both ends of the link the ports on one end of a set of links must be LACP Active The ports on the other end can be either LACP Active or LACP Passive This command enables the switch to automatically establish a dynamic LACP trunk group when the device ports on the other end of the link are configured for LACP Passive 12 16 Caution Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration Switch A Switch B with ports set with ports set to LACP to LACP passive the passive the default default Dynamic LACP trunk cannot automatically form because both ends of the links are LACP passive In this case STP blocking is needed to prevent a loop Switch A Switch B with ports set with ports set to LACP to LACP active passive the default Dynamic LACP trunk automatically forms because both ends of the links are LACP and at least one end is LACP active STP is notneeded andthe clear advantages are increased ba
106. operation PoE configuration and mon itoring commands and Event Log messages related to PoE operation on the HP ProCurve Switch 2626 PWR and 2650 PWR devices The following two manuals provide further information m For information on installing the HP ProCurve Switch 2626 PWR and 2650 PWR refer to the Installation and Reference Guide provided with the switch m To help you plan and implement a PoE system in your network refer to the PoE Planning and Implementation Guide which is available from either of the following sources e The Documentation CD ROM version 3 5 or greater shipped with your Switch Series 2600 PWR device e The HP ProCurve website at http Awww hp com go hpprocurve Click on Technical support then Product manuals Terminology Term Use in this Manual active PoE port A PoE enabled port connected to a PD requesting power priority class Refers to the type of power prioritization where the switch uses Low the default High and Critical priority assignments to determine which groups of ports will receive power Note that power priority rules apply only if PoE provisioning on the switch becomes oversubscribed EPS External Power Supply for example an HP 600 RPS EPS or an HP ProCurve 610 EPS An EPS device provides power to provision PoE ports on a switch See also RPS below 11 3 Power Over Ethernet PoE Operation for the Series 2600 PWR Switches General PoE Operation Term Use in thi
107. or Secondary Flash 2 0s eee eee A 12 Switch to Switch Download 00 cece cee cece eens A 14 Menu Switch to Switch Download to Primary Flash A 14 CLI Switch To Switch Downloads 0000 00 ee A 15 xi xii Using HP PCM to Update Switch Software A 16 Troubleshooting TFTP Downloads 2 00 e eee eee ee A 17 Transferring Switch Configurations 00 02 e eee eee A 18 Copying Diagnostic Data to a Remote Host PC or Unix Workstation A 21 Copying Command Output to a Destination Device A 21 Copying Event Log Output to a Destination Device A 22 Copying Crash Data Content to a Destination Device A 22 Copying Crash Log Data Content to a Destination Device A 23 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Contents iscsi ole cele e ee See A elec E lets Rays teense ata B 1 OVEIMICW aain eoi e ae Pandas cease deeGe Baye DEEA AE A E E A B 3 Status and Counters Data 0 c cece eens B 4 Menu Access To Status and Counters 2 00000 B 5 General System Information 00 0 cece eee eens B 6 Menu ACCESS 1 0 ccc cc eee eee enn eee e nena B 6 CLIACCESS a eek IAC a oe SLO URS OA ct a ate bn B 6 Switch Management Address Information B 7 Meu ACCESS oi ea a Bak coe Pade a Wis cans tote orate Se es B 7 GLLACCESS ace onsets a aa r oh aae ace tee ge lS cdser ents a B 7
108. port Note that the switch lists the trunk by name such as Trk1 and does not list the individual ports in the trunk For example if ports C1 and C2 are configured as a static trunk named Trk1 they are listed inthe Spanning Tree display as Trk1 and do not appear as individual ports inthe Spanning Tree displays h keanmie saiia Port Type Cost Priority State Designated Bridge part of the show spanning Fe te ee ee mga gue oe ae Th Ge Qe eR gee Ep ea ate T tree listing ports C1 and C2 c3 100 1000T 5 128 Forwarding 0020c1 b27ac0 are members of TRK1 and c4 100 1000T 5 128 Forwarding 0060b0 889e00 do not appear as individual c5 100 10007 5 128 Disabled ports in the port c6 100 1000T 5 128 Disabled elds NI eins sit Trki 1 64 Forwarding 0001e7 a0ec00 listing When Spanning Tree forwards on a trunk all ports in the trunk will be forwarding Conversely when Spanning Tree blocks a trunk all ports in the trunk are blocked Note A dynamic LACP trunk operates only with the default Spanning Tree settings and does not appear in the Spanning Tree configuration display or show ip igmp listing Ifyou remove a portfrom a static trunk the port retains the same Spanning Tree settings that were configured for the trunk IP Multicast Protocol IGMP A static trunk of any type appears in the IGMP configuration display and you can configure IGMP for a static trunk in the same way that you would configure IGMP on a non trunked port Note that
109. port from sending outbound CDP packets and causes it to drop inbound CDP packets without recording their data in the CDP Neighbors table Suppose for example that switches A and B in figure 13 18 below are running CDP and that port A1 on switch A is connected to port B5 on switch B If you disable CDP on port Al of switch A then switch B will no longer receive CDP packets from switch A and switch A will drop the CDP packets it receives from switch B A1 Switch B data B5 Switch A data Switch A Switch B CDP Enabled on Port A1 CDP Enabled on Port B5 CDP Neighbor Table CDP Neighbor Table Port Data Port Data 1 eae a ee l CDP disabled on port A1 of switch A but enabled on port B5 of switch B Switch A Switch B CDP Disabled on Port A1 CDP Enabled on Port B5 CDP Neighbor Table CDP Neighbor Table f Empty for port A1 Empty for Port B5 Figure 13 18 Example of Disabling CDP on an Individual Port The switch A entry in the switch B CDP Neighbors table remains until the cdp holdtime time to live set in switch B expires Until then the show cdp neighbors command continues to list switch A on port B5 of switch B Syntax no cdp enable lt e port list gt For example to disable CDP on port A1 HPswitch config no cdp enable al 1
110. ports For example VLAN_1 and VLAN_2 use the same link between switch X and switch Y C 20 Troubleshooting Unusual Network Activity Switch Y Port Y 7 Link supporting VLAN_1 and VLAN_2 Switch X Port X 3 VLAN Port Assignment VLAN Port Assignment Port VLAN_1 VLAN_2 Port VLAN_1 VLAN_2 X 3 Untagged Tagged Y 7 Untagged Tagged Figure C 5 Example of Correct VLAN Port Assignments on a Link 1 If VLAN_1 VID 1 is configured as Untagged on port 3 on switch X then it must also be configured as Untagged on port 7 on switch Y Make sure that the VLAN ID VID is the same on both switches 2 Similarly if VLAN_2 VID 2 is configured as Tagged on the link port on switch A then it must also be configured as Tagged on the link port on switch B Make sure that the VLAN ID VID is the same on both switches Duplicate MAC Addresses Across VLANs The switch operates with mul tiple forwarding databases Thus duplicate MAC addresses occurring on different VLANs can appear where a device having one MAC address is a member of more than one 802 1Q VLAN and the switch port to which the device is linked is using VLANs instead of STP or trunking to establish redundant links to another switch If the other device sends traffic over multiple VLANs its MAC address will consistently appear in multiple VLANs on the switch port to which it is linked Note
111. running output and after write memory in the startup config output the switch does not implement the new setting until rebooted Syntax broadcast limit lt 0 99 gt Configures the theoretical maximum bandwidth percentage that can be used on the switch ports for incoming broadcasts The switch drops any broadcast or multicast traffic exceeding that limit Zero 0 disables the feature 10 11 Port Status and Basic Configuration Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters For example to configure a broadcast limit of 20 for all ports on the switch HPswitch config broadcast limit 20 Command will take effect after saving configuration and reboot HPswitch config write memory HPswitch config boot Figure 10 7 Example of Configuring a Global Broadcast Limit To display the current broadcast limit setting use either show config or show running HPswitch config show config Startup configuration J4887A Configuration Editor Created on release 6 07 21 Displays the startup config file The broadcast limit setting appears here if hostname HPswitch broadcast limit 20 cdp run module 1 type J4862A configured and saved to snmp server community public Unrestricted ate startup config file by a vlan 1 write memory command name DEFAULT VLAN In the Switch 2600 and untagged A2 A24 4100GL Series devices and no ip address the Switch 6108 you must no untagged Al reboot the switch to e
112. specified TimeP server no ip timep Disables TimeP Note To change from one TimeP server to another you must 1 use the no ip timep command to disable TimeP mode and then reconfigure TimeP in Manual mode with the new server IP address For example to select TimeP and configure it for manual operation using a TimeP server address of 10 28 227 141 and the default poll interval 720 minutes assuming the TimeP poll interval is already set to the default 9 19 Time Protocols TimeP Viewing Selecting and Configuring HPswitch config timesync timep Selects TimeP HPswitch config ip timep manual 10 28 227 141 Activates TimeP in Manual mode HPswitch config timesyne timep HPswitch configq ip timep manual 10 28 227 141 HPswitch confiq Show timep Timep Configuration Time Syne Mode Timep TimeP Mode Manual Server Address 10 28 227 141 Poll Interval min 720 Figure 9 13 Example of Configuring Timep for Manual Operation Changing the TimeP Poll Interval This command lets you specify how long the switch waits between time polling intervals The default is 720 minutes and the range is 1 to 9999 minutes This parameter is separate from the poll interval parameter used for SNTP operation Syntax ip timep dhcp interval lt 1 9999 gt ip timep manual interval lt 1 9999 gt For example to change the poll interval to 60 minutes HPswitch config ip t
113. static LACP trunk use the CLI show lacp command To list a static LACP trunk with its assigned ports use the CLI show trunk command or display the menu interface Port Trunk Settings screen Static LACP does not allow standby ports 12 20 Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration Default Port Operation In the default configuration all ports are configured for passive LACP How ever if LACP is not configured the port will not try to detect a trunk config uration and will operate as a standard untrunked port Note Passive and active LACP port will pause and listen for LACP packets once a link is established Once this pause is complete then the port if a trunk is not detected will be placed in forwarding mode Some end node applications have been found to be sensitive to this pause and may require LACP to be disabled on the port The following table describes the elements of per port LACP operation To display this data for a particular switch execute the following command in the CLI HPswitch gt show lacp 12 21 Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration Table 12 5 LACP Port Status Data Status Name Port Numb LACP Enabled Trunk Group Port Status LACP Partner LACP Status Shows the physical port number for each port configured for LACP operation C1 C2 C3 Unlisted port numbers indicate that the missing ports are assigned to a static Trunk group an FEC trunk group or are
114. steps for configuring SNMP version 1 and version 2c access management features are 1 Configure the appropriate SNMP communities Refer to SNMP Commu nities on page 13 12 2 Configure the appropriate trap receivers Refer to SNMP Notification and Traps on page 13 18 Insome networks authorized IP manager addresses are not used In this case all management stations using the correct community name may access the switch with the View and Access levels that have been set for that community 13 4 Caution Configuring for Network Management Applications Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch If you want to restrict access to one or more specific nodes you can use the switch s IP Authorized Manager feature Refer to the Access Security Guide for your switch The public community exists by default and is used by HP s network man agement applications Deleting the public community disables many net work management functions such as auto discovery traffic monitoring SNMP trap generation and threshold setting If security for network manage ment is a concern it is recommended that you change the write access for the public community to Restricted Configuring for SNMP Version 3 Access to the Switch SNMP version 3 SNMPv3 access requires an IP address and subnet mask configured on the switch See IP Configuration on page 8 3 If you are using DHCP Bootp to configure the
115. switch s base MAC address is also printed on a label affixed to the back of the switch Determining MAC Addresses in the Switch MAC Address Viewing Methods Feature Default Menu CLI Web view switch s base default vlan MAC address n a D 3 D 4 and the addressing for any added VLANs view port MAC addresses hexadecimalformat n a D 4 m Use the menu interface to view the switch s base MAC address and the MAC address assigned to any non default VLAN you have configured on the switch The switch s base MAC address is used for the default VLAN VID 1 that is always available on the switch D 2 Note MAC Address Management Determining MAC Addresses in the Switch m Use the CLI to view the switch s port MAC addresses in hexadecimal format Menu Viewing the Switch s MAC Addresses The Management Address Information screen lists the MAC addresses for m Base switch default VLAN VID 1 m Any additional VLANs configured on the switch Also the Base MAC address appears on a label on the back of the switch The Base MAC address is used by the first default VLAN in the switch This is usually the VLAN named DEFAULT_VLAN unless the name has been changed by using the VLAN Names screen On the switches covered by this guide the VID VLAN identification number for the default VLAN is always I and cannot be changed To View the MAC Address and IP Address assignments for VLANs C
116. switch ensure that the DHCP Bootp process provides the IP address See DHCP Bootp Operation on page 8 12 Once an IP address has been configured the main steps for configuring SNMP version 3 access management features are 1 Enable SNMPv3 for operation on the switch Refer to SNMP Version 3 Commands on page 13 6 2 Configure the appropriate SNMP users Refer to SNMP Version 3 Users on page 13 8 3 Configure the appropriate SNMP communities Refer to SNMP Commu nities on page 13 12 4 Configure the appropriate trap receivers Refer to SNMP Notification and Traps on page 13 18 Insome networks authorized IP manager addresses are not used In this case all management stations using the correct User and community name may access the switch with the View and Access levels that have been set for that community If you want to restrict access to one or more specific nodes you can use the switch s IP Authorized Manager feature Refer to the Access Security Guide for your switch Configuring for Network Management Applications Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch SNMP Version 3 Commands SNMP version 3 SNMPv3 adds a new command to the CLI for configuring SNMPv3 functions To enable SMNPv3 operation on the switch you must a Enable SNMPv3 with the snmpv3 enable command An initial user entry will be generated with MD5 authentication and DES privacy b You may restrict access to o
117. the Interface Access 00002 cee eee 7 4 CLI Modifying the Interface Access 0 0000s e eee eee 7 5 Denying Interface Access by Terminating Remote Management Sessions 7 8 System Information ss erea bee ek eb bes oe eae wae eed 7 9 Menu Viewing and Configuring System Information 7 10 CLI Viewing and Configuring System Information 7 11 Web Configuring System Parameters 2020eeeee 7 14 7 1 Interface Access and System Information Overview Overview This chapter describes how to View and modify the configuration for switch interface access m Use the CLI kill command to terminate a remote session m View and modify switch system information For help on how to actually use the interfaces built into the switch refer to m Chapter 2 Using the Menu Interface Chapter 4 Using the Command Line Interface CLD m Chapter 5 Using the HP Web Browser Interface Why Configure Interface Access and System Information The inter face access features in the switch operate properly by default However you can modify or disable access features to suit your particular needs Similarly you can choose to leave the system information parameters at their default settings However modifying these parameters can help you to more easily distinguish one device from another in your network 7 2 Interface Access and System Information Interface Access Consol
118. the changes to the startup config file Syntax write memory For example the default port mode setting is auto Suppose that your network uses Cat 3 wiring and you want to connect the switch to another autosensing device capable of 100 Mbps operation Because 100 Mbps over Cat 3 wiring can introduce transmission problems the recommended port mode is auto 10 which allows the port to negotiate full or half duplex but restricts speed to 10 Mbps The following command configures port A5 to auto 10 mode in the running config file allowing you to observe performance on the link without making the mode change permanent HPswitch config interfac a5 speed duplex auto 10 After you are satisfied that the link is operating properly you can save the change to the switch s permanent configuration the startup config file by executing the following command HPswitch config write memory The new mode auto 10 on port A5 is now saved in the startup config file and the startup config and running config files are identical If you subsequently reboot the switch the auto 10 mode configuration on port A5 will remain because it is included in the startup config file How To Cancel Changes You Have Made to the Running Config File If you use the CLI to change parameter settings in the running config file and then decide that you don t want those changes to remain you can use either of the following methods to remove them
119. the current startup config file show running config Displays a listing of the current running config file write terminal Displays a listing of the current running config file m show config status Compares the startup config file to the running config file and lists one of the following results e If the two configurations are the same you will see Running configuration is the same as the startup configuration e Ifthe two configurations are different you will see Running configuration has been changed and needs to be saved Show config show running config and write terminal commands display the configuration settings that differ from the switch s factory default configura tion How To Use the CLI To Reconfigure Switch Features Use this proce dure to permanently change the switch configuration that is to enter a change in the startup config file 1 Use the appropriate CLI commands to reconfigure the desired switch parameters This updates the selected parameters in the running config file 2 Use the appropriate show commands to verify that you have correctly made the desired changes 6 5 Switch Memory and Configuration Using the CLI To Implement Configuration Changes 3 Observe the switch s performance with the new parameter settings to verify the effect of your changes 4 When you are satisfied that you have the correct parameter settings use the write memory command to copy
120. the default interface when you start a console session You can access the console out of band by directly connecting a terminal device to the switch or in band by using Telnet either from a terminal device or through the web browser interface Also if you are using the menu interface you can access the CLI by selecting the Command Line CLI option in the Main Menu Using the CLI The CLI offers these privilege levels to help protect the switch from unautho rized access 1 Operator 2 Manager 3 Global Configuration 4 Context Configuration CLI commands are not case sensitive When you use the CLI to make a configuration change the switch writes the change to the Running Config file in volatile memory This allows you to test your configuration changes before making them permanent To make changes permanent you must use the write memory command to save them to the 4 2 Using the Command Line Interface CLI Using the CLI Startup Config file in non volatile memory If you reboot the switch without first using write memory all changes made since the last reboot or write memory whichever is later will be lost For more on switch memory and saving configuration changes see Chapter 6 Switch Memory and Configuration Privilege Levels at Logon Privilege levels control the type of access to the CLI To implement this control you must set at least a Manager password Without a Manager password configured anyo
121. the manager password gives you full read write capabilities m Entering the operator password gives you read and limited write capabil ities Using the User Names If you also set user names in the web browser interface screen you must supply the correct user name for web browser interface access If a user name has not been set then leave the User Name field in the password window blank Note that the Command Prompt and switch console interfaces use only the password and do not prompt you for the User Name 5 10 HPswitch Status Information CA E Using the HP Web Browser Interface Tasks for Your First HP Web Browser Interface Session If You Lose a Password If you lose the passwords you can clear them by pressing the Clear button on the front of the switch This action deletes all password and user name protection from all of the switch s interfaces The Clear button is provided for your convenience but its presence means that if you are concerned with the security of the switch configuration and operation you should make sure the switch is installed in a secure location such as a locked wiring closet For more information refer to Front Panel Security in the chapter titled Configuring Username and Password Secu rity in the Access Security Guide for your switch Online Help for the HP Web Browser Interface Online Help is available for the web browser interface You can use it by clicking on
122. the port Each occurrence generates an Event Log message MPS refers to the Maintenance Power Signature Refer to Terminology on page 11 3 e Short Cnt Shows the number of times the switch provided insufficient current to a connected PD Current The total current in mA being delivered to PDs For example if you wanted to view the PoE status of port 5 on a Switch 2626 PWR or Switch 2650 PWR you would use show power management5 to display the data HPswitch PWR show power management e 5 Status and Counters Port Power Status for port 5 Power Enable Yes Priority High Configured Type Detection Status Delivering Power Class Over Current Cnt 0 MPS Absent Cnt Power Denied Cnt 0 Short Cnt Voltage 506 d Current Power 15078 ml Figure 3 Example of Show Power Management lt port list gt Output 11 14 Power Over Ethernet PoE Operation for the Series 2600 PWR Switches Planning and Implementing a PoE Configuration Planning and Implementing a PoE Configuration This section provides an overview of some considerations for planning a PoE application For additional information on this topic refer to the HP ProCurve PoE Planning and Implementation Guide Assigning PoE Ports to VLANs If your network includes VLANs you may want to assign various PoE config ured ports to specific VLANs For example if you are using PoE telephones in your network you may want to assign ports u
123. the switch lists the trunk by name such as Trk1 and does not list the individual ports in the trunk Also creating a new trunk automatically places the trunk in IGMP Auto status if IGMP is enabled for the default VLAN A dynamic LACP trunk operates only with the default IGMP settings and does not appear in the IGMP configuration display or show ip igmp listing VLANs Creating a new trunk automatically places the trunk in the DEFAULT_VLAN regardless of whether the ports in the trunk were in another VLAN Similarly removing a port from a trunk group automatically places the port in the default VLAN You can configure a static trunk in the same way that you configure a port for membership in any VLAN Note For a dynamic trunk to operate in a VLAN other than the default VLAN DEFAULT_VLAN GVRP must be enabled See Trunk Group Operation Using LACP on page 12 18 Port Security Trunk groups and their individual ports cannot be configured for port security and the switch excludes trunked ports from the show port security listing If you configure non default port security settings for a port then subsequently try to place the port in a trunk you will see the following message and the command will not be executed lt port list gt Command cannot operate over a logical port Monitor Port Note A trunk cannot be a monitor port A monitor port can monitor a static trunk but cannot monitor a dynamic LACP trunk 12 9 Port Tru
124. the switch will not activate or save the change for that item until you reboot the switch In this case rebooting should be done after you have made all desired changes and then returned to the Main Menu When you finish editing parameters return to the Main Menu lf necessary reboot the switch by highlighting Reboot Switch in the Main Menu and pressing Enter See the Note above Exit from a read only screen Press B for the Back action Highlight on any item in the Actions line indicates that the Actions line is active The Help line provides a brief descriptor of the highlighted Action item or parameter Using the Menu Interface Screen Structure and Navigation To get Help on individual parameter descriptions In most screens there is a Help option in the Actions line Whenever any of the items in the Actions line is highlighted press H and a separate help screen is displayed For example Pressing H or highlighting Help and pressing Enter displays Help for the parameters listed in the upper part of the screen CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Switch Configuration System Information System Name HPswitch System Contact System Location Inactivity Timeout imin 0 O ime sec 300 Inbound Telnet Enabled Yes Yes Enabled Yes Time Sync Method None TIMEP TimeP Mode Disabled Disabled Time Zone 0 O Daylight Time Rule None None Use arrow keys to change action s
125. to Trunk Group Boundary Requirement for the Series 4100g1 Switch 10 100 1000 Module J4908A in table 12 3 on page 12 8 Port Security Restriction Portsecurity does not operate on a trunk group If you configure port security on one or more ports that are later added to a trunk group the switch resets the port security parameters for those ports to the factory default configuration 12 4 Caution LACP Note Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration To avoid broadcast storms or loops in your network while configuring a trunk first disable or disconnect all ports you want to add to or remove from the trunk After you configure the trunk enable or re connect the ports Port Trunk Options and Operation The switch offers these options for port trunking m LACP IEEE 802 3ad page 12 18 m Trunk non protocol page 12 25 m FEC Fast EtherChannel page 12 25 The switch supports six trunk groups of up to four ports each Using the Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP option you can include standby trunked ports in addition to the maximum of four actively trunking ports LACP operation requires full duplex FDx links For most installations HP recommends that you leave the port Mode settings at Auto the default LACP also operates with Auto 10 Auto 100 and Auto 1000 if negotiation selects FDx 10FDx 100FDx and 1000FDx settings Fault Tolerance Ifa link in a port trunk fails the switch red
126. to the server If at least one SyslogD server is already configured and Syslog logging has been disabled you can still use logging lt syslog ip addr gt to add another SyslogD server but Syslog logging remains disabled until you re enable it with the debug destination logging command While Syslog logging is enabled the switch attempts to send Syslog messages to all configured SyslogD server addresses and operates regardless of whether session logging is also enabled To configure multiple SyslogD servers repeat the com mand once for each server IP address Default none Range Up to six IP addresses facility lt facility name gt Specifies the destination subsystem the SyslogD server s must use All SyslogD servers must use the same subsystem HP recommends the default user subsystem unless your application specifically requires another subsystem Options include user the default Various user level messages kern Kernel messages mail Mail system daemon system daemons auth security authorization messages syslog messages generated internally by Syslog Ipr line printer subsystem news netnews subsystem uucp wucp subsystem cron cron at subsystem sys9 cron at subsystem sys10 through sys14 Reserved for system use local through local Reserved for system use Some switches covered by this manual do not offer the facility option Refer to the Note on page C 27 C 29 Troubleshoo
127. with a single command Configuration Changes Using the Menu Interface You can use the menu interface to simultaneously save and implement a subset of switch configuration changes without having to reboot the switch That is when you save a configuration change in the menu interface you simulta neously change both the running config file and the startup config file 6 8 Note To save and implement the changes for all parameters in this screen press the Enter key then press S for Save To cancel all changes press the Enter key then press C for Cancel Switch Memory and Configuration Using the Menu and Web Browser Interfaces To Implement Configuration Changes The only exception to this operation are two VLAN related parameter changes that require a reboot described under Rebooting To Activate Configuration Changes on page 6 11 Using Save and Cancel in the Menu Interface For any configuration screen in the menu interface the Save command 1 Implements the changes in the running config file 2 Saves your changes to the startup config file If you decide not to save and implement the changes in the screen select Cancel to discard them and continue switch operation with the current oper ation For example suppose you have made the changes shown below in the System Information screen Switch Configuration System Information HP ProCurve Switch 4104GL Extension 5440 System Support Of
128. 0 22 Port Status and Basic Configuration Jumbo Packets on the Series 2800 Switches When a port is not a member of any jumbo enabled VLAN it drops all jumbo traffic If the port is receiving excessive inbound jumbo traffic the port generates an Event Log message to notify you of this condition This same condition generates a Fault Finder message in the Alert log of the switch s web browser interface and also increments the switch s Giant Rx counter If you do not want all ports in a given VLAN to accept jumbo packets you can consider creating one or more jumbo VLANs with a membership comprised of only the ports you want to receive jumbo traffic Because a port belonging to one jumbo enabled VLAN can receive jumbo packets through any VLAN to which it belongs this method enables you to include both jumbo enabled and non jumbo ports within the same VLAN For example suppose you wanted to allow inbound jumbo packets only on ports 6 7 12 and 13 However these ports are spread across VLAN 100 and VLAN 200 and also share these VLANs with other ports you want excluded from jumbo traffic A solution is to create a third VLAN with the sole purpose of enabling jumbo traffic on the desired ports while leaving the other ports on the switch disabled for jumbo traffic That is VLAN 100 VLAN 200 VLAN 300 Ports 6 10 11 15 6 7 12 and 13 Jumbo No No Yes Enabled If there are security concerns with grouping the ports as s
129. 00 9 5 CLI Viewing and Configuring SNTP 2 eee eee 9 8 Viewing the Current SNTP Configuration 9 8 Configuring Enabling or Disabling the SNTP Mode 9 9 TimeP Viewing Selecting and Configuring 4 9 14 Menu Viewing and Configuring TimeP 0 5 9 15 CLI Viewing and Configuring TimeP 2 5 9 16 Viewing the Current TimeP Configuration 9 17 Configuring Enabling or Disabling the TimeP Mode 9 18 SNTP Unicast Time Polling with Multiple SNTP Servers 9 21 Address Prioritization 0 0 e ccc ene ee eee 9 22 Adding and Deleting SNTP Server Addresses 9 22 Menu Interface Operation with Multiple SNTP Server Addresses Config red sesir acres secs Beds K a Cate GS ya EEE eae EE E ee 9 24 SNTP Messages in the Event Log 00 02 00 cece ee eee eee 9 24 9 1 Time Protocols Overview Overview This chapter describes m SNTP Time Protocol Operation m Timep Time Protocol Operation Using time synchronization ensures a uniform time among inter operating devices This helps you to manage and troubleshoot switch operation by attaching meaningful time data to event and error messages The switch offers TimeP and SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol and a timesyne command for changing the time protocol selection or turning off time protocol operation Notes m
130. 1 c4 and disable these ports HPswitch config interface cl c4 HPswitch eth cl c4 _ HPswitch eth cl c4 disable 2 Change all four ports to LACP passive and re enable the ports HPswitch eth cl c4 lacp passive HPswitch eth cl c4 nabl If you change the port trunk configuration on a link ensure that the port trunk configuration on the other end of the link matches the new configuration On Switch 2800 Series devices ensure that all ports in a dynamic trunk belong to the same port group The Switch 2800 Series devices do not support trunks comprised of ports from different port groups Refer to Trunk Group Bound ary Requirement for Switch 2800 Series Devices in table 12 3 on page 12 8 Static Trunk The switch uses the links you configure with the Port Trunk Settings screen in the menu interface or the trunk command in the CLI to create a static port trunk The switch offers LACP Trunk and FEC static trunks Table 12 1 Trunk Types Used in Static and Dynamic Trunk Groups Trunking LACP Trunk FEC Method Dynamic Yes No No Static Yes Yes Yes 12 6 Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration Table 12 2 Trunk Configuration Protocols Protocol Trunking Options LACP Provides dynamic and static LACP trunking options 802 3ad Dynamic LACP Use the switch negotiated dynamic LACP trunk when The port on the other end of the trunk link is configured for Active or P
131. 1 17 Syntax no interface e lt port list gt power Re enables PoE operation on lt port list gt and restores the priority setting in effect when PoE was disabled on lt port list gt The no form of the command disables PoE operation on lt port list gt Default All 10 100Base TX ports on the switch enabled for PoE operation at Low priority Power Over Ethernet PoE Operation for the Series 2600 PWR Switches Configuring PoE Operation Syntax interface e lt port list gt power critical high low Reconfigures the PoE priority level on lt port list gt For a given level the switch automatically prioritizes ports by port number in ascending order If there is not enough power available to provision all active PoE ports at a given priority level then the lowest numbered port at that level will be provisioned first and so on The switch invokes configured PoE priorities only when it cannot provision all active PoE ports e Critical Specifies the first priority PoE support for lt port list gt The switch provisions active PoE ports at this level before PDs connected to any other ports e High Specifies the second priority PoE support for lt port list gt The switch provisions active PoE ports at this level before PDs connected to Low priority ports Low the default Specifies the third support priority for lt port list gt The switch provisions active PoE ports at this level only
132. 11 Description of the web browser interface e Overview window and tabs page 5 15 e Port Utilization and Status displays page 5 16 e Alert Log and Alert types page 5 19 e Setting the Fault Detection Policy page 5 23 If you want security beyond that achieved with user names and passwords you can disable access to the web browser interface This is done by either executing no web management at the Command Prompt or changing the Web Agent Enabled parameter setting to No page 7 3 5 2 Using the HP Web Browser Interface General Features General Features The switch includes these web browser interface features Switch Configuration e Ports e VLANs and Primary VLAN e Fault detection e Port monitoring mirroring e System information e Enable Disable Multicast Filtering IGMP and Spanning Tree e JP e Stacking e Support and management URLs Switch Security Usernames and passwords Switch Diagnostics e Ping Link Test e Device reset e Configuration report Switch status e Port utilization e Port counters e Port status e Alert log Switch system information listing 5 3 Using the HP Web Browser Interface Starting an HP Web Browser Interface Session with the Switch Starting an HP Web Browser Interface Session with the Switch You can start a web browser session in the following ways m Using a standalone web browser on a network connection from a PC or UNIX workstation e Directly connected to
133. 2 Switch Configuration 1 System Information S222222 CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Sassssssssssssssssssss Switch Configuration System Information ra System Name HPswitch System Contact System Information he ae Inactivity Timeout min 0 10 MAC Age Time sec 300 _ 300 Inbound Telnet Enabled Yes Yes Web Agent Enabled Yes Yes Time Sync Method None None SS SS aa a Se Se re Time Zone 0 0 Daylight Time Rule None None Actions gt Edit Save Help Cancel changes and return to previous screen Use arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Figure 7 6 The System Information Configuration Screen Default Values To help simplify administration it is recommended that you configure System Name to a character string that is meaningful within your system 2 Press E for Edit The cursor moves to the System Name field 7 10 Interface Access and System Information System Information 3 Refer to the online help provided with this screen for further information on configuration options for these features 4 When you have finished making changes to the above parameters press Enter then press S for Save and return to the Main Menu CLI Viewing and Configuring System Information System Information Commands Used in This Section show system information below hostname below snmp server below
134. 2650 PWR detects anew PD and ifthe switch has a minimum of 15 4 watts of POE power available the switch supplies power to the port for that PD Insufficient PoE Power Available When a Switch 2650 PWR detects a new PD and if the switch does not have a minimum of 15 4 watts of unused PoE power available e Ifthe new PD is connected to a port X having a higher PoE priority than another port Y the switch removes PoE power from port Y and delivers it to port X In this case the PD on port X receives power and the PD on port Y is denied power e Ifthe new PD is connected to a port X having a lower priority than all other PoE ports currently providing power to PDs then the switch does not deliver PoE power to port X Note that once a PD connects to a port and begins operating the port retains only enough PoE power to support the PD s operation Unneeded power becomes available for supporting other PD connections Thus while 15 4 watts must be available for the switch to begin supplying power to a port with a PD connected 15 4 watts per port is not continually required if the connected PD requires less power For example with 20 watts of POE power remaining available on the switch you can connect one new PD without losing power to any currently connected PDs If that PD draws only 3 watts then 17 watts remain available and you can connect at least one more PD without interrupt ing power to
135. 3 35 Configuring for Network Management Applications CDP Changing the Transmission Interval for Outbound CDP Packets Syntax cdptimer lt 5 254 gt Changes the interval the switch uses to transmit CDP packets describing itself to neighbor devices Default 60 seconds For example if the switch s transmit interval for CDP packets was set to a non default value you would use this command to reset it to one minute HPswitch config cdp timer 60 Changing the Hold Time CDP Packet Time To Live for a Switch s CDP Packet Information This parameter is controlled in the transmitting switch and applies to all outbound CDP packets the switch transmits Syntax cdp holdtime lt 5 254 gt Changes the hold time for the switch s CDP packet informa tion in the CDP Neighbors table of another CDP aware device Default 180 seconds Range 10 255 seconds For example to configure a switch s outbound CDP packets to live for one minute in the CDP Neighbors table of neighboring CDP devices HPswitch config cdp holdtime 60 Effect of Spanning Tree STP On CDP Packet Transmission If STP has blocked a port on the switch that port does not transmit CDP packets However the port still receives CDP packets ifthe device on the other end of the link has CDP enabled Thus for example if switch A has two ports linked to switch B which is a CDP neighbor and also the STP root device and STP blocks traffic on one port and fo
136. 3 cabling Cat 5 cabling is required for 100 Mbps links e 10HDx 10 Mbps Half Duplex e 10FDx 10 Mbps Full Duplex e 100HDx 100 Mbps Half Duplex e 100FDx 100 Mbps Full Duplex 100FX ports e 100HDx 100 Mbps Half Duplex e 100FDx default 100 Mbps Full Duplex 10 4 Port Status and Basic Configuration Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters Status or Parameter Mode Continued Description 10 100 1000Base T e Auto 10 Allows the port to negotiate between half duplex HDx and full duplex FDx while keeping speed at 10 Mbps Also negotiates flow control enabled or disabled HP recommends Auto 10 for links between 10 100 autosensing ports connected with Cat 3 cabling Cat 5 cabling is required for 100 Mbps links e 10HDx 10 Mbps Half Duplex e 10FDx 10 Mbps Full Duplex e Auto default Senses speed and negotiates with the port at the other end of the link for port operation MDI X or MDI To see what the switch negotiates for the Auto setting use the CLI show interfaces brief command or the 3 Port Status option under 1 Status and Counters in the menu interface e Auto 100 Uses 100 Mbps and negotiates with the port at the other end of the link for other port operation features e Auto 1000 Uses 1000 Mbps and negotiates with the port at the other end of the link for other port operation features e 100Hdx Uses 100 Mbps half duplex e 100Fdx Uses 100 Mbps Full
137. 4 Execute the following command HPswitch copy xmodem startup config pe Device will be rebooted do you want to continue y n y Press Enter and start XMODEM on your host After you see the above prompt press Enter Execute the terminal emulator commands to begin the file transfer When the download finishes you must reboot the switch to implement the newly dowloaded OS To do so use one of the following commands boot system flash lt primary secondary gt Reboots from the selected flash OY reload Reboots from the flash image currently in use For more on these commands refer to Rebooting the Switch on page 6 17 A 20 File Transfers Copying Diagnostic Data to a Remote Host PC or Unix Workstation Copying Diagnostic Data to a Remote Host PC or Unix Workstation You can use the CLI to copy the following types of switch data to a text file in a management device Command Output Sends the output of a switch CLI command as a file on the destination device m Event Log Copies the switch s Event Log into a file on the destination device m Crash Data OS specific data useful for determining the reason for a system crash m Crash Log Processor Specific operating data useful for determining the reason for a system crash Copying Command Output to a Destination Device This command directs the displayed output of a CLI command to a file in a destination device Syntax copy co
138. 4 web access 8 11 IP address for SNMP management 13 3 multiple in a VLAN 8 9 Index 3 removing or replacing 8 10 IP preserve DHCP server 8 16 overview 8 16 rules operating 8 16 summary of effect 8 19 IPX network number B 7 J Java 5 4 5 5 jumbo packets configuration 10 19 excessive inbound 10 23 flow control 10 18 10 22 GVRP operation 10 18 management VLAN 10 22 maximum size 10 17 MTU 10 17 port adds and moves 10 18 port speed 10 18 security concerns 10 23 standard MTU 10 18 through non jumbo ports 10 24 traffic sources 10 18 troubleshooting 10 25 VLAN tag 10 17 voice VLAN 10 22 K kill command 7 8 L LACP 802 1x not allowed 12 23 active 12 16 12 20 CLI access 12 12 default port operation 12 21 described 12 7 12 18 Dyn1 12 8 dynamic 12 20 enabling dynamic trunk 12 16 full duplex required 10 5 12 5 12 18 IGMP 12 24 no half duplex 12 25 4 Index operation not allowed C 11 outbound traffic distribution 12 26 overview 12 5 passive 12 16 12 20 removing port from active trunk 12 17 restrictions 12 23 standby link 12 20 status terms 12 22 STP 12 24 VLANs 12 24 with 802 1x 12 23 with CDP 13 40 with port security 12 23 learning bridge 8 2 limit broadcast 10 11 link speed port tr
139. 4 33 G 05 2x 1793 Boot Image Secondary Figure 6 9 Determining the Software Version in Primary and Secondary Flash Switch Software Downloads The following table shows the switch s options for downloading a software version to flash and booting the switch from flash Table 6 1 Primary Secondary Memory Access Action Menu CLI Web SNMP Browser Download to Primary Yes Yes Yes Yes Download to Secondary No Yes No Yes Boot from Primary Yes Yes Yes Yes Boot from Secondary No Yes No Yes The different software download options involve different copy commands plus xmodem and tftp These topics are covered in Appendix A File Transfers Download Interruptions In most cases if a power failure or other cause interrupts a flash image download the switch reboots with the image previ ously stored in primary flash In the unlikely event that the primary image is corrupted as a result of an interruption the switch will reboot from secondary flash and you can either copy the secondary image into primary or download another image to primary from an external source See Appendix A File Transfers Note Caution Switch Memory and Configuration Using Primary and Secondary Flash Image Options Local Switch Software Replacement and Removal This section describes commands for erasing a software version and copying an existing software version between primary and secondary flash It is not necessary to er
140. 5 C 23 Event Log Operation 2 0 00 c eee cee eee eee C 23 Menu Entering and Navigating in the Event Log C 25 GU site sree Bie hake dt del aed Ape anand ARO ates Sak ets C 26 Debug and Syslog Operation 00 0 cece eee ee eee C 27 xiii Diagnostic Tools l eaa hen kee eal eaten Mn Oka ols C 34 Port Auto Negotiation 0 c ccc eee eens C 34 Ping and Link Tests oucnn seare rainat enana aiea a anea eee eee C 35 Web Executing Ping or Link Tests C 36 CLI Ping or Link Tests 0 c cece eee C 37 Displaying the Configuration File 02 02 eee C 39 CLI Viewing the Configuration File C 39 Web Viewing the Configuration File C 39 Listing Switch Configuration and Operation Details for Help in Troubleshooting r e eee eee eee ene ee C 40 CLI Administrative and Troubleshooting Commands C 42 Restoring the Factory Default Configuration C 43 Using the Cid e025 agin st re ear Gage T a a ES C 43 Using the Clear Reset Buttons 0 00 ec eee eens C 43 Restoring a Flash Image 0 00 eee cece eee eee C 44 D MAC Address Management Contents rts hae anea te eA d Stale Sorts N wih ea gee Retest D 1 CV EIVICW snyer ss tase Si ee a Ge eae Som ceed acer deat A axacaue Me D 2 Determining MAC Addresses in the Switch 2 000 D 2
141. 9a05 09df11 Platform HP J4812A ProCurve HP J4121A4 ProCurve HP J4121A ProCurve HP J4813A ProCurve NIC Model X666 NIC Model X666 Figure 13 15 Example of CDP Neighbors Table Listing Capability Switch Switch Switch Switch Figure 13 16 illustrates a topology of CDP enabled devices for the CDP Neigh bors table listing in figure 13 15 HP ProCurve Switch Running CDP Non CDP Capable Hub Management Management HP Switch 2512 HP J4812A Accounting 0030c1 7fcc40 HP Switch 4000M HP J4121A Support 0060b0 761a45 HP Switch 4000M HP J4821A Research 0060b0 889e43 Workstation Workstation Mgmt NIC Mgmt NIC 099a05 09df9 099a05 09df11 HP Switch 2524 HP J4813A Marketing 0030c5 38dc59 Figure 13 16 Example of CDP Enabled Devices in a Topology for the Listing in Figure 13 15 Clearing Resetting the CDP Neighbors Table Syntax cdp clear Removes any records of CDP neighbor devices from the switch s CDP MIB objects If you execute cdp clear and then execute show cdp neighbors before the switch receives a CDP packet from any neighbor device the displayed table appears empty 13 33 Configuring for Network Management Applications CDP HPswitch config cdp clear HPswitch config show cdp neighbors CDP neighbors information Port Device ID Platform Capability Note that the tab
142. AN that is enabled for jumbo traffic Ina VLAN context the command forms are jumbo and no jumbo Default Jumbos disabled on the specified VLAN Operating Notes for Jumbo Traffic Handling m HP does not recommend configuring a voice VLAN to accept jumbo packets Voice VLAN packets are typically small and allowing a voice VLAN to accept jumbo packet traffic can degrade the voice transmission performance You can configure the default primary and or if configured the manage ment VLAN to accept jumbo packets on all ports belonging to the VLAN m When the switch applies the default MTU 1522 bytes to a VLAN all ports in the VLAN can receive incoming packets of up to 1522 bytes in length When the switch applies the jumbo MTU 9220 bytes to a VLAN all ports in that VLAN can receive incoming packets of up to 9220 bytes in length A port receiving packets exceeding the applicable MTU drops such pack ets causing the switch to generate an Event Log message and increment the Giant Rx counter displayed by show interfaces lt port list gt m The switch does not allow flow control and jumbo packet capability to co exist on a port Attempting to configure both on the same port gener ates an error message in the CLI and sends a similar message to the Event Log m The default MTU on the Series 2800 switches is 1522 bytes including 4 bytes for the VLAN tag The jumbo MTU is 9220 bytes including 4 bytes for the VLAN tag 1
143. C address was learned B 13 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Status and Counters Data Menu Access to the MAC Address Views and Searches Per VLAN MAC Address Viewing and Searching This feature lets you determine which switch port on a selected VLAN is being used to communi cate with a specific device on the network The per VLAN listing includes m The MAC addresses that the switch has learned from network devices attached to the switch m The port on which each MAC address was learned 1 From the Main Menu select 1 Status and Counters 5 VLAN Address Table 2 The switch then prompts you to select a VLAN 3 Use the Space bar to select the VLAN you want then press Enter The switch then displays the MAC address table for that VLAN Sesesesessesesseeeee e 2 CONSOLE MANAGER MODE 22222222s2s22222e222e222e2222 Status and Counters Address Table Mac Address Located on Port 0030c1 7fec40 Al 0030c1 b29ac0 43 0060b0 17de5b 43 0060b0 880a80 42 0060b0 dfia00 43 0060b0 dfz2a00 43 0060b0 e9a200 43 009027 e74f90 43 080009 2 1ae84 43 o80009 62c411 43 080009 6563e2 43 Actions gt Search Next page Prev page Help Return to previous screen Use up down arrow keys to scroll to other entries left right arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Figure B 8 Example of the Address Table To page through the listing use Next page and
144. Changes button or other appropriate button This overwrites both the running config file and the startup config file with the changes you have specified in the web browser interface window Note that using the CLI instead of the menu or web browser interface gives you the option of changing the running configuration without affecting the startup configuration This allows you to test the change without making it 6 3 Switch Memory and Configuration Overview of Configuration File Management permanent When you are satisfied that the change is satisfactory you can make it permanent by executing the write memory command For example suppose you use the following command to disable port 5 HPswitch config interfac thernet 5 disable The above command disables port 5 in the running config file but not in the startup config file Port 5 remains disabled only until the switch reboots If you want port 5 to remain disabled through the next reboot use write memory to save the current running config file to the startup config file in flash memory HPswitch config write memory If you use the CLI to make a configuration change and then change from the CLI to the Menu interface without first using write memory to save the change to the startup config file then the switch prompts you to save the change For example if you use the CLI to create VLAN 20 and then select the menu interface VLAN 20 is configured in the runn
145. E 802 3 compliant Ping Test This is a test of the path between the switch and another device on the same or another IP network that can respond to IP packets ICMP Echo Requests Link Test This is a test of the connection between the switch and a desig nated network device on the same LAN or VLAN if configured During the link test IEEE 802 2 test packets are sent to the designated network device in the same VLAN or broadcast domain The remote device must be able to respond with an 802 2 Test Response Packet C 35 Troubleshooting Diagnostic Tools Web Executing Ping or Link Tests 1 Click here 2 Click here GD Stack Access Stack Close Stack Management invent 7 HPswitch Status i YP J4819A Proc h 41086L 2 pa Identity Status Configuration Security Diagnostics Support Device Reset Configuration Report Successes 0 Failures 0 et i it a a a ee e 3 Select Ping Test the default or Link Test ee Link Test Ping Test ua For a Ping test enter Destination IP MAC Address the IP address of the target device For a Number of Packets to Send 10 Link test enter the Timeout in Seconds fi 7 MAC address of the target device Start Stop Defaults 5 Select the number of tries packets and the timeout for each try from the drop down menus 6 Click on Start to begin the test Figure C 14 Link and Ping Test Screen on the Web Brows
146. Fault Detection policy click on select the fault detection configuration in the second bullet in the window and go to the section Setting Fault Detection Policy on page 5 23 You can also access the password screen by clicking on the Configuration tab and then Fault Detection button Creating Usernames and Passwords in the Browser Interface You may want to create both a username and password to create access security for your switch There are two levels of access to the interface that can be controlled by setting user names and passwords Operator An Operator level user name and password allows read only access to most of the web browser interface but prevents access to the Security window m Manager A Manager level user name and password allows full read write access to the web browser interface 5 8 HP switch Status Information identity Status Device Passwords Using the HP Web Browser Interface Tasks for Your First HP Web Browser Interface Session gt Goniguratior Security Diagnostics Support Read Only Access Operator User Name Operator Password Confirm Operator Password Read Write Access Manager User Name Manager Password Confirm Manager Password Apply Changes Clear Changes Figure 5 3 The Device Passwords Window To set the passwords 1 Access the Device Passwords screen by one of the following methods If the Alert Log includ
147. GMP Hosts or a Multicast Router Connected to a Port IGMP must be enabled on the switch and the affected port must be configured for Auto or Forward operation IP Multicast Traffic Floods Out All Ports IGMP Does Not Appear To Filter Traffic The IGMP feature does not operate if the switch or VLAN does not have an IP address configured manually or obtained through DHCP Bootp To verify whether an IP address is configured for the switch or VLAN do either of the following m Try Using the Web Browser Interface If you can access the web browser interface then an IP address is configured m Try To Telnet to the Switch Console If you can Telnet to the switch then an IP address is configured C 10 Caution Note Troubleshooting Unusual Network Activity m Using the Switch Console Interface From the Main Menu check the Management Address Information screen by clicking on 1 Status and Counters 2 Switch Management Address Information LACP Related Problems Unable to enable LACP on a port with the interface e lt port number gt lacp command In this case the switch displays the following message Operation is not allowed for a trunked port You cannot enable LACP on a port while it is configured as static Trunk or FEC trunked port To enable LACP on static trunked port first use the no trunk e lt port number gt command to disable the static trunk assignment then execute interface e lt port num
148. H After the primary flash memory has been updated with the new switch software you must reboot the switch to implement the newly downloaded code From the Main Menu and press 6 for Reboot Switch You will then see this prompt Continue reboot of system No Press the space bar once to change No to Yes then press Enter to begin the reboot When you use the menu interface to download switch software the new image is always stored in primary flash Also using the Reboot Switch option in the Main Menu always reboots the switch from primary flash Rebooting the switch from the CLI gives you more options Refer to Rebooting the Switch on page 6 17 After you reboot the switch confirm that the switch software downloaded correctly a From the Main Menu select 1 Status and Counters and from the Status and Counters menu select 1 General System Information b Check the Firmware revision line c From the CLI use the command show version or show flash A 5 File Transfers Downloading Switch Software CLI TFTP Download from a Server to Primary or Secondary Flash This command automatically downloads a switch software image to primary or secondary flash Syntax copy tftp flash lt ip address gt lt remote os file gt lt primary secondary gt Note that if you do not specify the flash destination the Xmodem download defaults to primary flash For example to download a switch software file n
149. Interface Easy access to the switch from anywhere on the network Familiar browser interface locations of window objects consistent with commonly used browsers uses mouse clicking for navigation no terminal setup Many features have all their fields in one screen so you can view all values at once More visual cues using colors status bars device icons and other graphical objects instead of relying solely on alphanumeric values 2 5 Selecting a Management Interface Advantages of Using HP ProCurve Manager or HP ProCurve Manager Plus Display of acceptable ranges of values available in configuration list boxes Advantages of Using HP ProCurve Manager or HP ProCurve Manager Plus You can operate HP ProCurve Manager and HP ProCurve Manager Plus PCM and PCM from a PC on the network to monitor traffic manage your hubs and switches and proactively recommend network changes to increase network uptime and optimize performance Easy to install and use PCM and PCM are the answers to your management challenges KP Network Management Home HP Procurve Manager Demo of x File View Tools Help e a gt ten mi EC i ae Network Management Home fi ill Network Management Home Dashboard Traffic Monitor Events ey Interconnect Devices E 2424M 2500 E 2600 E 2800 E 340001 E 4000M C 410091 E 5300x C 6100 E 6308m 8x C HP ProCurve Wireless C others E Custom Groups 0 End n
150. MANAGER MODE Status and Counters Port Counters Port Total Bytes Total Frames Errors Rx Drops Tx Ctrl in 0 AS 290 163 500 oO 0 off A4 260 134 501 oO 0 off AS Trk1 859 363 5147 oO 0 off A6 Trk1 674 574 1693 in 0 off ci 26 554 246 in 0 off c2 113 184 276 0 0O off c3 0 0 0 0O off Actions gt Back Show details Reset Help Use up down arrow keys to scroll to other entries left right arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Figure B 6 Example of Port Counters on the Menu Interface To view details about the traffic on a particular port use the 4 key to highlight that port number then select Show Details For example selecting port A2 displays a screen similar to figure B 7 below D CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Status and Counters Port Counters Port AZ Link Status up Bytes Rx 630 746 Bytes Tx 21 070 Unicast Rx 568 Unicast Tx 285 Beast Mcast Rx 18 Beast Mcast Tx 0 FCS Rx O Drops Tx 0 Alignment Rx ia Collisions Tx 0 Runts Rx 0 Late Colln Tx O Giants Rx O Excessive Colln 0 Total Rx Errors O Deferred Tx 0 Actions gt Back Reset Help Return to pr 13 en Use arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Figure B 7 Example of the Display for Show details on a Selected Port This screen also includes the Reset action for the current session See the Note on Reset
151. Management and Configuration Guide O invent Switch 2600 Series Switch 2600 PWR Series Switch 2800 Series Switch 4100 Series Switch 6108 HP ProCurve Switch 2600 Series Switch 2600 PWR Series Switch 2800 Series Switch 4100gl Series Switch 6108 October 2004 Management and Configuration Guide Copyright 2000 2004 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P The information contained herein is subject to change with out notice Publication Number 5990 6023 October 2004 Applicable Products HP ProCurve Switch 2626 J4900A HP ProCurve Switch 2626 PWR J8164A HP ProCurve Switch 2650 J4899A HP ProCurve Switch 2650 PWR J8165A HP ProCurve Switch 2824 J4903A HP ProCurve Switch 2848 J4904A HP ProCurve Switch 4104 1 J4887A HP ProCurve Switch 4108 l J4865A HP ProCurve Switch 6108 J4902A Trademark Credits Microsoft Windows and Windows NT are US registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Disclaimer HEWLETT PACKARD COMPANY MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Hewlett Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such pr
152. Name Type Group Type 4 A ee a N ee ay AS Print Server Trunk 10 100TX Trki Trunk rad A not assigned 10 100TX Trk2 Trunk Port A6 does not appear in this listing because itis not assigned to a static trunk Figure 12 6 Example Listing Specific Ports Belonging to Static Trunks The show trunks lt port list gt command in the above example includes a port list and thus shows trunk group information only for specific ports that have membership in a static trunk In figure 12 7 the command does not include a port list so the switch lists all ports having static trunk membership HPswitch gt show trunks Load Balancing Port Group Type Print Server Trunk 10 100TX Print Server Trunk 10 100TX not assigned 10 100TX not assigned 10 100TX Figure 12 7 Example of a Show Trunk Listing Without Specifying Ports 12 13 Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration Listing Static LACP and Dynamic LACP Trunk Data This command lists data for only the LACP configured ports Syntax show lacp In the following example ports Al and A2 have been previously configured for a static LACP trunk For more on Active see table 12 5 on page 12 22 HPswitch gt show lacp LACP LACP PORT LACP LACP ENABLED STATUS PARTNER STATUS Passive Passive Figure 12 8 Example of a Show LACP Listing Dynamic LACP Standby Links Dynamic LACP trunking enables you to c
153. None e Use the Space bar to select the Unicast mode then do the following i Press 5 to move the cursor to the Server Address field Time Protocols SNTP Viewing Selecting and Configuring ii Enter the IP address of the SNTP server you want the switch to use for time synchronization Note This step replaces any previously configured server IP address If you will be using backup SNTP servers requires use of the CLD then see SNTP Unicast Time Polling with Multiple SNTP Servers on page 9 21 iii Press to move the cursor to the Server Version field Enter the value that matches the SNTP server version running on the device you specified in the preceding step step ii If you are unsure which version to use HP recommends leaving this value at the default setting of 3 and testing SNTP operation to determine whether any change is necessary Note Using the menu to enter the IP address for an SNTP server when the switch already has one or more SNTP servers config ured causes the switch to delete the primary SNTP server from the server list and to select a new primary SNTP server from the IP address es in the updated list For more on this topic see SNTP Unicast Time Polling with Multiple SNTP Servers on page 9 21 iv Press gt gt to move the cursor to the Poll Interval field then go to step Time Syne Method None SNTP SNTP Mode Disabled Unicast Server Address 10 28 227 15 Poll Interva
154. P Packets Status of Device Receiving Action of Receiving Device a CDP Packet Running CDP Stores neighbor data in CDP Neighbor table Does not forward CDP packet CDP Disabled Drops CDP packet There is no CDP Neighbor table and no CDP neighbor data is stored No CDP Capability Forwards CDP packet out all ports except the port on which the packet was received Router Running CDP Stores neighbor data in CDP Neighbor table Does not forward CDP packet Router with CDP 1 Disabled Drops CDP packet or 2 Not CDP Capable Non CDP devices that is devices that are not capable of running CDP are transparent to CDP operation However an intervening CDP aware device that is CDP disabled is not transparent For example in figure 13 12 page 13 29 B D and E are not CDP neighbors because D the intervening 13 30 Configuring for Network Management Applications CDP CDP disabled switch does not forward CDP packets i e is not transparent to CDP traffic For the same reason switch E does not have any CDP neighbors Figure 13 12 page 13 29 illustrates how multiple CDP neighbors can appear on a single port In this case switch A has three CDP neighbors on port 1 because the intervening devices are not CDP capable and simply forward CDP neighbors data out all ports except the port on which the data was received Default Configuration In the factory default configuration CDP is enabled
155. P address of 10 28 227 103 to the secondary flash in the destination switch you would execute the following command in the destination switch s CLI HPswitch copy tftp flash 10 29 227 103 os secondary secondary Device will be rebooted do you want to continue y n Y 01084K Figure A 6 Switch to Switch from Either Flash in Source to Either Flash in Destination Using HP PCM to Update Switch Software HP ProCurve Manager Plus include a software update utility for updating on HP ProCurve switch products For further information refer to the Getting Started Guide and the Administrator s Guide provided electronically with the application A 16 File Transfers Troubleshooting TFTP Downloads Troubleshooting TFTP Downloads When using the menu interface if a TFTP download fails the Download OS screen indicates the failure Message Indicating cause of TFTP Download Failure Seeessss5555 5 5 CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Download O05 Current Firmware revision G 05 01 Method TFTP TFTP TFTP Server 10 29 227 105 Remote File Name os Received 0 bytes of OS download key to continue Figure A 7 Example of Message for Download Failure To find more information on the cause of a download failure examine the messages in the switch s Event Log by executing this CLI command HPswitch show log tftp For more on the Event Log see
156. PWR and 2800 Switches For some situations you may want to use a secure method to issue commands or copy files to the switch By opening a secure encrypted SSH session you can then use a third party software application to take advantage of Secure Copy SCP and Secure ftp SFTP SCP and SFTP provide asecure alternative to TFTP for transferring information that may be sensitive like switch con figuration files to and from the switch Essentially you are creating a secure SSH tunnel as a way to transfer files with SFTP and SCP channels To use these commands you must install on the administrator workstation a third party application software client that supports the SFTP and or SCP functions Some examples of software that supports SFTP and SCP are PuTTY Open SSH WinSCP and SSH Secure Shell Most of these are freeware and may be downloaded without cost or licensing from the internet There are differences in the way these clients work so be sure you also download the documentation As described earlier in this chapter you can use a TFTP client on the admin istrator workstation to update software images This is a plain text mechanism and it connects to a standalone TFTP server or another HP ProCurve switch acting as a TFTP server to obtain the software image file s Using SCP and SFTP allows you to maintain your switches with greater security You can also roll out new software images with automated scripts that make it easier to upgrade
157. Port Status 000 0 eee eee B 8 CLEACCESS 3 ase tacactiutecdsjectatsatn tat fave Race E ntact aetna B 8 Poit Status enca OC ee B 9 Menu Displaying Port Status 00 00 e eee B 9 CLT ACCESS i na settee aie A Wn A a E B 9 W b ACCESS anie i ae en ac ha kee A a e E T Ra tet B 9 Viewing Port and Trunk Group Statistics and Flow Control Status B 10 Menu Access to Port and Trunk Statistics B 11 CLI Access To Port and Trunk Group Statistics B 12 Web Browser Access To View Port and Trunk Group Statistics B 12 Viewing the Switch s MAC Address Tables B 13 Menu Access to the MAC Address Views and Searches B 14 CLI Access for MAC Address Views and Searches B 16 Spanning Tree Protocol STP Information B 18 Menu Access to STP Data 0 c cece ene B 18 CLI Access to STP Data 2 0 0 eee eee B 19 Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Status B 20 VLAN Information 00 cece nent n eas B 21 Web Browser Interface Status Information B 23 Port and Static Trunk Monitoring Features B 24 B 1 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Contents Switch 6108 and Series 4100gl Switches B 24 Series 2600 2600 PWR and 2800 Switches B 24 Menu Configuring Port and Static Trunk Monitoring B 25 CLI Confi
158. Prev page B 14 Located MAC Address and Corresponding Port Number Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Status and Counters Data Finding the Port Connection for a Specific Device on a VLAN This feature uses a device s MAC address that you enter to identify the port used by that device 1 Proceeding from figure B 8 press S for Search to display the following prompt Enter MAC address _ 2 Type the MAC address you want to locate and press Enter The address and port number are highlighted if found If the switch does not find the MAC address on the currently selected VLAN it leaves the MAC address listing empty Sass SSSSS S S S S S S CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Status and Counters Address Table 005004 17 O060b0 889e00 1 Figure B 9 Example of Menu Indicating Located MAC Address 3 Press P for Prev page to return to the full address table listing Port Level MAC Address Viewing and Searching This feature displays and searches for MAC addresses on the specified port instead of for all ports on the switch 1 From the Main Menu select 1 Status and Counters 7 Port Address Table B 15 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Status and Counters Data SSSSSSSSSSSSSSSS CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Status and Counters Menu General System Information Switch Management Address Information Mod
159. RPS EPS or HP 610 EPS provides 408 watts of PoE power If two switches are using external PoE power from the HP 600 RPS EPS or two switches are connected to the same pair on the HP 610 EPS a switch receives 204 watts of PoE power Should the switch s internal PoE power supply fail the HP 600 RPS EPS or HP 610 EPS provides power up to the wattage stated above m When the internal PoE power supply fails the HP 600 RPS EPS reserves a minimum of 38 watts for the less loaded bank of ports In the default configuration at a minimum the first two ports in the bank 1 and 2 or 25 and 26 will have PoE power It is the ports configured with the highest priority of either bank 1 24 or 25 48 that will receive PoE power For example if the highest priority ports have been re configured to be 23 24 and 47 48 then they will have PoE power m Inthe default configuration PoE power priority is determined by port number with the lowest numbered port having the highest priority Power Priority When Does the Switch Prioritize Power Allocations If the switch can provide power for all existing PD demands it does not use its power priority settings to allocate power However if the PD power demand oversubscribes the available power then the switch prioritizes the power allocation to the ports that present a PD power demand This causes the switch to remove power from one or more lower priority ports to meet the power demand on other higher priori
160. Ries Oe AE eRe A a a lea EP ae se Meas 10 3 Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters 10 3 Menu Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters 10 6 CLI Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters 10 7 Using the CLI To View Port Status 0 10 8 Using the CLI To Configure Ports 0 5 10 10 Using the CLI To Configure a Broadcast Limit 10 11 Configuring HP Auto MDIX 00 0 ce eee eee 10 13 Manual Auto MDIX Override on the Series 2600 2600 PWR and 2800 Switches 2 cee cece eens 10 14 Web Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters 10 17 Jumbo Packets on the Series 2800 Switches 4 10 17 Terminology o ss 5025 03 eecg dae nest ed teeta Be Ea AE Godage ig Soar 10 18 Operating Rules cisco segsae t euE TOE AA aa ea Melee bake es 10 18 Configuring Jumbo Packet Operation 0 000 10 19 OVEIVICW ions eniioeil awe giae de heehee Matai eead eed 10 19 Viewing the Current Jumbo Configuration 10 20 Enabling or Disabling Jumbo Traffic ona VLAN 10 22 Operating Notes for Jumbo Traffic Handling 10 22 Troubleshooting 0 0 0 cece eect eee eae 10 25 QoS Pass Through Mode on the Series 2800 Switches 10 25 General Operation 00 cece eee etree 10 25 QoS Priority Mapping With and Without QoS Pass
161. SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch SNMP Communities SNMP commuities are supported by the switch to allow management applica tion that use version 2c or version 1 to access the switch The communities are mapped to Group Access Levels that are used for version 2c or version 1 support For more information see Group Access Levels on page 13 11 This mapping will happen automatically based on the communities access privi leges but special mappings can be added with the snmpv3 community com mand Syntax no snmpv3 community This command maps or removes a mapping of a community name to a group access level To remove a mapping you only need the index_name lt index lt index name gt gt This is an index number or title for the mapping The values of 1 5 are reserved and can not be mapped lt name lt com name gt gt This is the community name that is being mapped to a group access level lt sec name lt security name gt gt This is the group level that the community is being mapped For more information see Group Access Levels on page 13 11 lt tag lt tag value gt gt This is used to specify which target address may have access via this index reference 13 12 Configuring for Network Management Applications Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch Figure 13 4 shows the assigning of the Operator community on MgrStation1 to the CommunityOperatorReadWrite group Any other Operator only ha
162. Savings Time on HP ProCurve Switches Configuring Daylight Savings Time Before configuring a User defined Daylight Time Rule it is important to understand how the switch treats the entries The switch knows which dates are Sundays and uses an algorithm to determine on which date to change the system clock given the configured Beginning day and Ending day m Ifthe configured day is a Sunday the time changes at 2am on that day m Ifthe configured day is not a Sunday the time changes at 2am on the first Sunday after the configured day This is true for both the Beginning day and the Ending day With that algorithm one should use the value 1 to represent first Sunday of the month and a value equal to number of days in the month minus 6 to represent last Sunday of the month This allows a single configuration for every year no matter what date is the appropriate Sunday to change the clock E 3 Daylight Savings Time on HP ProCurve Switches Configuring Daylight Savings Time This page is intentionally unused E 4 Index Symbols gt prompt C 44 Numerics 802 3u auto negotiation standard 10 4 A access manager 13 13 operator 13 13 ACL debug See also debug command Actions line 3 9 3 10 3 11 location on screen 3 9 address table port B 14 address network manager 13 4 13 5 alert log 5 19 alert types 5 20 disabling 5 24 setting the sensiti
163. Status Indicator a Most Critical Alert Description atus Information i ee Product Name Figure 5 15 Example of the Status Bar The Status bar consists of four objects m Status Indicator Indicates by icon the severity ofthe most critical alert in the current display of the Alert Log This indicator can be one of three shapes and colors as shown in the following table Table 5 1 Status Indicator Key Color Switch Status Status Indicator Shape Blue Normal Activity First time installation information available in the Alert log Green Normal Activity Yellow Warning Red Critical gt m System Name The name you have configured for the switch by using Identity screen system name command or the switch console System Information screen Most Critical Alert Description A brief description of the earliest unacknowledged alert with the current highest severity in the Alert Log appearing in the right portion of the Status Bar In instances where multiple critical alerts have the same severity level only the earliest unacknowledged alert is deployed in the Status bar 5 22 Using the HP Web Browser Interface Status Reporting Features Product Name The product name of the switch to which you are connected in the current web browser interface session Setting Fault Detection Policy One of the powerful features in the web browser interface is the Fault Detection facili
164. Syntax timesync timep Selects TimeP as the time synchronization method ip timep dhcp Configures DHCP as the TimeP mode For example suppose m Time synchronization is configured for SNTP You want to 1 View the current time synchronization 2 Select TimeP as the time synchronization mode 3 Enable TimeP for DHCP mode 4 View the TimeP configuration 9 18 Time Protocols TimeP Viewing Selecting and Configuring The commands and output would appear as follows HPswitch config show timep show timep displays the TimeP configuration and also shows Timep Configuration that SNTP is the currently active time synchronization mode Time Syne Mode Sntp TimeP Mode Disabled HPswitch config timesyne timep 2 HPswitch config ip timep dhep 8 HPswitch config show timep Timep Configuration Time Syne Mode Timep TimeP Mode DHCP Poll Interval min 720 show timep again displays the TimeP configuration and shows that TimeP is now the currently active time synchronization mode Figure 9 12 Example of Enabling TimeP Operation in DHCP Mode Enabling Timep in Manual Mode Like DHCP mode configuring TimeP for Manual mode enables TimeP However for manual operation you must also specify the IP address of the TimeP server The switch allows only one TimeP server To enable the TimeP protocol Syntax timesync timep Selects Timep ip timep manual lt ip addr gt Activates TimeP in Manual mode with a
165. TP TFTP Server Remote File Name Actions gt Cancel Edit eXecute Help Select the file transfer method TFTP and XMODEM are currently supported Use arrow keys to change field selection lt Space gt to toggle field choices and lt Enter gt to go to Actions Figure A 1 Example of the Download OS Screen Default Values 2 Press E for Edit 3 Ensure that the Method field is set to TFTP the default 4 Inthe TFP Server field type in the IP address of the TFTP server in which the switch software file has been stored 5 Inthe Remote File Name field type the name of the switch software file If you are using a UNIX system remember that the filename is case sensi tive 6 Press Enter then X for eXecute to begin the switch software download The following screen then appears A 4 Note File Transfers Downloading Switch Software CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Download OS Current Firmware revision G 05 01 Method TFTP TFTP IFIP Server 13 28 227 105 Remote File Name G_05_02 swi Progress Bar Received 370 000 bytes of OS download fo ee eee ee 4 aca ata a a na a ets E a a me Se eer ttttaeaaea rere eee Figure A 2 Example of the Download OS Screen During a Download A progress bar indicates the progress of the download When the entire switch software file has been received all activity on the switch halts and you will see Validating and writing system software to FLAS
166. Using Logging To Identify Problem Sources on page C 23 Some of the causes of download failures include Incorrect or unreachable address specified for the TFTP Server parameter This may include network problems Incorrect VLAN Incorrect name specified for the Remote File Name parameter or the specified file cannot be found on the TFTP server This can also occur if the TFTP server is a Unix machine and the case upper or lower for the filename on the server does not match the case for the filename entered for the Remote File Name parameter in the Download OS screen One or more of the switch s IP configuration parameters are incorrect A 17 File Transfers Transferring Switch Configurations Note m Fora Unix TFTP server the file permissions for the switch software file do not allow the file to be copied m Another console session through either a direct connection to a terminal device or through Telnet was already running when you started the session in which the download was attempted If an error occurs in which normal switch operation cannot be restored the switch automatically reboots itself In this case an appropriate message is displayed after the switch reboots Transferring Switch Configurations Transfer Features Feature Default Menu CLI Web use TFTP to copy from a remote n a below host to a config file use TFTP to copy a config file to a n a page A 19 remote host use Xmo
167. abling General Operation The Switch 2626 PWR and 2650 PWR provision their 10 100Base TX ports with 406 watts of power for PoE applications compatible with the IEEE 802 3af standard On the Switch 2650 PWR you can optionally provision ports 1 24 with 406 watts of internal power and ports 25 48 with 408 watts of external power by adding an HP ProCurve 600 Redundant and External Power Supply HP RPS EPS J8168A or an HP ProCurve 610 External Power Supply The switches support the normal operation of non PoE devices on ports configured for PoE operation Regarding Cat 5 cabling for PoE the 802 af standard allows either the spare pair or the data pair for PoE power transmission The Switch 2600 PWR series devices supply PoE power over the data pair Using the commands described in this chapter you can Configure a power threshold for SNMP and Event Log reporting of PoE consumption on the switch m Specify the priority you want the switch to use for provisioning PoE in the event that the switch s PoE resources become oversubscribed Power Over Ethernet PoE Operation for the Series 2600 PWR Switches Terminology m Enable or disable PoE operation on individual ports In the default configuration the switch enables PoE on all 10 100 TX ports subject to PoE priority in the case of oversubscription of PoE resources Monitor PoE status and performance on the switch Related Publications This chapter introduces general PoE
168. ad Switch Software from a Server This procedure assumes that An switch software file for the switch has been stored on a TFTP server accessible to the switch The switch software file is typically available from the HP ProCurve website at http Awww hp com go hpprocurve m The switch is properly connected to your network and has already been configured with a compatible IP address and subnet mask m The TFTP server is accessible to the switch through IP Before you use the procedure do the following m Obtain the IP address of the TFTP server in which the switch software file has been stored m If VLANs are configured on the switch determine the name of the VLAN in which the TFTP server is operating m Determine the name of the switch software file stored in the TFTP server for the switch for example G0721 swi A 3 File Transfers Downloading Switch Software Note If your TFTP server is a Unix workstation ensure that the case upper or lower that you specify for the filename is the same case as the characters in the switch software filenames on the server Menu TFTP Download from a Server to Primary Flash Note that the menu interface accesses only the primary flash 1 Inthe console Main Menu select Download OS to display this screen Seeeseseseseseeeeee e 22 CONSOLE MANAGER MODE 22222222s2s22s2s2s2222s22222222 Download O05 Current Firmware revision G 05 01 Method TF
169. affic across the trunk group For example in figure 12 12 showing a three port trunk traffic could be assigned as shown in table 12 6 Switch DOGG Figure 12 12 Example of Port Trunked Network Table 12 6 Example of Link Assignments in a Trunk Group SA DA Distribution Source Destination Link Node A Node W 1 Node B Node X 2 Node C Node Y 3 Node D Node Z 1 Node A Node Y 2 Node B Node W 3 12 27 Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration This page is intentionally unused 12 28 13 Configuring for Network Management Applications Contents Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch 2 000 13 3 OVEN VIC WE gtcdtt nese athe ee aoe gta quar alate once ae maser a a aaa aE 13 3 SNMP Management Features 000 cece eee eee eee 13 4 Configuring for SNMP Access to the Switch 13 4 Configuring for SNMP Version 3 Access to the Switch 13 5 SNMP Version 3 Commands 020e cece eee eee eee 13 6 SNMPv3 Enable 0 06 c eee ence ee ee beet ewe nae 13 7 SNMP Version 3 Users 0 0 eee nici edoi eee ene eee 13 8 Group Access Levels 00 0 cece cece eee eens 13 11 SNMP Communities 0 0 eee cee eee eens 13 12 Menu Viewing and Configuring non SNMP version 3 Communities i e s a r ccc ccc aa a N 13 14 CLI Viewing and Configuring SNMP Community Names 13 16 SNMP Notification and Traps
170. ailable to ports 1 24 EPS available to ports 1 24 Only ifthe provided by the internal source internal power supply fails 408 204 watts available to ports 25 48 provided by the EPS source EPS Only 408 204 watts available to ports The internal power supply has 1 24 The EPS provides PoE failed and the EPS provides 408 power to ports 1 24 only if the 204 watts to ports 1 48 Note that internal power supply fails 38 watts of this power are always allocated exclusively to ports 1 24 or 25 48 If both EPS ports on the HP 600 RPS EPS or both ports of a pair on the HP 610 EPS are connected to switches each switch can receive 204 watts of power If a single switch is connected to the EPS ports that switch can receive 408 watts If you are using the HP ProCurve Switch 2650 PWR with external PoE power the number of ports with available PoE power when the switch is powered by just the HP 600 RPS EPS or HP 610 EPS unit may be less than the number of ports powered when both the switch and the HP 600 RPS EPS or HP 610 EPS unit are supplying power In the default configuration the number and location of ports with redundant PoE power is determined by three factors 11 6 Note Power Over Ethernet PoE Operation for the Series 2600 PWR Switches General PoE Operation m The number of switches drawing external PoE power from the HP 600 RPS EPS or HP 610 EPS unit If only a single switch is using external PoE power the HP 600
171. al default 720 seconds you need only these two commands for minimal SNTP broadcast configuration Syntax timesync sntp Selects SNTP as the time synchronization method sntp broadcast Configures Broadcast as the SNTP mode For example suppose m Time synchronization is in the factory default configuration TimeP is the currently selected time synchronization method You want to 1 View the current time synchronization 9 9 Time Protocols SNTP Viewing Selecting and Configuring 2 Select SNTP as the time synchronization mode 3 Enable SNTP for Broadcast mode 4 View the SNTP configuration again to verify the configuration The commands and output would appear as follows HPswitch config show stro show sntp displays the SNTP configuration and also shows that SNTP Configuration TimeP is the currently active time synchronization mode Time Syne Mode Timep SNTP Mode disabled Poll Interval sec 720 720 HPswitch config timesyne str HPswitch config sntp broadcast HPswitch config show sntp show sntp again displays the SNTP configuration and shows that SNTP Configuration SNTP is now the currently active time synchronization mode and is Time Sync Mode sntp configured for broadcast operation SNTP Mode Broadcast Poll Interval sec 720 720 Figure 9 4 Example of Enabling SNTP Operation in Broadcast Mode Enabling SNTP in Unicast Mode Like broadcast mode configuring SNTP f
172. alues The snmp server command enables you to add SNMP communities with either default or specific access attributes and to delete specific communities Syntax no snmp server community lt community name gt Configures anew community name If you do not also specify operator or manager the switch automatically assigns the community to the operator MIB view If you do not specify restricted or unrestricted the switch auto matically assigns the community to restricted read only access The no form uses only the lt community name gt variable and deletes thenamed community from the switch operator manager Optionally assigns an access level At the operator level the community can access all MIB objects except the CONFIG MIB At the manager level the community can access all MIB objects restricted unrestricted Optionally assigns MIB access type Assigning the restricted type allows the community to read MIB vari ables but not to set them Assigning the unrestricted type allows the community to read and set MIB variables For example to add the following communities Community Access Level Type of Access red team manager unrestricted Access to all MIB objects read write blue team operator restricted Access to all MIB objects read only except the CONFIG MIB HPswitch config snmp server community red team manager unrestricted HPswitch config snmp server community bl
173. ame Commands Page show snmp server lt community string gt 13 16 no snmp server 13 17 community lt community str gt 13 17 host lt community str gt lt ip addr gt 13 22 lt none debug all not info critical gt enable traps lt authentication gt 13 23 Listing Community Names and Values This command lists the data for currently configured SNMP community names along with trap receivers and the setting for authentication traps see SNMP Notification and Traps on page 13 18 Syntax show snmp server lt community string gt This example lists the data for all communities in a switch that is both the default HPswitch public community name and another community named blue team HPswitch show snmp server Default Community and Settings SNMP Communities Community Name MIB View Write Access Manager Unrestricted Non Default Operator Restricted Community and Settings Trap Receivers Send Authentication Traps No ps No Trap Receiver Address Community Events Sent in Trap Data See page 13 18 Figure 13 7 Example of the SNMP Community Listing with Two Communities To list the data for only one community such as the public community use the above command with the community name included For example HPswitch show snmp server public 13 16 Configuring for Network Management Applications Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch Configuring Community Names and V
174. amed G0502 swi from a TFTP server with the IP address of 10 28 227 103 to primary flash 1 Execute copy as shown below HPswitch copy tftp flash 10 28 227 103 g0721 swi The Primary OS Image will be deleted continue y n Y 01431K _ Dynamic counter continually displays the This message means that the image you number of bytes transferred want to upload will replace the image currently in primary flash Figure A 3 Example of the Command to Download Switch Software 2 When the switch finishes downloading the switch software file from the server it displays this progress message Validating and Writing System Software to FLASH 3 When the switch is ready to activate the downloaded software you will see this message System software written to FLASH You will need to reboot to activate At this point use the boot command to reboot the switch and activate the software you just downloaded HPswitch boot For more on these commands refer to Rebooting the Switch on page 6 17 4 To confirm that the switch software downloaded correctly execute show system and check the Firmware revision line If you need information on primary secondary flash memory and the boot commands refer to Using Primary and Secondary Flash Image Options on page 6 12 A 6 File Transfers Downloading Switch Software Using Secure Copy and SFTP This feature is available only on the Series 2600 2600
175. ample of STP Port Information CLI Access to STP Data This option lists the STP configuration root data and per port data cost priority state and designated bridge Syntax show spanning tree HPswitch gt show spanning tree B 19 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Status and Counters Data Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Status The switch uses the CLI to display the following IGMP status on a per VLAN basis Show Command Output show ip igmp Global command listing IGMP status for all VLANs configured in the switch e VLAN ID VID and name e Active group addresses per VLAN Number of report and query packets per group e Querier access port per VLAN show ip igmp lt vian id gt Per VLAN command listing above IGMP status for specified VLAN VID show ip igmp group lt p addr gt Lists the ports currently participating in the specified group with port type Access type Age Timer data and Leave Timer data For example suppose that show ip igmp listed an IGMP group address of 224 0 1 22 You could get additional data on that group by executing the following HPswitch gt show ip igmp group 224 0 1 22 IGMP ports for group 224 0 1 22 Port Type Access Age Timer Leave Timer A3 10 100TX host Figure B 14 Example of IGMP Group Data B 20 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Status and Counters Data VLAN Information The switch uses the CLI to display the followi
176. and running on all ports In this case the holdtime is 180 seconds and the timer CDP Transmit Interval is 60 seconds Configuring CDP on the Switch Using CDP you can m View the switch s current global and per port CDP configuration m List the current contents of the switch s CDP Neighbors table that is view a listing of the CDP devices of which the switch is aware m Enable or disable CDP Default Enabled m Specify the hold time CDP packet time to live for CDP data deliv ered to neighboring CDP devices For example in CDP switch A you can specify the hold time for switch A entries in the CDP Neighbor tables of other CDP devices Default 180 seconds Specify the transmission interval for CDP packets Default 60 seconds CLI Viewing and Configuring CDP CDP Commands Page show CDP 13 32 show CDP neighbors 13 32 cdp clear 13 33 no cdp run 13 34 no cdp enable 13 35 cdp holdtime 13 36 cdp timer 13 36 13 31 Configuring for Network Management Applications CDP Viewing the Switch s Current CDP Configuration Syntax show cdp Lists the switch s global and per port CDP configuration This example shows the default CDP configuration HPswitch config show cdp Global CDP information CDP Enable Disable on the Switch Enable CDP Yes Yes pate ag Packet Hold Time in CDP Neighbor Table CDP Hold Tine 180 180 CDP Transmit Interval 60 60 e Interval for Transmitting Outbound
177. ange is 30 to 720 seconds This parameter is separate from the poll interval parameter used for Timep operation For example to change the poll interval to 300 seconds HPswitch config sntp poll interval 300 Disabling Time Synchronization Without Changing the SNTP Configuration The recommended method for disabling time synchroniza tion is to use the timesyne command to avoid changing the switch s SNTP configuration Syntax no timesync Halts time synchronization without changing the switch s SNTP configuration For example suppose SNTP is running as the switch s time synchronization protocol with Broadcast as the SNTP mode and the factory default polling interval You would halt time synchronization with this command HPswitch config no timesync If you then viewed the SNTP configuration you would see the following Time Protocols SNTP Viewing Selecting and Configuring HPswitch config show sntp SNTP Configuration Time Syne Mode Disabled SNTP Mode Broadcast Poll Interval sec 720 720 Figure 9 7 Example of SNTP with Time Sychronization Disabled Disabling the SNTP Mode If you want to prevent SNTP from being used even if selected by timesync or the Menu interface s Time Sync Method param eter configure the SNTP mode as disabled Syntax no sntp Disables SNTP by changing the SNTP mode configuration to Disabled For example if the switch is running SNTP in
178. any other devices If the next PD you connect draws 5 watts then only 12 watts remain unused With only 12 watts available if you connect yet another PD the lowest priority port will lose PoE power until the switch once again has 15 4 or more watts available For information on power priority refer to Power Priority on page 11 7 Power Over Ethernet PoE Operation for the Series 2600 PWR Switches General PoE Operation Note Disconnecting a PD from aport causes the switch to stop providing PoE power to that port and makes the power available to other ports configured for PoE operation If the PoE demand becomes greater than the available power the switch transfers power from lower priority ports to higher priority ports Ports not currently providing power to PDs are not affected 15 4 watts of available power is required for the switch to begin delivering power to a port such as when a newly connected PD is detected or when power is released from higher priority ports Depending on power demands lower priority ports on a switch with high PoE power demand may occasion ally lose power due to the demands of higher priority ports Refer to Power Priority on page 11 7 Table 1 Port Group Maximum Power Allocations PoE Power PoE for Switch 2626 PWR PoE for Switch 2650 PWR Sources Internal Only 406 watts available to ports 1 24 406 watts available to ports 1 48 Internal and redundant 408 204 watts 406 watts av
179. ase the content of a flash location before downloading another software file The process automatically overwrites the previous file with the new file If you want to remove an unwanted software version from flash HP recommends that you do so by overwriting it with the same software version that you are using to operate the switch or with another acceptable software version To copy a software file between the primary and secondary flash locations see Copying a Switch Software Image from One Flash Loca tion to Another below The local commands described here are for flash image management within the switch To download a software image file from an external source see Appendix A File Transfers Copying a Switch Software Image from One Flash Location to Another When you copy the flash image from primary to secondary or the reverse the switch overwrites the file in the destination location with a copy of the file from the source location This means you do not have to erase the current image at the destination location before copying in a new image Verify that there is an acceptable software version in the source flash location from which you are going to copy Use the show flash command or if necessary the procedure under Determining Which Flash Image Versions Are Installed on page 6 13 to verify an acceptable software version Attempting to copy from asource image location that has a corrupted flash image overwrites
180. ash Location In this case the switch aborts the attempt and displays Image does not exist Operation aborted Interaction of Primary and Secondary Flash Images with the Current Configuration The switch has one startup config file page 6 2 which it always uses for reboots regardless of whether the reboot is from primary or secondary flash Also for rebooting purposes it is not necessary for the software image and the startup config file to support identical software fea tures For example suppose you have just downloaded a software upgrade that includes new features that are not supported in the software you used to create the current startup config file In this case the software simply assigns factory default values to the parameters controlling the new features Simi larly If you create a startup config file while using a version Y of the switch software and then reboot the switch with an earlier software version X that does not include all of the features found in Y the software simply ignores the parameters for any features that it does not support 6 19 Switch Memory and Configuration Using Primary and Secondary Flash Image Options This page is intentionally unused 6 20 Interface Access and System Information Contents Overview ae hose riami eniak heed a ie epee ied ds ate ee Eade eee ewe 7 2 Interface Access Console Serial Link Web and Telnet 7 3 Menu Modifying
181. assive LACP Youwantto achieve fault tolerance for high availability applications where you want a four link trunk 2600 2600 PWR 4100gl and 6108 or an eight link trunk 2800 with one or more standby links available in case an active link goes down Both ends of the link must be dynamic LACP e Static LACP Use the manually configured static LACP trunk when The port on the other end of the trunk link is configured for a static LACP trunk You want to configure non default spanning tree STP or IGMP parameters on an LACP trunk group You wantanLACP trunk group to operate in a VLAN other than the default VLAN and GVRP is disabled Refer to VLANs and Dynamic LACP on page 12 24 You want to use a monitor port on the switch to monitor an LACP trunk See Trunk Group Operation Using LACP on page 12 18 Trunk Provides manually configured static only trunking to non e Most HP switches and routing switches not running the 802 3ad LACP protocol protocol e Windows NT and HP UX workstations and servers Use the Trunk option when The device to which you want to create a trunk link is using a non 802 3ad trunking protocol You are unsure which type of trunk to use or the device to which you want to create a trunk link is using an unknown trunking protocol You want to use a monitor port on the switch to monitor traffic on a trunk Refer to Trunk Group Operation Using the Trunk Option on page 12 25
182. at in the last saved detection setting session Reset to Default Settings This button reverts the policy setting to Medium Sensitivity for Log Network Problems 5 24 Switch Memory and Configuration Contents OVGEVIOW aai he tt AS Ba es ede eed wa ea ee 6 2 Overview of Configuration File Management 2 4 6 2 Using the CLI To Implement Configuration Changes 6 5 Using the Menu and Web Browser Interfaces To Implement Configuration Changes rar aiian BEE AERIS eta a isis Ga a eee A a ae 6 8 Configuration Changes Using the Menu Interface 6 8 Using Save and Cancel in the Menu Interface 6 9 Rebooting from the Menu Interface 4 6 10 Configuration Changes Using the Web Browser Interface 6 11 Using Primary and Secondary Flash Image Options 6 12 Displaying the Current Flash Image Data 6 12 Switch Software Downloads 00 eee cece eee eee 6 14 Local Switch Software Replacement and Removal 6 15 Rebooting the Switch 00 0 cece eee ene 6 17 Operating Notes ossec seca a i eei Sonera AEE ng a AEE gh dove select dee 6 19 6 1 Switch Memory and Configuration Overview Overview This chapter describes How switch memory manages configuration changes How the CLI implements configuration changes How the menu interface and web browser interface implement configu r
183. ation changes How the switch provides software options through primary secondary flash image options How to use the switch s primary and secondary flash options including displaying flash information booting or restarting the switch and other topics Overview of Configuration File Management The switch maintains two configuration files the running config file and the startup config file CLI configuration changes are written to Running Config File A this file To use the CLI to Controls switch operation When the switch reboots save the latest version of the contents of this file are erased and replaced by the this file to the startup contents of the startup contfig file config file you must execute the write memory command Menu interface configu ration changes are simul taneously written to both of these files Startup Config File Preserves the most recently saved configuration through any subsequent reboot Figure 6 1 Conceptual Illustration of Switch Memory Operation Note Switch Memory and Configuration Overview of Configuration File Management Running Config File Exists in volatile memory and controls switch operation If no configuration changes have been made in the CLI since the switch was last booted the running config file is identical to the startup config file a Startup config File Exists in flash non volatile memory and is used to preserve the most recently saved confi
184. ault 162 port mask lt mask gt Used to specific a range of UDP ports Default 0 addr mask lt mask gt Used to specify a range of address to transit notify messages Default 0 retries lt value gt Number times to retransmit a message when no response is reviewed Default 3 timeout lt value gt How long to wait for a response for the target Default 1500 13 18 Configuring for Network Management Applications Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch no snmpv3 targetaddress lt addr name gt params lt parms name gt lt IP Addr gt Continued max msg size lt size gt The maximum number of bytes of length a message to this target can be Default 1472 taglist lt tag params gt Set list of values used to select this entry from snmpNotifyTable no snmpv3 params lt paramsS name gt user lt user name gt Add or delete a user parameter for use with target address The params name must match the parms name in the targetaddress command The user name should be a User from the user table For more information on users see SNMP Version 3 Users on page 13 8 A complete params command must also have a sec model and msg processing entry lt sec model lt ver ver2c ver3 gt gt This established the security model to use for messages passed to the targetaddress IF ver3 is used then the msg processing must also be ver3 lt msg processing lt ver1
185. beets mend ead Ea kM Seka nantes 13 7 SNMP Version 3 Users 0 ce ccc eee eee e eee ene enees 13 8 Group Access Levels 2 0 0 cee cece eee ee eee eens 13 11 SNMP Communities especi cesi p pass oi ee eee eee 13 12 Menu Viewing and Configuring non SNMP version 3 GOMMUNILICS Sats eases aie hse Cesare eoh Ra Beckie a RR 13 14 CLI Viewing and Configuring SNMP Community Names 13 16 SNMP Notification and Traps 00 02 eee eee eens 13 18 Trap Features 5 0 c cece eee cece ee beeen tae eeee 13 20 Using the CLI To Enable Authentication Traps 13 23 Advanced Management RMON 00202 ce eee ee eee 13 24 CDP nis wea dys ee Mee es earha bie aa a She ROSA EMER Eee Atle 13 25 TAGrOGUCHION rea G5 alee tceeld ard cp ek aed AEA NE och ated tas 13 25 CDP Terminology 2 cee cece cee eee eens 13 26 General CDP Operation 00 0 c eee ee eee eee 13 27 Outgoing Packets 2 2 0 cece cee tees e eben eee eas 13 27 Incoming CDP Packets 0 0 0 cece cece eee eee 13 28 Configuring CDP on the Switch 00 0 e eee eee 13 31 CLI Viewing and Configuring CDP 13 31 Viewing the Switch s Current CDP Configuration 13 32 Viewing the Switch s Current CDP Neighbors Table 13 32 Clearing Resetting the CDP Neighbors Table 13 33 Configuring CDP Operation 00 0
186. ber gt lacp Removing a port from a trunk without first disabling the port can create a traffic loop that can slow down or halt your network Before removing a port from a trunk HP recommends that you either disable the port or disconnect it from the LAN Port Based Access Control 802 1X Related Problems To list the 802 1X port access Event Log messages stored on the switch use show log 802 See also Radius Related Problems on page C 14 The switch does not receive a response to RADIUS authentication requests In this case the switch will attempt authentication using the secondary method configured for the type of access you are using console Telnet or SSH There can be several reasons for not receiving a response to an authentication request Do the following Use ping to ensure that the switch has access to the configured RADIUS servers Verify that the switch is using the correct encryption key RADIUS secret key for each server Verify that the switch has the correct IP address for each RADIUS server C 11 Troubleshooting Unusual Network Activity Ensure that the radius server timeout period is long enough for network conditions The switch does not authenticate a client even though the RADIUS server is properly configured and providing a response to the authentication request If the RADIUS server configuration for authenti cating the client includes a VLAN assignment ensure that the VLAN e
187. ble port lacp Define whether LACP is enabled on the port and whether is in active or passive mode when enabled monitor Define that the port is to be monitored interface ether Enter the Interface Configuration Level or execute one command on that level vlan Add delete edit VLAN configuration or enter a VLAN context boot system flash Reboot the device configure Enter the Configuration context copy Copy datafiles to from the switch end Return to the Manager Exec context erase Erase the configuration file stored in flash MORE next page Space next line Enter quit Control C The remaining commands in the listing are Manager Operator and context commands Figure 4 9 Context Specific Commands Affecting Port Context 4 14 Using the Command Line Interface CLI Using the CLI VLAN Context Includes VLAN specific commands that apply only to the selected VLAN plus Manager and Operator commands The prompt for this mode includes the VLAN ID of the selected VLAN For example if you had already configured a VLAN with an ID of 100 in the switch HPswitch config vlan 100 Command executed at configura tion level to enter VLAN 100 context HPswitch vlan 100 Resulting prompt showing VLAN 100 context HPswitch vlan 100 Lists commands you can use in the VLAN context plus Manager Oper ator and context commands you can execute at this level HPswitch vlan 100 In the VLAN gt c
188. bridging devices in the topology in order for the loop to be detected STP Blocks a Link in a VLAN Even Though There Are No Redundant Links in that VLAN In 802 1Q compliant devices such as the switches cov ered by this guide STP blocks redundant physical links even if they are in separate VLANs A solution is to use only one multiple VLAN tagged link between the devices Also if ports are available you can improve the band width in this situation by using a port trunk See the chapter on VLANs in the Advanced Traffic Management Guide C 15 Troubleshooting Unusual Network Activity Fast Uplink Troubleshooting Some of the problems that can result from incorrect usage of Fast Uplink STP include temporary loops and generation of duplicate packets Problem sources can include m Fast Uplink is configured on a switch that is the STP root device m Either the Hello Time or the Max Age setting or both is too long on one or more switches Return the Hello Time and Max Age settings to their default values 2 seconds and 20 seconds respectively on a switch m A downlink port is connected to a switch that is further away in hop count from the root device than the switch port on which fast uplink STP is configured m Two edge switches are directly linked to each other with a fast uplink Mode Uplink connection Fast uplink is configured on both ends of a link A switch serving as a backup STP root switch has por
189. ce by entering the menu command For example HPswitch menu Enter results in 3 4 Note Using the Menu Interface Starting and Ending a Menu Session ssss22222222222222222222s CONSOLE MANAGER NODE 2 2 22eses seeseeseeeeeeee2 22 Main Menu Status and Counters Switch Configuration Console Passwords Event Log Command Line CLI Reboot Switch Download 05 Run Setup Stacking Logout ow moa non BUNGA Provides the menu to display configuration status and counters To select menu item press item number or highlight item and press lt Enter gt Figure 3 1 The Main Menu with Manager Privileges For a description of Main Menu features see Main Menu Features on page 3 7 To configure the switch to start with the menu interface instead of the CLI go to the Manager level prompt in the CLI enter the setup command and in the resulting display change the Logon Default parameter to Menu For more infor mation see the Installation and Getting Started Guide you received with the switch How To End a Menu Session and Exit from the Console The method for ending a menu session and exiting from the console depends on whether during the session you made any changes to the switch configu ration that require a switch reboot to activate Most changes via the menu interface need only a Save and do not require a switch reboot Configuration changes needing a reboot
190. ces all at user specified times Investment Protection The modular software architecture of HP ProCurve Manager Plus will allow HP to offer network administrators add on software solutions that complement their needs 2 8 Using the Menu Interface Contents OVEIVIEW a aaa Enea E OB R ok ORD ala see Paar Bones of eee ab chart Manan 3 2 Starting and Ending a Menu Session 0 0 eee ee ee ences 3 3 How To Start a Menu Interface Session 02 0 000 3 4 How To End a Menu Session and Exit from the Console 3 5 Main Menu Features 0 0 c cece eee een traa 3 7 Screen Structure and Navigation 00 00 cece cece eee eee 3 9 Rebooting the Switch 0 c cipis nadou sidre EENG eee 3 12 Menu Features List noorena rondeel ee cee ene nee eenbees 3 14 Where To Go From Here 2 0 00 recente i ane ee 3 15 3 1 Using the Menu Interface Overview Overview This chapter describes the following m Overview of the Menu Interface Starting and ending a Menu session page 3 3 The Main Menu page 3 7 Screen structure and navigation page 3 9 Rebooting the switch page 3 12 The menu interface operates through the switch console to provide you with a subset of switch commands in an easy to use menu format enabling you to m Perform a quick configuration of basic parameters such as the IP addressing needed to provide management access through your n
191. ckets of up to 9220 bytes including four bytes for a VLAN tag when configured for jumbo traffic In the 2800 switches you can enable inbound jumbo packets on a per VLAN basis That is on a VLAN configured for jumbo traffic all ports belong ing to that VLAN and operating at 1 Gbps or 10 Gbps allow inbound jumbo packets of up to 9220 bytes Regardless of the mode configured on a given jumbo enabled port if the port is operating at only 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps only packets that do not exceed 1522 bytes are allowed inbound on that port 10 17 Port Status and Basic Configuration Jumbo Packets on the Series 2800 Switches Terminology Jumbo Packet On the Series 2800 switches an IP packet exceeding 1522 bytes in size The maximum Jumbo packet size is 9220 bytes This size includes 4 bytes for the VLAN tag Jumbo VLAN A VLAN configured to allow inbound jumbo traffic All ports belonging to ajumbo and operating at 1 Gbps or higher can receive jumbo packets from external devices MTU Maximum Transmission Unit This is the maximum size IP packet the switch can receive for Layer 2 packets inbound on a port The switch allows jumbo packets of up to 9220 bytes Standard MTU On the Series 2800 switches an IP packet of 1522 bytes in size This size includes 4 bytes for the VLAN tag Operating Rules Required Port Speed The Series 2800 switches allow inbound and outbound jumbo packets on ports operating at speeds of 1 gigabi
192. command strings for a specific context area To select this level enter the specific context at the Global Configuration level prompt For example to select the context level for an existing VLAN with the VLAN ID of 10 you would enter the following command and see the indicated result HPswitch config vlan 10 HPswitch vlan 10 4 5 Using the Command Line Interface CLI Using the CLI Changing Interfaces If you change from the CLI to the menu interface or the reverse you will remain at the same privilege level For example entering the menu command from the Operator level of the CLI takes you to the Operator privilege level in the menu interface Table 4 1 Privilege Level Hierarchy Privilege Example of Prompt and Permitted Operations Level Operator Privilege Operator Level HPswitch gt show lt command gt setup View status and configuration information ping lt argument gt link test lt argument gt Perform connectivity tests enable Move from the Operator level to the Manager level menu Move from the CLI interface to the menu interface logout Exit from the CLI interface and terminate the console session exit Terminate the current session same as logout Manager Privilege Manager HPswitch Level Global HPswitch config Configuration Level Context HPswitch eth 5 Configuration HPswitch vlan 100 Level Perform system level actions such as sys
193. config uration management device software updates and advanced VLAN management HP includes a copy of PCM in box for a free 30 day trial This manual describes how to use the menu interface chapter 3 the CLI chapter 4 the web browser interface chapter 5 and how to use these interfaces to configure and monitor the switch For information on how to access the web browser interface Help refer to Online Help for the HP Web Browser Interface on page 5 11 2 2 Selecting a Management Interface Advantages of Using the Menu Interface To use HP ProCurve Manager or HP ProCurve Manager Plus refer to the Getting Started Guide and the Administrator s Guide which are available electronically with the software for these applications For more information visit the HP ProCurve web site at http www hp com go hpprocurve Advantages of Using the Menu Interface meemeeeeeseeeseeseseeseees CONSOLE MANAGER MODE z z2 2z222222222222222222222 Main Menu Status and Counters Switch Configuration Console Passwords Event Log Command Line CLI Reboot Switch Download 05 Run Setup Stacking Logout OWVNMATD OH SWONH Provides the menu to display configuration status and counters To select menu item press item number or highlight item and press lt Enter gt Figure 2 1 Example of the Console Interface Display m Provides quick easy management access to a menu driven subset o
194. creen 10 6 Note Port Status and Basic Configuration Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters Using the Menu To Configure Ports The menu interface uses the same screen for configuring both individual ports and port trunk groups For information on port trunk groups see Chapter 12 Port Trunking 1 From the Main Menu Select 2 Switch Configuration 2 Port Trunk Settings CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Switch Configuration Port Trunk Settings Enabled 10 100Tx 10 100Tx Disable 10 100Tx Disable 10 100Tx Disable 10 100Tx Disable 10 100Tx Disable 10 100Tx Disable Trk2 Trunk 10 100Tx Disable Trk2 Trunk Actions gt Edit Save Help Cancel changes and return to previous screen Use arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Figure 10 2 Example of Port Trunk Settings with a Trunk Group Configured 2 Press E for Edit The cursor moves to the Enabled field for the first port 3 Refer to the online help provided with this screen for further information on configuration options for these features 4 When you have finished making changes to the above parameters press Enter then press S for Save CLI Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters Port Status and Configuration Commands show interfaces brief below show interfaces config page 10 9 interface page 10 10 10 7 Port Status and Basic Configuration View
195. d The Default Timep does not operate even if specified by the Menu interface Time Sync Method parameter or the CLI timesync command When Timep is selected as the time synchronization method the switch attempts to acquire a Timep server IP address via DHCP If the switch receives a server address it polls the server for updates according to the Timep poll interval If the switch does not receive a Timep server IP address it cannot perform time synchronization updates When Timep is selected as the time synchronization method the switch attempts to poll the specified server for updates according to the Timep poll interval If the switch fails to receive updates from the server time synchronization updates do not occur Used only when the TimeP Mode is set to Manual Specifies the IP address of the TimeP server that the switch accesses for time synchronization updates You can configure one server Default 720 minutes Specifies the interval the switch waits between attempts to poll the TimeP server for updates Time Protocols TimeP Viewing Selecting and Configuring Menu Viewing and Configuring TimeP To View Enable and Modify the TimeP Protocol 1 From the Main Menu select 2 Switch Configuration 1 System Information SSSSSSSSSS SS SSS SS SSS SSS CONSOLE MANAGER MODE f Switch Configuration System Information System Name HPswitch System Contact
196. d directly by the software or the user can access web browser and command line interfaces with the click of a button to manage individ ual devices from inside the tool m Features and benefits of HP ProCurve Manager Plus All of the Features of HP ProCurve Manager Refer to the above listing In Depth Traffic Analysis An integrated low overhead traffic mon itor interface shows detailed information on traffic throughout the network Using enhanced traffic analysis protocols such as Extended RMON and sFlow users can monitor overall traffic levels segments with the highest traffic or even the top users within a network segment Group and Policy Management Changes in configuration are tracked and logged and archived configurations can be applied to one or many devices Configurations can be compared over time or between two devices with the differences highlighted for users Advanced VLAN Management A new easy to use VLAN manage ment interface allows users to create and assign VLANs across the entire network without having to access each network device indi vidually 2 7 Selecting a Management Interface Advantages of Using HP ProCurve Manager or HP ProCurve Manager Plus Device Software Updates This feature automatically obtains new device software images from HP and updates devices allowing users to download the latest version or choose the desired version Updates can be scheduled easily across large groups of devi
197. d the switch allows web browser access only to a device having an authorized IP address For more information on IP Authorized managers see the Access Security Guide for your switch Java applets may not be running on the web browser They are required for the switch web browser interface to operate correctly See the online Help on your web browser for how to run the Java applets C 6 Troubleshooting Browser or Telnet Access Problems Cannot Telnet into the switch console from a station on the network Telnet access may be disabled by the Inbound Telnet Enabled parameter in the System Information screen of the menu interface 2 Switch Configuration 1 System Information The switch may not have the correct IP address subnet mask or gateway Verify by connecting a console to the switch s Console port and selecting 2 Switch Configuration 5 IP Configuration Note If DHCP Bootp is used to configure the switch see the Note above If you are using DHCP to acquire the IP address for the switch the IP address lease time may have expired so that the IP address has changed For more information on how to reserve an IP address refer to the documentation for the DHCP application that you are using If one or more IP Authorized managers are configured the switch allows inbound telnet access only to a device having an authorized IP address For more information on IP Authorized managers see the Access Security
198. d from the switch when security is required SCP works with both SSH v1 and SSH v2 Be aware that the most third party software application clients that support SCP use SSHv1 How It Works The general process for using SCP and SFTP involves three steps 1 Open an SSH tunnel between your computer and the switch if you haven t already done so This step assumes that you have already set up SSH on the switch 2 Execute ip ssh filetransfer to tell the switch that you want to enable secure file transfer 3 Use a third party client application for SCP and SFTP commands A 8 Note File Transfers Downloading Switch Software The SCP SFTP Process To use SCP and SFTP 1 Open an SSH session as you normally would to establish a secure encrypted tunnel between your computer and the switch For more detailed directions on how to open an SSH session see the chapter titled Configuring Secure Shell SSH in the Access Security Guide for your switch Please note that this is a one time procedure for new switches or connections If you have already done it once you should not need to do it a second time To enable secure file transfer on the switch once you have an SSH session established between the switch and your computer open a terminal window and type in the following command HPswitch config ip ssh filetransfer Command Options If you need to enable SSH v2 which is required for SFTP enter this com
199. dem to copy a n a _ page A 19 configuration from a serially connected host to a config file Use Xmodem to copy a config file n a E page A 20 to a serially connected host Using the CLI commands described in this section you can copy switch configurations to and from a switch TFTP Copying a Configuration from a Remote Host Syntax copy tftp lt startup config running config gt lt ip address gt lt remote file gt This command copies a configuration from a remote host to the startup config file in the switch Refer to Chapter 6 Switch Memory and Configuration for information on the startup config file For example to download a configuration file named sw4100 in the configs directory on drive d in a remote host having an IP address of 10 28 227 105 HPswitch copy tftp startup config 10 28 227 105 d configs sw4100 A 18 File Transfers Transferring Switch Configurations TFTP Copying a Configuration File to a Remote Host Syntax copy lt startup config running config gt tftp lt ip addr gt lt remote file gt This command copies the switch s startup configuration startup config file to aremote TFTP host For example to upload the current startup configuration to a file named sw4100 in the configs directory on drive d in a remote host having an IP address of 10 28 227 105 HPswitch copy startup config tftp 10 28 227 105 d configs sw4100 Xmodem Co
200. ding The Alert and Description columns are sorted alpha betically while the Status column is sorted by severity type with more critical severity indicators appearing above less critical indicators Using the HP Web Browser Interface Status Reporting Features Note Alert Types and Detailed Views As of April 2004 the web browser interface generates the following alert types e Auto Partition e Backup Transition Loss of Link e Excessive broadcasts Mis Configured SQE e Excessive CRC alignment errors Network Loop e Excessive jabbering Polarity Reversal High collision or drop rate e Excessive late collisions e Security Violation e First Time Install e Stuck 10BaseT Port e Full Duplex Mismatch e Too many undersized runt giant e Half Duplex Mismatch packets e Transceiver Hot Swap When troubleshooting the sources of alerts it may be helpful to check the switch s Port Status and Port Counter windows and the Event Log in the console interface By double clicking on Alert Entries the web browser interface displays a Detail View or separate window detailing information about the events The Detail View contains a description of the problem and a possible solution It also provides four management buttons m Acknowledge Event removes the New symbol from the log entry m Delete Event removes the alert from the Alert Log m Cancel Button closes the detail view with no change to the status of the alert a
201. e The default is auto mdix If the switch is reset to the factory defaults these ports are configured as auto mdix Use the following CLI command to change the setting for individual ports interface lt port list gt mdix mode lt automdix mdi mdix gt 10 16 Port Status and Basic Configuration Jumbo Packets on the Series 2800 Switches Web Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters In the web browser interface 1 Click on the Configuration tab 2 Click on Port Configuration 3 Select the ports you want to modify and click on Modify Selected Ports 4 After you make the desired changes click on Apply Settings Note that the web browser interface displays an existing port trunk group However to configure a port trunk group you must use the CLI or the menu interface For more on this topic see Chapter 12 Port Trunking Jumbo Packets on the Series 2800 Switches This section applies only to the HP ProCurve Series 2800 switches Feature Default Menu CLI Web display VLAN jumbo status n a 10 20 configure jumbo VLANs Disabled 10 22 The Maximum Transmission Unit MTU is the maximum size IP packet the switch can receive for Layer 2 packets inbound on a port The switch drops any inbound packets larger than the MTU allowed on the port On ports operating at 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps the MTU is fixed at 1522 bytes However ports operating at 1 Gbps or 10 Gbps speeds accept forward pa
202. e Status Reporting Features Status Reporting Features Browser elements covered in this section include m The Overview window below Port utilization and status page 5 16 m The Alert log page 5 19 m The Status bar page 5 22 The Overview Window The Overview Window is the home screen for any entry into the web browser interface The following figure identifies the various parts of the screen Status Bar Active Button Active Tab page 5 22 HP switch Status Infgrmation Tab Bar Identity fi Configuration Security Diagnostics Support Button Bar i Port Counters Port Status Port Utilization Legend fn E Unicast Rx or All Tx Port Utiliza E Non Unicast Pkts Rx tion Graphs 2 E Error Packets Rx page 5 16 Port Connected Port Status Al a2 AS Ad AS AB ATO ABO OAG MO A1 M2 M3 M4 Port Not Connected Terre 0 OO 0 OO GF GF O O OG __ Mot issvies page 5 18 Status Alert Date Time Description 1040 First Time Installation 16 Jun 01 4 01 53 PM Important installation information for your switch Alert Log page 5 19 Alert Log Control Bar Refresh Open Event Acknowledge Selected Events Delete Selected Events Figure 5 8 The Status Overview Window Policy Management and Configuration HP PCM can perform network wide policy management and configuration of your switch The Management Server URL field page 5 13 shows the URL for the management station performing that function Fo
203. e but the maximum number of ports for the Dynamic trunk to that device has already been reached on either the switch itself or the other device This port will remain in reserve or standby unless LACP detects that another active link in the trunk has become disabled blocked or down In this case LACP automatically assigns a Standby port if available to replace the failed port Yes LACP is enabled on both ends of the link No LACP is enabled on the switch but either LACP is not enabled or the link has not been detected on the opposite device Success LACP is enabled on the port detects and synchronizes with a device on the other end of the link and can move traffic across the link Failure LACP is enabled on a port and detects a device on the other end of the link but is not able to synchronize with this device and therefore not able to send LACP packets across the link This can be caused for example by an intervening device on the link such as a hub a bad hardware connection or if the LACP operation on the opposite device does not comply with the IEEE 802 3ad standard 12 22 HP switch config together HPswitch config Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration LACP Notes and Restrictions 802 1X Port Based Access Control Configured on a Port To main tain security LACP is not allowed on ports configured for 802 1X authenticator operation If you configure port security on a port on whic
204. e the time zone setting for Berlin Germany is 60 zone 1 or 60 minutes and the time zone setting for Vancouver Canada is 480 zone 8 or 480 minutes To configure the time zone and daylight time rule for Vancouver Canada HPswitch config time timezon 480 daylight time rule continental us and canada Configure the Time and Date The switch uses the time command to con figure both the time of day and the date Also executing time without param eters lists the switch s time of day and date Note that the CLI uses a 24 hour clock scheme that is hour kh values from 1 p m to midnight are input as 13 24 respectively Syntax time hh mm ss mm dd lyylyy For example to set the switch to 9 45 a m on November 17 2002 HPswitch config time 9 45 11 17 02 Executing reload or boot resets the time and date to their default startup values 7 13 Interface Access and System Information System Information Web Configuring System Parameters In the web browser interface you can enter the following system information m System Name m System Location System Contact For access to the MAC Age Interval and the Time parameters use the menu interface or the CLI Configure System Parameters in the Web Browser Interface 1 Click on the Configuration tab 2 Click on System Info 3 Enter the data you want in the displayed fields 4 Implement your new data by clicking
205. e 13 12 the CDP neighbor pairs are as follows A 1 A 2 A 3 A B B C Note that C 13 28 Configuring for Network Management Applications CDP and E are not neighbors because the intervening CDP disabled switch D does not forward CDP packets i e is not transparent to CDP traffic For the same reason switch E does not have any CDP neighbors CDP Switch A CDP Running CDP Neighbor Table Port Data an EEMS Host 1 data Host 2 data Host 3 data Switch B data Port A1 CDP Workstation 1 CDP Switch B CDP Running CDP Neighbor Table Port Data ie Sees Beeta ete Switch A data Switch C data No CDP data for Switch D because it has dis abled CDP operation CDP Switch C CDP Running CDP Neighbor Table Port Data Busuded jae ai Seassa C3 Switch B data Non CDP Device X Host 1 CDP Running Such as a Non CDP Hub or Switch CDP Workstation 2 Host 2 Non CDP Device Y ae CDP Running Such as a Non CDP Hub or Switch CDP Workstation 3 Host 3 CDP Running Port D3 CDP Disabled Switch D CDP Switch E CDP Running CDP Neighbor Table i Empty No CDP 1 Neighbors Port D17 kau Port E1 A 1 2 and 3 are CDP neighbors A and B are CDP neighbors B and C are CDP neighbors Because D is CDP capable but ha
206. e CLI To Configure Ports on page 10 10 On the 2600 2600 PWR 4100g1 and 6108 switches covered by this guide you can configure up to six port trunk groups having up to four links each with additional standby links if you re using dynamic LACP On the 2800 switches covered by this guide you can configure up to 24 port trunk groups having up to 8 links each with additional standby links if you re using dynamic LACP You can configure trunk group types as follows Trunk Type Trunk Group Membership TrkX Static DynX Dynamic LACP Yes Yes Trunk Yes No FEC Yes No The following examples show how to create different types of trunk groups 12 15 Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration Caution Configuring a Static Trunk Static FEC or Static LACP Trunk Group For 2600 2600 PWR 4100g1 and 6108 switches Syntax trunk lt port list gt lt trk1 trk2 trk3 trk4 trk5 trk6 gt lt trunk fec lacp gt For 2800 switches Syntax trunk lt port list gt lt trk1 trk24 gt lt trunk fec lacp gt This example uses ports C4 C6 to create a non protocol static trunk group with the group name of Trk2 HPswitch config trunk c4 c6 trk2 trunk Removing Ports from a Static Trunk Group This command removes one or more ports from an existing Trkx trunk group Removing aport from atrunk can result in aloop and cause a broadcast storm When you remove a port from a trunk where STP is
207. e Crash Data content to a PC or UNIX workstation on the network You can copy individual slot information or the master switch information If you do not specify either the command defaults to the master data Syntax copy crash data lt s ot id master gt xmodem copy crash data lt s ot id master gt tftp lt jp address gt lt filename gt where _ slot id a h and retrieves the crash log or crash data from the processor on the module in the specified slot master Retrieves crash log or crash data from the switch s chassis processor For example to copy the switch s crash data to a file in a PC At this point press HPswitch config copy crash data xmodem pe Enter and startthe Press Enter and start XMODEM on your host Xmodem command sequence in your Transfer complete terminal emulator Figure A 10 Example of Copying Switch Crash Data Content to a PC A 22 File Transfers Copying Diagnostic Data to a Remote Host PC or Unix Workstation Copying Crash Log Data Content to a Destination Device This command uses TFTP or Xmodem to copy the Crash Log content to a PC or UNIX workstation on the network You can copy individual slot information or the master switch information If you do not specify either the command defaults to the master data Syntax copy crash log lt s ot id master gt tftp lt ip address gt lt filepath and filename gt copy crash log lt s ot
208. e Serial Link Web and Telnet Interface Access Console Serial Link Web and Telnet Interface Access Features Feature Default Menu CLI Web disabled Inbound Telnet Access Enabled page 7 4 page 7 5 Outbound Telnet Access n a page 7 6 E Web Browser Interface Access Enabled page 7 4 page 7 6 Terminal type VT 100 page 7 6 Event Log event types to list All page 7 6 Displayed Events Baud Rate Speed Sense page 7 6 Flow Control XON XOFF page 7 6 In most cases the default configuration is acceptable for standard operation Note Basic switch security is through passwords You can gain additional security by using the security features described in the Access Security Guide for your switch You can also simply block unauthorized access via the web browser interface or Telnet as described in this section and install the switch in a locked environment Interface Access and System Information Interface Access Console Serial Link Web and Telnet Menu Modifying the Interface Access The menu interface enables you to modify these parameters m Inactivity Time out m Inbound Telnet Enabled m Web Agent Enabled To Access the Interface Access Parameters 1 From the Main Menu Select 2 Switch Configuration 1 System Information 222222222sss CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Switch Configuration System Information System Name HP2512 Sys
209. e context specific commands faster with shorter command strings The configuration options include interface port or trunk group and VLAN context modes Port or Trunk Group Context Includes port or trunk specific commands that apply only to the selected port s or trunk group plus the global configuration Manager and Operator commands The prompt for this mode includes the identity of the selected port s HPswitch config interface e c3 c6 Command executed at configuration level for HPswitch config interface e trk1 entering port or trk1 static trunk group context Pswitch eth C5 C8 Resulting prompt showing Pswitch eth Trkl1l port or static trunk contexts T T 4 13 Using the Command Line Interface CLI Using the CLI HPswitch eth C5 C8 Lists the commands you can use in the port or static HP switch eth C5 C8 trunk context plus the Manager Operator and context commands you can execute at this level In the port context the first block of commands in the listing show the context specific commands that will affect only ports C3 C6 HPswitch eth C3 C6 flow control Enable disable flow control on the port speed duplex Define mode of operation for the port broadcast limit Set a broadcast traffic percentage limit unknown vlans Define what the port will do when it encounters GYRP packet requesting it to join a VLAN enable Enable port disable Disa
210. e displays the command options for configuring the switch s console settings terminal Set type of terminal being used default is vt100 screen refresh Set default number of seconds before screen is refreshed on the repeat command events Set level of the events displayed in the device s Events Log haud rate Set the data transmission speed for the device connect sessions initiated through the Console port flow control Set the Flow Control Method default is xon xoff inactivity timer Set the number of minutes of no activity detected on the Console port before the switch terminates a communication session Figure 4 5 Example of How To List the Options for a Specific Command Displaying CLI Help CLI Help provides two types of context sensitive information Command list with a brief summary of each command s purpose m Detailed information on how to use individual commands Displaying Command List Help You can display a listing of command Help summaries for all commands available at the current privilege level That is when you are at the Operator level you can display the Help summaries only for Operator Level commands At the Manager level you can display the Help summaries for both the Operator and Manager levels and so on Syntax help For example to list the Operator Level commands with their purposes 4 11 Using the Command Line Interface CLI Using the CLI HPswitch gt help enable Enter Manager E
211. e ee eee 08 05 01 10 52 32 ports port A1 enabled Figure C 7 Anatomy of an Event Log Message Severity is one of the following codes information indicates routine events W warning indicates that a service has behaved unexpectedly C critical indicates that a severe switch error has occurred D debug reserved for HP internal diagnostic information Date is the date in mm dd yy format that the entry was placed in the log Time is the time in hh mm ss format that the entry was placed in the log System Module is the internal module such as ports for port manager that generated the log entry If VLANs are configured then a VLAN name also appears for an event that is specific to an individual VLAN Table C 1 on page C 24 lists the individual modules Event Message is a brief description of the operating event The event log holds up to 1000 lines in chronological order from the oldest to the newest Each line consists of one complete event message Once the log has received 1000 entries it discards the current oldest line each time a new line is received The event log window contains 14 log entry lines and can be positioned to any location in the log The event log will be erased if power to the switch is interrupted C 23 Troubleshooting Using Logging To Identify Problem Sources The event log is not erased by using the Reboot Switch command in the Main Menu Table C 1 Event Log System Modules
212. e eee eee eee 1 7 Need Only a Quick Start 2 0 0 0 00 1 8 TPL ACdreSSin 8 ies teases ec tack ee alk igs a Eee eo he Edie 1 8 To Set Up and Install the Switch in Your Network 1 8 Selecting a Management Interface Contents ences ate Wt ei bois Ban Oe ees 2 1 OVEPVIEW ecuis cents oacia dente obese cheed phatase as AS 2 2 Understanding Management Interfaces 0002s eee eee 2 2 Advantages of Using the Menu Interface 00 0 cece eee 2 3 Advantages of Using the CLI 2 0 0 0 cece eee 2 4 Advantages of Using the HP Web Browser Interface 2 5 Advantages of Using HP ProCurve Manager or HP ProCurve Manager Plus 0 c cece eee eee nee 2 6 iii iv 3 Using the Menu Interface CONCEDES seth sciees fates a S00 T aa EA a Gude E NE cea I ots atte wis Bing 3 1 OVERVIEW oaoaraa SS Oa ig Po ae seein od E E oe eA 3 2 Starting and Ending a Menu Session 0 2 cece eee ences 3 3 How To Start a Menu Interface Session 2 000 3 4 How To End a Menu Session and Exit from the Console 3 5 Main Menu Features cecce seren erue te n e cee ene aea 3 7 Screen Structure and Navigation 00 00 cece cece ee ee eee 3 9 Rebooting the Switch 0 ccc cece nee eee 3 12 Menu Features List ceecee ceiien e a i a a a 3 14 Where To Go From Here sss csccersicersicicsicr sd eee cetudi 3 15 4 Using the Command Line Interface
213. e eee eens 5 15 The Overview Window 002 eee e eee eee e eee eens 5 15 The Port Utilization and Status Displays 5 16 Port Utilization eeek a een Saeed he eee He EE eee 5 16 POrtSUabUs 4 betcha den ee hee ee ete hols oneness T e 5 18 The Alert Log uran ce eg gcaev econ startin ari gh aoe Eide Gotan gs ee 5 19 Sorting the Alert Log Entries 0 002 000 eee 5 19 Alert Types and Detailed Views 0 0 0 eee eee 5 20 The Status Bar a0 v 05 cSt ah See dee Rete age heheh Wie koe 5 22 Setting Fault Detection Policy 0 cece eee eee 5 23 5 1 Using the HP Web Browser Interface Overview Note Overview The HP web browser interface built into the switch lets you easily access the switch from a browser based PC on your network This lets you do the following Optimize your network uptime by using the Alert Log and other diagnostic tools Make configuration changes to the switch Maintain security by configuring usernames and passwords This chapter covers the following General features page 5 3 Starting a web browser interface session page 5 4 Tasks for your first web browser interface session page 5 7 e Creating usernames and passwords in the web browser interface page 5 8 e Selecting the fault detection configuration for the Alert Log operation page 5 23 e Getting access to online help for the web browser interface page 5
214. e in TFTP Server with Dedicated IP Addressing Instead of DHCP Bootp To summarize the IP Preserve effect on IP addressing m Ifthe switch received its most recent VLAN 1 IP addressing from a DHCP Bootp server it ignores the IP Preserve command when it downloads the configuration file and implements whatever IP addressing instructions are in the configuration file m Ifthe switch did not receive its most recent VLAN 1 IP addressing from a DHCP Bootp server it retains its current IP addressing when it downloads the configuration file m The content of the downloaded configuration file determines the IP addresses and subnet masks for other VLANs 8 19 Configuring IP Addressing IP Preserve Retaining VLAN 1 IP Addressing Across Configuration File Downloads This page is intentionally unused 8 20 Time Protocols Contents Overview aecaieaii a eddies oan wen dd a eae 9 2 TimeP Time Synchronization 0 0 c cece eee eee eee 9 2 SNTP Time Synchronization 0 00 cece eee eee eee 9 2 Overview Selecting a Time Synchronization Protocol or Turning Off Time Protocol Operation isl atara a stra bana Sa Ryne amp OAT aw EP Ae ia 9 3 General Steps for Running a Time Protocol on the Switch 9 3 Disabling Time Synchronization 00 cece eee eee 9 4 SNTP Viewing Selecting and Configuring 2 4 9 4 Menu Viewing and Configuring SNTP 02 0
215. e of request to which either a DHCP or Bootp server can respond 2 Whena DHCP or Bootp server receives the request it replies with a previously configured IP address and subnet mask for the switch The switch also receives an IP Gateway address if the server has been config ured to provide one In the case of Bootp the server must first be configured with an entry that has the MAC address of the switch To determine the switch s MAC address see Appendix D MAC Address Management The switch properly handles replies from either type of server If multiple replies are returned the switch tries to use the first reply If you manually configure a gateway on the switch it will ignore any gateway address received via DHCP or Bootp If the switch is initially configured for DHCP Bootp operation the default or if it is rebooted with this configuration it immediately begins sending request packets on the network If the switch does not receive a reply to its DHCP Bootp requests it continues to periodically send request packets but with decreasing frequency Thus if a DHCP or Bootp server is not available or accessible to the switch when DHCP Bootp is first configured the switch may not immediately receive the desired configuration After verifying that the server has become accessible to the switch reboot the switch to re start the process immediately DHCP Operation Depending on how the DHCP server is configured the switch may
216. e same IP addressing as the preceding example but specifies the subnet mask by mask length HPswitch config vlan 1 ip address 10 28 227 103 24 8 8 Configuring IP Addressing IP Configuration Configure Multiple IP Addresses on a VLAN Multinetting You can configure one primary IP address per VLAN and up to seven secondary IP addresses for the same VLAN That is the switch enables you to assign up to eight networks to a VLAN m Each IP address on a VLAN must be for a separate subnet m The switch assigns the first IP address manually configured on a VLAN as the primary IP address The switch then assigns any subsequent IP addresses for other subnets manually configured on the VLAN as sec ondary addresses m Ifthe primary IP address on a VLAN is configured for DHCP Bootp the switch does not accept secondary IP addresses on that VLAN DHCP operates only to provide primary IP addressing and is not used for providing secondary IP addressing m The switch allows up to 512 secondary subnet address assignments to VLANs Syntax no vlan lt vlan id gt ip address lt ip address mask length gt no vlan lt vian id gt ip address lt ip address gt lt mask bits gt For example if you wanted to multinet VLAN_20 VID 20 with its primary IP address and two secondary IP addresses shown below you would perform steps similar to the following For this example assume that the primary IP addressing is already c
217. eP Mode DHCP Poll Interval min 720 Figure 9 10 Example of TimeP Configuration When TimeP Is the Selected Time Synchronization Method If SNTP is the selected time synchronization method show timep still lists the TimeP configuration even though it is not currently in use HPswitch config show timep Eventhough in this example SNTP is the Tamep Contiguration currenttime synchronization method the Time Syne Mode Sntp switch maintains the TimeP 20 configuration TimeP Mode DHCP Poll Interval min 7 Figure 9 11 Example of SNTP Configuration When SNTP Is Not the Selected Time Synchronization Method 9 17 Time Protocols TimeP Viewing Selecting and Configuring Configuring Enabling or Disabling the TimeP Mode Enabling the TimeP mode means to configure it for either broadcast or unicast mode Remember that to run TimeP as the switch s time synchronization protocol you must also select TimeP as the time synchronization method by using the CLI timesync command or the Menu interface Time Sync Method parameter Syntax timesync timep Selects TimeP as the time protocol ip timep lt dhcp manual gt Enables the selected TimeP mode no ip timep Disables the TimeP mode no timesync Disables the time protocol Enabling TimeP in DHCP Mode Because the switch provides a TimeP polling interval default 720 minutes you need only these two commands for a minimal TimeP DHCP configuration
218. ed community name Otherwise adding anew community name with an IP address already in use with another community name simply creates two allowable community name entries for the same management station If you do not specify the event level lt none all non info critical debug gt then the switch does not send event log messages as traps Well Known traps and threshold traps if configured will still be sent Using the CLI To Enable Authentication Traps For this feature to operate one or more trap receivers must be configured on the switch See Configuring Trap Receivers on page 13 22 Using the CLI To Enable Authentication Traps Syntax no snmp server enable traps authentication Enables or disables sending an authentication trap to the configured trap receiver s if an unauthorized management station attempts to access the switch For example HPswitch config snmp server enable traps authentication Check the Event Log in the console interface to help determine why the authentication trap was sent Refer to Using Logging To Identify Problem Sources on page C 23 13 23 Configuring for Network Management Applications Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch Advanced Management RMON The switches covered in this guide support RMON Remote Monitoring on all connected network segments This allows for troubleshooting and optimiz ing your network The following RMON groups are supported
219. eee tn ee ees C 8 Prioritization Problems 00 0 e cece ee eee eens C 9 CDP Problem s kerseenn ed keran eee eta tagdes e aaa C 9 IGMP Related Problems 000 eee eee e eens C 10 LACP Related Problems 0 00 eee eee eee eee C 11 Port Based Access Control 802 1X Related Problems C 11 Radius Related Problems 00 0 cece cece eens C 14 Spanning Tree Protocol STP and Fast Uplink Problems C 15 SSH Related Problems 0 cece ri sri nenii eee C 16 Stacking Related Problems 2 0 c eee eee eee C 17 TACACS Related Problems 00 cee cece eee eens C 18 TimeP SNTP or Gateway Problems 005 C 20 VLAN Related Problems 0 0 00 c cece eee eee eee C 20 Using Logging To Identify Problem Sources 2 0 5 C 23 Event Log Operation 00 c eee eee C 23 Menu Entering and Navigating in the Event Log C 25 Cals sess eae EEE Lapa he Se Re Bo ee Ate E aot C 26 Debug and Syslog Operation 00 cece eee eee ee C 27 Diagnostic TOOIS 2 46 0 ieget seat eas bebe eee ota ye eka eet C 34 Port Auto Negotiation 0 0 ccc eee eee eens C 34 Ping and Link Tests 0 e eee eens C 35 Web Executing Ping or Link Tests C 36 CLI Ping or Link Tests 0 0 0 c eee eee eee C 37 C 1 Troubleshooting Contents Displayi
220. een the switch and the other CDP device and STP is running on the switch then STP will block the redundant link s In this case the switch port on the remaining open link may not be a member of an untagged VLAN or any untagged VLANs to which the port belongs may not have an IP address m The adjacent device s CDP Neighbors table may be full Refer to the documentation provided for the adjacent CDP device to determine the table s capacity and then view the device s Neighbors table to determine whether it is full One or more CDP neighbors appear intermittently or not at all in the switch s CDP Neighbors table This may be caused by more than 60 neigh boring devices sending CDP packets to the switch Exceeding the 60 neighbor limit can occur for example where multiple neighbors are connected to the switch through non CDP devices such as many hubs The Same CDP Switch or Router Appears on More Than One Port in the CDP Neighbors Table Where CDP is running a switch or router that is the STP root transmits outbound CDP packets over all links including redun dant links that STP may be blocking in non root devices In this case the non root device shows an entry in its CDP Neighbors table for every port on which it receives a CDP packet from the root device See Effect of Spanning Tree STP On CDP Packet Transmission on page 13 36 IGMP Related Problems IP Multicast IGMP Traffic That Is Directed By IGMP Does Not Reach I
221. election and lt Enter gt to execute action Figure 3 5 Example Showing How To Display Help 300 Yes To get Help on the actions or data fields in each screen Use the arrow keys e 5 4 or 4 to select an action or data field The help line under the Actions items describes the currently selected action or data field For guidance on how to navigate in a screen See the instructions provided at the bottom of the screen or refer to Screen Structure and Navigation on page 3 9 3 11 Using the Menu Interface Rebooting the Switch Reboot Switch option Rebooting the Switch Rebooting the switch from the menu interface m Terminates all current sessions and performs a reset of the operating system Activates any menu interface configuration changes that require a reboot m Resets statistical counters to zero Note that statistical counters can be reset to zero without rebooting the switch To Reboot the switch use the Reboot Switch option in the Main Menu Note that the Reboot Switch option is not available if you log on in Operator mode that is if you enter an Operator password instead of a manager password at the password prompt Sessesessesssessesseseee s CONSOLE MANAGER NODE 2 2 222sesseesseeeeeeeeeee e Main Menu Status and Counters Switch Configuration Console Passwords Event Log Command Line CLI Reboot Switch Download 05 Run Setup Stacking
222. ement Guide Use the Advanced Traffic Man agement Guide for information on m VLANs Static port based and protocol VLANs and dynamic GVRP VLANs Multicast traffic control IGMP Spanning Tree 802 1D STP 802 1w RSTP and 802 1s MSTP Quality of Service QoS IP routing Access Security Guide Use the Access Security Guide to learn how to use and configure the following access security features available in the switch m Username and Password Security m Port Based Access Control TACACS Authentication 802 1 m Web Based and MAC based m RADIUS Authentication and i authentication Accounting m Port Security Using Authorized m Secure Shell SSH Encryption MAC Addresses m Secure Socket Layer SSL Authorized IP Managers HP provides a PDF version of this guide on the Product Documentation CD ROM shipped with the switch You can also download a copy from the HP ProCurve website See Getting Documentation From the Web on page 1 6 Release Notes Release notes are posted on the HP ProCurve web site and provide information on new software updates New features and how to configure and use them m Software management including downloading software to the switch m Software fixes addressed in current and previous releases To view and download a copy of the latest release notes for your switch see Getting Documentation From the Web on page 1 6 1 5 Getting Started Getting Documentation From the Web
223. ements 12 3 logical port 12 9 media requirements 12 8 media type 12 3 menu access to static trunk 12 10 monitor port restrictions 12 9 nonconsecutive ports 12 2 number of trunks 12 5 port groups for Series 2800 12 3 12 4 12 8 port groups for Series 4100 10 100 1000 Module 12 9 port security restriction 12 9 removing port from static trunk 12 16 requirements 12 8 SA DA 12 26 See also LACP Series 2800 boundary 12 3 12 4 12 8 Series 4100 10 100 1000 Module boundary 12 9 spanning tree protocol 12 9 static trunk 12 8 static trunk overview 12 5 STP 12 9 STP operation 12 8 traffic distribution 12 8 Trkl 12 8 trunk non protocol option 12 7 trunk option described 12 25 types 12 7 VLAN 12 9 VLAN operation 12 8 web browser access 12 18 with CDP 13 40 port trunk group interface access 10 1 12 1 port based access control event log C 11 LACP not allowed 12 23 troubleshooting C 11 port based priority 802 1q VLAN tagging 10 29 configuring 10 32 messages 10 33 6 Index outbound port queues 10 30 overview 10 29 priority queue table 10 30 requirement for continuity 10 31 rules of operation 10 31 troubleshooting 10 33 viewing configuration 10 32 power interruption effect on event log C 23 Procurve HP URL 13 4 prompt gt C 44 public SNMP c
224. en Use arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Navigation instructions Figure 3 4 Elements of the Screen Structure Forms Design The configuration screens in particular operate similarly to a number of PC applications that use forms for data entry When you first enter these screens you see the current configuration for the item you have selected To change the configuration the basic operation is to 1 Press E to select the Edit action 2 Navigate through the screen making all the necessary configuration changes See table 3 1 on page 3 10 3 Press Enter to return to the Actions line From there you can save the configuration changes or cancel the changes Cancel returns the configu ration to the values you saw when you first entered the screen 3 9 Using the Menu Interface Screen Structure and Navigation Table 3 1 How To Navigate in the Menu Interface Task Actions Execute an action from the Actions gt list at the bottom of the screen Use either of the following methods Use the arrow keys lt or gt to highlight the action you want to execute then press Enter Press the key corresponding to the capital letter in the action name For example in a configuration menu press E to select Edit and begin editing parameter values Reconfigure edit a parameter setting or a field Select a configuration item
225. en 65 01 02 11 45 23 system System Booted 65 61 02 11 45 24 console connection e 65 01 62 11 45 26 mgr SME CONSOLE S led Range of Log Events Displayed ablished ion MANAGER Mode established Log events stored in memory 171 276 Log events on screen 258 276 Actions gt Next page Prev page End Help Return to previous screen Use up down arrow scroll log one line left right arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Figure C 8 Example of an Event Log Display The log status line at the bottom of the display identifies where in the sequence of event messages the display is currently positioned To display various portions of the Event Log either preceding or following the currently visible portion use either the actions listed at the bottom of the display Next page Prev page or End or the keys described in the following table Table C 2 Event Log Control Keys Key Action N Advance the display by one page next page P Roll back the display by one page previous page Advance display by one event down one line Roll back display by one event up one line E Advance to the end of the log H Display Help for the event log C 25 Troubleshooting Using Logging To Identify Problem Sources CLI Using the CLI you can list m Events recorded since the last boot of the switch m All events recorded Event entries co
226. en Configured for DHCP Bootp Operation But Has Not Received a DHCP or Bootp Reply When the switch is first config ured for DHCP Bootp operation or if it is rebooted with this configuration it immediately begins sending request packets on the network If the switch does not receive a reply to its DHCP Bootp requests it continues to periodically send request packets but with decreasing frequency Thus ifa DHCP or Bootp server is not available or accessible to the switch when DHCP Bootp is first configured the switch may not immediately receive the desired configuration After verifying that the server has become accessible to the switch reboot the switch to re start the process Prioritization Problems Ports configured for non default prioritization level 1 7 are not performing the specified action Ifthe ports were placed in a trunk group after being configured for non default prioritization the priority setting was automatically reset to zero the default Ports in a trunk group operate only at the default priority setting CDP Problems The switch does not appear in the CDP Neighbors table of an adjacent CDP Device This may be due to any of the following Either the port connecting the switch to the adjacent device is not a member of an untagged VLAN or any Untagged VLAN to which the port belongs does not have an IP address C 9 Troubleshooting Unusual Network Activity m Ifthere is more than one physical path betw
227. er Interface Successes indicates the number of Ping or Link packets that successfully completed the most recent test Failures indicates the number of Ping or Link packets that were unsuccessful in the last test Failures indicate connectivity or network performance prob lems such as overloaded links or devices Destination IP MAC Address is the network address of the target or destination device to which you want to test a connection with the switch An IP address is in the X X X X format where X is a decimal number between 0 and 255 A MAC address is made up of 12 hexadecimal digits for example 0060b0 080400 Number of Packets to Send is the number of times you want the switch to attempt to test a connection C 36 Troubleshooting Diagnostic Tools Timeout in Seconds is the number of seconds to allow per attempt to test a connection before determining that the current attempt has failed To halt a Link or Ping test before it concludes click on the Stop button To reset the screen to its default settings click on the Defaults button CLI Ping or Link Tests Ping Tests You can issue single or multiple ping tests with varying repeti tions and timeout periods The defaults and ranges are m Repetitions 1 1 999 m Timeout 5 seconds 1 256 seconds Syntax ping lt ip address gt repetitions lt 1 999 gt timeout lt 1 256 gt Basic Ping HPswitch gt ping 28 227 103 Operation 10 28 227 103
228. er the path and file name under which you want to store the show tech output Capture Text HEI Folder C Temp File E Mtemp show tent tx Browse Figure C 18 Example of a Path and Filename for Creating a Text File from show tech Output 3 Click Start to create and open the text file 4 Execute show tech HPswitch show tech a Each time the resulting listing halts and displays MORE press the Space bar to resume the listing b When the CLI prompt appears the show tech listing is complete At this point click on Transfer Capture Text Stop in HyperTerminal to stop copying data into the text file created in the preceding steps Remember to do the above step to stop HyperTerminal from copying into the text file Otherwise the text file remains open to receiving additional data from the HyperTerminal screen 5 To access the file open it in Microsoft Word Notepad or a similar text editor C 41 Troubleshooting Diagnostic Tools Note CLI Administrative and Troubleshooting Commands These commands provide information or perform actions that you may find helpful in troubleshooting operating problems with the switch For more on the CLI refer to Using the Command Line Interface CLI on page 4 1 Syntax switch show version Shows the software version currently running on the and the flash image from which the switch booted primary or secondary show boot history Di
229. es 18 120 43 125 l l Facility user Ae Default Logging Facility Enabled debug types l event 7 XN Figure C 10 Example of Configuring and Enabling Syslog Logging 2 To use a non default logging facility such as lpr in the same operation as in figure C 10 you would use this command set HPswitch config logging 18 120 38 155 HPswitch config logging 18 120 43 125 HPswitch config logging facility lpr C 30 Troubleshooting Using Logging To Identify Problem Sources Enabling or Disabling Logging to Management Sessions and SyslogD Servers Use this command when you want to do any of the following m Disable Syslog logging on all currently configured SyslogD servers with out removing the servers from the switch configuration m Re enable Syslog logging if it is disabled and there is at least one SyslogD server currently configured in the switch m Enable or disable logging output to the current management access ses sion Syntax no debug destination lt logging session gt logging The no form of the command disables Syslog logging but retains the currently configured SyslogD server addresses in the switch configuration When Syslog log ging is currently disabled with one or more SyslogD servers configured this command enables Syslog log ging on the switch The show config command output includes the SyslogD server IP addresses currently con figured in the
230. es a First Time Install event entry double click on this event then in the resulting display click on the secure access to the device link Select the Security tab 2 Click in the appropriate box in the Device Passwords window and enter user names and passwords You will be required to repeat the password strings in the confirmation boxes Both the user names and passwords can be up to 16 printable ASCII characters 3 Click on Apply Changes to activate the user names and passwords 5 9 Using the HP Web Browser Interface Tasks for Your First HP Web Browser Interface Session Note Passwords you assign in the web browser interface will overwrite previous passwords assigned in either the web browser interface the Command Prompt or the switch console That is the most recently assigned passwords are the switch s passwords regardless of which interface was used to assign the string Using the Passwords Enter Network Password x E Please type your user name and password Resource HPJ48654 User name I Password Cancel Figure 5 4 Example of the Password Window in the Web Browser Interface The manager and operator passwords are used to control access to all switch interfaces Once set you will be prompted to supply the password every time you try to access the switch through any of its interfaces The password you enter determines the capability you have during that session m Entering
231. es the switch can send to configured debug destinations Syntax no debug lt debug type gt all Configures the switch to send all debug types to the config ured debug destination s Default Disabled event Configures the switch to send Event Log messages to the configured debug destination s Note This has no effect on event notification messages the switch routinely sends to the Event Log itself Also this debug type is automatically enabled in these cases e If there is currently no Syslog server address configured and you use logging lt ip addr gt to configure an address e If there is currently at least one Syslog server address configured and the switch is rebooted or reset Default Disabled port access auth If 802 1 authentication is configured this option shows the varous communication messages sent between the switch client and RADIUS server Default Disabled C 28 Troubleshooting Using Logging To Identify Problem Sources Configuring the Switch To Send Debug Messages to One or More SyslogD Servers Use the logging command to configure the switch to send Syslog messages to a SyslogD server or to remove a SyslogD server from the switch configuration Syntax no logging lt syslog ip address facility lt facility name gt gt lt syslog ip address gt If there are no SyslogD servers configured logging enters a SyslogD server IP address and automatically enables Syslog logging
232. ess Subnet Mask DEFAULT_VLAN DHCP Bootp Figure 8 2 Example of the Switch s Default IP Addressing With multiple VLANs and some other features configured show ip provides additional information 8 7 Configuring IP Addressing IP Configuration HPswitch show ip Internet IP Service Default Gateway 10 268 227 1 Default TTL 64 IP Config IP Address Subnet Mask DEFAULT VLAN Manual 10 28 227 101 255 255 248 0 VLAN_2 Disabled Figure 8 3 Example of Show IP Listing with Non Default IP Addressing Configured Configure an IP Address and Subnet Mask The following command includes both the IP address and the subnet mask You must either include the ID of the VLAN for which you are configuring IP addressing or go to the context configuration level for that VLAN If you are not using VLANs on the switch that is if the only VLAN is the default VLAN then the VLAN ID is always 1 Note The default IP address setting for the DEFAULT_VLAN is DHCP Bootp On additional VLANs you create the default IP address setting is Disabled Syntax vlan lt vian id gt ip address lt ip address mask length gt vlan lt v an id gt ip address lt ip address gt lt mask bits gt vlan lt vlan id gt ip address dhcep bootp This example configures IP addressing on the default VLAN with the subnet mask specified in mask bits HPswitch config vlan 1 ip address 10 28 227 103 255 255 255 0 This example configures th
233. etwork m Configure these features e Manager and Operator pass e Anetwork monitoring port words e Stack Management e System parameters e Spanning Tree operation e IP addressing e SNMP community names e Time protocol e IP authorized managers e Ports e VLANs Virtual LANs and e Trunk groups GVRP View status counters and Event Log information m Update switch software m Reboot the switch For a detailed list of menu features see the Menu Features List on page 3 14 Privilege Levels and Password Security HP strongly recommends that you configure a Manager password to help prevent unauthorized access to yournetwork A Manager password grants full read write access to the switch An Operator password if configured grants access to status and counter Event Log and the Operator level in the CLI After you configure passwords on the switch and log off of the interface access to the menu interface and the CLI and web browser interface will require entry of either the Manager or Operator password If the switch has only a Manager password then someone without a password can still gain read only access 3 2 Note Note Using the Menu Interface Starting and Ending a Menu Session If the switch has neither a Manager nor an Operator password anyone having access to the console interface can operate the console with full manager privileges Also if you configure only an Operator password entering the Opera
234. evel passwords and to delete Manager and Operator password protection See the local password chapter in the Access Security Guide shipped with your switch Event Log Enables you to read progress and error messages that are useful for checking and troubleshooting switch operation See Using Logging To Identify Problem Sources on page C 23 3 7 Using the Menu Interface Main Menu Features Command Line CLI Selects the Command Line Interface at the same level Manager or Operator that you are accessing in the Menu interface See chapter 4 Using the Command Line Interface CLI Reboot Switch Performs a warm reboot of the switch which clears most temporary error conditions resets the network activity counters to zero and resets the system up time to zero A reboot is required to activate a change in the VLAN Support parameter See Rebooting from the Menu Interface on page 6 10 Download OS Enables you to download a new software version to the switch See Appendix A File Transfers Run Setup Displays the Switch Setup screen for quickly configuring basic switch parameters such as IP addressing default gateway logon default interface spanning tree and others See the Installation and Getting Started guide shipped with your switch Stacking Enables you to use a single IP address and standard network cabling to manage a group of up to 16 switches in the same subnet broadcast domain
235. evels on page 13 11 13 8 Configuring for Network Management Applications Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch no snmpv3 group group_name user user_name sec model lt ver1l ver2c ver3 gt Continued user user_name This is the user to be added to the access group This must match the user name added with the snmpv3 user command sec model lt ver ver2c ver3 gt This defines which security model to use for the added user A SNMPv3 access Group should only use the ver3 security model To establish a user you must first add the user names to the list of known users Add user names with the snmpv3 user CLI command Add user Network Admin with no er Authentication or Privacy HP Switch config snmpy3 user NetworkAdmin HP Switch config snmpvy3 user NetworkMgr auth mdS authpass priv privpass Add user Network Mgr with Va Authentication is set to Md5 Privacy is used and the authentication and privacy and the password is authpass password is set privpass HP Switch config show snmpv3 user Status and Counters SNMP v3 Global Configuration Information User Name Auth Protocol Privacy Protocol NetworkAdmin None None NetworkMNgr MDs des initial MDs des templateSHa SHA des Figure 13 2 Adding and showing Users for SNMPv3 13 9 Configuring for Network Management Applications Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch Then you must set the group access level to the user
236. evice that has CDP in its operating code with CDP either enabled or disabled in that device CDP Disabled A CDP aware device on which CDP is currently disabled Non CDP Device A device that does not have CDP in its operating code CDP Neighbor A CDP device that is either directly connected to another CDP device or connected to that device by anon CDP device such as some hubs 13 26 Configuring for Network Management Applications CDP General CDP Operation The switch stores information about adjacent CDP devices in a CDP Neigh bors table maintained in the switch s MIB Management Information Base This data is available to SNMP based applications designed to read CDP data from the MIB For example Switch A Switch C with CDP Running with CDP Running e The Neighbors table in switches A B and D Sate Masta Boies PS Se Si contain information on switch C only because CDP Neighbor Table CDP Neighbor Table 1 it is the only neighbor for these switches d i I Yak I Switch C data i one i rhe i e The Neighbors table in switch C contains i i wite ag a a 1 information on switches A B and D A ners tate Switch D data because all of these switches are neighbors of switch C Switch B Switch D Note A given switch s CDP Neighbor table with CDP Running with CDP Running includes data only on neighbor CDP devices but 1 CDP Neighbor Table 1 1 CDP Neighbor Table 1 Voron
237. f ethernet HP switch int 3 exit HP switch config xit HPswitch xit HPswitch gt HPswitch int 3 nd HPswitch HPswitch config end HPswitch Moving Between the CLI and the Menu Interface When moving between interfaces the switch retains the current privilege level Manager or Operator That is if you are at the Operator level in the menu and select the Command Line Interface CLI option from the Main Menu the CLI prompt appears at the Operator level Changing Parameter Settings Regardless of which interface is used CLI menu interface or web browser interface the most recently configured version of a parameter setting overrides any earlier settings for that parameter Using the Command Line Interface CLI Using the CLI For example if you use the menu interface to configure an IP address of X for VLAN 1 and later use the CLI to configure a different IP address of Y for VLAN 1 then Y replaces X as the IP address for VLAN 1 in the running config file If you subsequently execute write memory in the CLI then the switch also stores Y as the IP address for VLAN 1 in the startup config file For more on the startup config and running config files see Chapter 6 Switch Memory and Configuration Listing Commands and Command Options At any privilege level you can List all of the commands available at that level L
238. f switch configuration and performance features e IP addressing e Spanning Tree e VLANs and GVRP e System information e Port Security e Passwords e Port and Static Trunk Group SNMP communities e Stack Management e Time protocols The menu interface also provides access for e Setup screen e Switch and port statistic and counter e Event Log display displays e Switch and port e Reboots status displays e Software downloads Selecting a Management Interface Advantages of Using the CLI Offers out of band access through the RS 232 connection to the switch so network bottlenecks crashes lack of configured or correct IP address and network downtime do not slow or prevent access Enables Telnet in band access to the menu functionality Allows faster navigation avoiding delays that occur with slower display of graphical objects over a web browser interface Provides more security configuration information and passwords are not seen on the network Advantages of Using the CLI HPswitch gt Operator Level HP switch Manager Level HPswitch config Global Configuration Level HPswitch lt context gt Context Configuration Levels port VLAN Figure 2 2 Command Prompt Examples m Provides access to the complete set of the switch configuration perfor mance and diagnostic features m Offers out of band access through the RS 232 connection or Telnet in band access m Enables quick detailed system
239. f the port mode is not set to Auto or if Flow Control is disabled on the port then Flow Control is not used Group menu or Trunk Group CLI Menu Interface Specifies the static trunk group if any to which a port belongs CLI Appears in the show lacp command output to show the LACP trunk if any to which a port belongs Note An LACP trunk requires a full duplex link In most cases HP recommends that you leave the port Mode setting at Auto the default Refer to Trunk Group Operation Using LACP on page 12 18 For more on port trunking see Chapter 12 Port Trunking 10 5 Port Status and Basic Configuration Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters Status or Description Parameter Type This parameter appears in the CLI show trunk listing and for a port in a trunk group specifies the type of trunk group The default Type is passive LACP which can be displayed by using the CLI show lacp command For more on port trunking see Port Trunking on page Chapter 12 Port Trunking Broadcast Specifies the percentage of the theoretical maximum network bandwidth that can be used for broadcast Limit and multicast traffic Any broadcast or multicast traffic exceeding that limit will be dropped Zero 0 means the feature is disabled Series 2600 Switches Series 2600 PWR Switches Series 4100gI Switches and the Switch 6108 The broadcast limit command operates at the global c
240. f to an SNMP utility designed to query the CDP area of the device s MIB Note To take advantage of CDP in the switch you should have a working knowledge of SNMP operation and an SNMP utility capable of polling the switches for CDP data HP s implementation of CDP places specific data into the switch s Management Information Base MIB However retrieval of this data for network mapping is dependent on the operation of your SNMP utility Refer to the documentation provided with the utility 13 25 Configuring for Network Management Applications CDP An SNMP utility can progressively discover CDP devices in a network by 1 Reading a given device s CDP Neighbor table in the Management Infor mation Base or MIB to learn about other neighbor CDP devices Using the information learned in step 1 to go to and read the neighbor devices CDP Neighbors tables to learn about additional CDP devices and so on This section describes CDP operation in the switches covered in this guide For information on how to use an SNMP utility to retrieve the CDP information from the switch s CDP Neighbors table in the switch s MIB refer to the documentation provided with the particular SNMP utility For information on the object identifiers in the CDP MIB see CDP Neighbor Data and MIB Objects on page 13 38 CDP Terminology CDP Device A switch server router workstation or other device running CDP CDP Aware A d
241. fault configuration the switch operates as a multiport learning bridge with network connectivity provided by the ports on the switch However to enable specific management access and control through your network you will need IP addressing Table 8 1 on page 8 12 shows the switch features that depend on IP addressing to operate 8 2 Configuring IP Addressing IP Configuration IP Configuration IP Configuration Features Feature Default Menu CLI Web IP Address and Subnet Mask DHCP Bootp page8 5 page8 7 page8 11 Multiple IP Addresses on a VLAN n a page 8 9 Default Gateway Address none page 8 5 page 8 7 page 8 11 Packet Time To Live TTL 64 seconds page 8 5 page 8 7 n a Time Server Timep DHCP page 8 5 page 8 7 n a IP Address and Subnet Mask Configuring the switch with an IP address expands your ability to manage the switch and use its features By default the switch is configured to automatically receive IP addressing on the default VLAN from a DHCP Bootp server that has been configured correctly with information to support the switch Refer to DHCP Bootp Operation on page 8 12 for information on setting up automatic configuration from a server However ifyou are not using a DHCP Bootp server to configure IP addressing use the menu interface or the CLI to manually configure the initial IP values After you have network access to a device you can use the web browser interface to modify the initial IP configuratio
242. fer to table 10 3 on page 10 30 HPswitch config interface A9 A12 qos priority 1 Configures port based HPswitch config write men priority on ports A9 A12 to 1 Low and saves HPswitch config show config the configuration changes to the startup Startup configuration ees config file J48654 Configuration Editor Created on release 6 07 21 hostname HPswitch time daylight time rule None i Ports A9 A12 are now configured to interface AS yo ai assign a priority level of 1 Low to qos priority 1 untagged incoming traffic Any exit inbound tagged traffic retains its interface A190 priority level while transiting the qos priority 1 switch exit interface All l qos priority 1 exit interface 12 qos priority 1 snnp server community public Unrestricted vlan 1 name DEFAULT_ LAN MORE next page Space next line Enter quit Control C Figure 10 9 Example of Configuring Non Default Prioritization on Untagged Inbound Traffic Messages Related to Prioritization Message Meaning lt priority level gt Unable to create The port s on which you are trying to configure a qos priority may belong to a port trunk Trunked ports cannot be configured for gos priority Troubleshooting Prioritization Refer to Prioritization Problems on page C 9 in the Troubleshooting chap ter 10 33 Port Status and Basic Configuration Using Friendly Optional Port Names
243. fic refer to Operating Notes for Jumbo Traffic Handling on page 10 22 Configuring Jumbo Packet Operation Command Page show vlans 10 20 show vlans ports lt port list gt 10 21 show vlans lt vid gt 10 22 jumbo 10 22 Overview 1 Determine the VLAN membership of the ports or trunks through which you want the switch to accept inbound jumbo traffic For operation with GVRP enabled refer to the GVRP topic under Operating Rules above Ensure that the ports through which you want the switch to receive jumbo packets are operating at least at gigabit speed Check the Mode field in the output for the show interfaces brief lt port list gt command Use the jumbo command to enable jumbo packets on one or more VLANs statically configured in the switch All ports belonging to a jumbo enabled VLAN can receive jumbo packets Execute write memory to save your configuration changes to the startup config file 10 19 Port Status and Basic Configuration Jumbo Packets on the Series 2800 Switches Viewing the Current Jumbo Configuration Syntax show vians Lists the static VLANs configured on the switch and includes a Jumbo column to indicate which VLANs are configured to support inbound jumbo traffic All ports belonging to a jumbo enabled VLAN can receive jumbo traffic For more information refer to Operating Notes for Jumbo Traffic Handling on page 10 22 See figure 10 4 below HPswitch c
244. fic Management Guide Packet Time To Live TTL This parameter specifies how long in sec onds an outgoing packet should exist in the network In most cases the default setting 64 seconds is adequate Just Want a Quick Start with IP Addressing If you just want to give the switch an IP address so that it can communicate on your network or if you are not using VLANs HP recommends that you use the Switch Setup screen to quickly configure IP addressing To do so do one of the following m Enter setup at the CLI Manager level prompt HPswitch setup Select 8 Run Setup in the Main Menu of the menu interface For more on using the Switch Setup screen see the Installation and Getting Started Guide you received with the switch IP Addressing with Multiple VLANs In the factory default configuration the switch has one permanent default VLAN named DEFAULT_VLAN that includes all ports on the switch Thus when only the default VLAN exists in the switch if you assign an IP address and subnet mask to the switch you are actually assigning the IP addressing to the DEFAULT_VLAN If multiple VLANs are configured then each VLAN can have its own IP address This is because each VLAN operates as a separate broadcast domain and requires a unique IP address and subnet mask A default gateway IP address for the switch is optional but recommended m Inthe factory default configuration the default VLAN named DEFAULT_VLAN
245. fice Floor 2 Room 231 System Name System Contact System Location Address Age Interval min 5 5 Web Agent Enabled Yes Yes Inactivity Timeout min 0 0 Inbound Telnet Enabled Yes Yes Time Zone 0 8 Daylight Time Rule None Actions gt Cancel Edit Save Help Select Daylight Time Rule for your Use arrow keys to change field selection lt Space gt to toggle field choices and lt Enter gt to go to Actions Figure 6 4 Example of Pending Configuration Changes that Can Be Saved or Cancelled 6 9 Switch Memory and Configuration Using the Menu and Web Browser Interfaces To Implement Configuration Changes Note Reboot Switch option If you reconfigure a parameter in the CLI and then go to the menu interface without executing a write memory command those changes are stored only in the running configuration If you then execute a switch reboot command in the menu interface the switch discards the configuration changes made while using the CLI To ensure that changes made while using the CLI are saved execute write memory in the CLI before rebooting the switch Rebooting from the Menu Interface m Terminates the current session and performs a reset of the operating system Activates any configuration changes that require a reboot Resets statistical counters to zero Note that statistical counters can be reset to zero without rebooting the switch See Displaying Port Counters o
246. for Menu Subnet Mask 255 255 240 0 IP Config DHCP Bootp Manual Actions gt Cancel Edit Save information Use arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Figure 1 3 Getting Help in the Menu Interface m Ifyou need information on a specific command in the CLI type the command name followed by help For example HPswitch write help Usage write lt memory terminal gt Description View or save the running configuration of the switch write terminal displays the running configuration of the switch on the terminal write memory saves the running configuration of the Switch to flash The saved configuration becomes the boot up configuration of the switch the next time it is booted Figure 1 4 Getting Help in the CLI m If you need information on specific features in the HP Web Browser Interface hereafter referred to as the web browser interface use the online help available for the web browser interface For more information on web browser Help options refer to Online Help for the HP Web Browser Interface on page 5 1 If you need further information on Hewlett Packard switch tech nology visit the HP ProCurve website at http www hp com go hpprocurve 1 7 Getting Started Need Only a Quick Start Important Need Only a Quick Start IP Addressing If you just want to give the switch an IP address so that it can communicate on your network
247. for VLAN 1 is from a DHCP server IP Preserve is suspended In this case whatever IP addressing the config uration file specifies is implemented when the switch downloads the file and reboots If the file includes DHCP Bootp as the IP addressing source for VLAN 1 the switch will configure itself accordingly and use DHCP Bootp If instead the file includes a dedicated IP address and subnet mask for VLAN 1 and a specific gateway IP address then the switch will implement these settings in the startup config file m The ip preserve statement does not appear in show config listings To verify IP Preserve in a configuration file open the file in a text editor and view the last line For an example of implementing IP Preserve in a configura tion file see figure 8 6 below To set up IP Preserve enter the ip preserve statement at the end of a configu ration file Note that you do not execute IP Preserve by entering a command from the CLI 8 16 Configuring IP Addressing IP Preserve Retaining VLAN 1 IP Addressing Across Configuration File Downloads J48652 Configuration Editor Created on release 46 07 5 hostname HPswitch time daylight time rule None cdp run password manager Entering ip preserve in the last line of a configuration password operator file implements IP Preserve when the file is ip preserve downloaded to the switch and the switch reboots Figure 8 6 Example of Implementing IP Preserve in a Switch Configu
248. g Individual VLAN Status HPswitch gt show vlan 1 Status and Counters VLAN Information Ports VLAN 1 602 10 VLAN ID 1 Name DEFAULT VLAN Status Static Port Information Mode Unknown VLAN Status Untagged Learn Tagged Learn Untagged Learn Untagged Learn Untagged Learn Figure B 17 Example of Port Listing for an Individual VLAN B 22 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Status and Counters Data Web Browser Interface Status Information The home screen for the web browser interface is the Status Overview screen as shown below As the title implies it provides an overview of the status of the switch including summary graphs indicating the network utili zation on each of the switch ports symbolic port status indicators and the Alert Log which informs you of any problems that may have occurred on the switch For more information on this screen see chapter 5 Using the HP Web Browser Interface HPswitch Status Information a mae Sa ee Te LS eh A Men a S Identity Status Configuration Security Diagnostics Support Port Utilization Legend Graphs Le EE Unicast Rx or All Tx E Non Unicast Pkts Rx Port Status sl pi ia Indicators ort Connecte Port Not Connected 9009099 OOOO OO O roris Alert Log Description new First time installation 08 May 03 7 58 23 PM Important installation information for your switch Figure B 18 Example of a Web Browser Interface Status Over
249. g an SNMP network manage ment tool such as HP ProCurve Manager System Contact and Location This information is helpful for identifying the person administratively responsible for the switch and for identifying the locations of individual switches MAC Age Interval The number of seconds a MAC address the switch has learned remains in the switch s address table before being aged out deleted Aging out occurs when there has been no traffic from the device belonging to that MAC address for the configured interval Time Sync Method Selects the method TimeP or SNTP the switch will use for time synchronization For more on this topic refer to Chapter 9 Time Protocols Interface Access and System Information System Information Note Time Zone The number of minutes your time zone location is to the West or East of Coordinated Universal Time formerly GMT The default 0 means no time zone is configured For example Berlin Germany is in the 1 zone while Vancouver Canada is in the 8 zone Daylight Time Rule Specifies the daylight savings time rule to apply for your location The default is None For more on this topic see Appendix E Daylight Savings Time on HP ProCurve Switches Time Used in the CLI to specify the time of day the date and other system parameters Menu Viewing and Configuring System Information To access the system information parameters 1 From the Main Menu Select
250. g only an Operator password does not prevent access to the Manager level by intruders who have the Operator password Pressing the Clear button on the front of the switch removes password protection For this reason it is recommended that you protect the switch from physical access by unauthorized persons If you are concerned about switch security and operation you should install the switch in a secure location such as a locked wiring closet Privilege Level Operation Operator Privileges 1 Operator Level ee eee Manager Privileges 2 Manager Level N 3 Global Configuration 4 Context Configuration Leve Figure 4 2 Access Sequence for Privilege Levels Operator Privileges At the Operator level you can examine the current configuration and move between interfaces without being able to change the configuration A gt character delimits the Operator level prompt For example HPswitch gt _ Example of the Operator prompt When using enable to move to the Manager level the switch prompts you for the Manager password if one has already been configured 4 4 Using the Command Line Interface CLI Using the CLI Manager Privileges Manager privileges give you three additional levels of access Manager Global Configuration and Context Configuration See figure A character delimits any Manager prompt For example HPswitch _ Example of the Manager p
251. group In this case you might configure ports A5 through A8 with the name Draft Server Trunk HPswitch config int e A5 As name Draft Server Trunk HPswitch config write mem HPswitch config show name 5 8 Port Names Port A5 Type 10 100TX Name Draft Server Trunk Port A6 Type 10 100TX Name Draft Server Trunk Port A7 Type 10 100TX Name Draft Server Trunk Port A8 Type 10 100TX Name Draft Server Trunk Figure 10 11 Example of Configuring One Friendly Port Name on Multiple Ports 10 36 Port Status and Basic Configuration Using Friendly Optional Port Names Displaying Friendly Port Names with Other Port Data You can display friendly port name data in the following combinations m show name Displays a listing of port numbers with their corresponding friendly port names and also quickly shows you which ports do not have friendly name assignments show name data comes from the running config file m show interface lt port number gt Displays the friendly port name if any along with the traffic statistics for that port The friendly port name data comes from the running config file m show config Includes friendly port names in the per port data of the resulting configuration listing show config data comes from the startup config file To List All Ports or Selected Ports with Their Friendly Port Names This command lists names assigned to a specific port Synta
252. guration as the permanent configuration Rebooting the switch replaces the current running config file with a new running config file that is an exact copy of the current startup config file Any of the following actions reboots the switch e Executing the boot or the reload command in the CLI e Executing the Reboot command in the menu interface e Pressing the Reset button on the front of the switch e Removing then restoring power to the switch For more on reboots and the switch s dual flash images see Using Primary and Secondary Flash Image Options on page 6 12 Options for Saving a New Configuration Making one or more changes to the running config file creates a new operating configuration Saving anew configuration means to overwrite replace the current startup config file with the current running config file This means that if the switch subsequently reboots for any reason it will resume operation using the new configuration instead of the configuration previously defined in the startup config file There are three ways to save a new configuration In the CLI Use the write memory command This overwrites the current startup config file with the contents of the current running config file Inthe menu interface Use the Save command This overwrites both the running config file and the startup config file with the changes you have specified in the menu interface screen In the web browser interface Use the Apply
253. gure port Al with the name O Connor_10 25 101 48 the show interface output for this port appears similar to the following HPswitch config show interface Al Status and Counters Port Counters for port Al Name O Connor 1i0 25 101 43 lt Friendly Port Name Link Status 2 Up Bytes Rx 894 568 Bytes Tx Unicast Rx 1179 Unicast Tx Beast Mcast Rx 5280 Beast Mcast Tx FCS Rx 3 36 Drops Tx Alignment Rx Collisions Tx Runts Rx Late Colln Tx Giants Rx Excessive Colln Total Rx Errors Deferred Tx Figure 10 14 Example of a Friendly Port Name in a Per Port Statistics Listing 10 38 Port Status and Basic Configuration Using Friendly Optional Port Names For a given port if a friendly port name does not exist in the running config file the Name line in the above command output appears as Name not assigned To Search the Configuration for Ports with Friendly Port Names This option tells you which friendly port names have been saved to the startup config file show config does not include ports that have only default settings in the startup config file Syntax show config Includes friendly port names in a listing of all interfaces ports configured with non default settings Excludes ports that have neither a friendly port name nor any other non default configuration settings For example if you configure port Al with a friendly port name ERST sen ap E a T z a R This com
254. guring Port and Static Trunk Monitoring B 27 Web Configuring Port Monitoring 0208 B 29 B 2 Note Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Overview Overview The switch has several built in tools for monitoring analyzing and trouble shooting switch and network operation Status Includes options for displaying general switch information man agement address data port status port and trunk group statistics MAC addresses detected on each port or VLAN and STP IGMP and VLAN data page B Counters Display details of traffic volume on individual ports page B 10 Event Log Lists switch operating events Using Logging To Identify Problem Sources on page C 23 Alert Log Lists network occurrences detected by the switch in the Status Overview screen of the web browser interface page 5 6 Configurable trap receivers Uses SNMP to enable management sta tions on your network to receive SNMP traps from the switch SNMP Notification and Traps on page 13 18 Port monitoring mirroring Copy all traffic from the specified ports to a designated monitoring port page B 24 Link test and ping test analysis tools in troubleshooting situations are described in chapter 18 Troubleshooting See page C 35 B 3 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Status and Counters Data Note Status and Counters Data This section describes the status and c
255. h any currently configured IP addresses for SyslogD servers HPswitch Cconfig gt show config Startup configuration gt J4887A Configuration Editor Created on release G 07 2X hostname HPswitch ti daylight time rule N edn Sun 9 A Daan ciate RA The configured Syslog server IP module 1 type J4862A addresses appear in the switch s ip default gateway ee configuration file even if Syslog logging 18 120 38 155 Jogging 18 120 43 125 snmp server community public Unrestricted vlan 1 name DEFAULT_ULAN logging is disabled Figure C 12 Example of Show Config Output with SyslogD Servers Configured C 32 Syntax show debug Troubleshooting Using Logging To Identify Problem Sources List the current debug status for both Syslog logging and Session logging HPswitch lt config gt show debug Shows that Syslog logging is enabled Debug Logging Destination I Logging 18 120 38 155 Facility and sending event messages to the user facility on the SyslogD server at IP address 18 120 38 155 l Shows that session logging is operating through another session You can take Session Not Current One control of session logging by executing debug destination session in the session you are currently using Figure C 13 Example of Show Debug Status m Rebooting the Switch or pressing the Reset button resets the Debug Configuration Debug Opt
256. h LACP active or passive is configured the switch removes the LACP configuration displays a notice that LACP is disabled on the port s and enables 802 1X on that port HPswitch config aaa port access authenticator e bl LACP has been disabled on 802 1X port s The switch will not allow you to configure LACP on a port on which port access 802 1X is enabled For example int bl lacp passive Error configuring port lt port number gt LACP and 802 1X cannot be run To restore LACP to the port you must first remove the port s 802 1X configu ration and then re enable LACP active or passive on the port Port Security Configured on a Port To maintain security LACP is not allowed on ports configured for port security If you configure port security on a port on which LACP active or passive is configured the switch removes the LACP configuration displays a notice that LACP is disabled on the port s and enables port security on that port For example port security al7 learn mode static address limit 2 LACP has been disabled on secured port s HP switch config The switch will not allow you to configure LACP on a port on which port security is enabled For example int al7 lacp passive Error configuring port A17 LACP and port security cannot be run together To restore LACP to the port you must remove port security and re enable LACP active or passive Changing Trunki
257. hapter 5 Using the HP Web Browser Interface for operating information These tools are available through the web browser interface Port Utilization Graph Alert Log Port Status and Port Counters screens Diagnostic tools Link test Ping test configuration file browser Switch Console For help in isolating problems use the easy to access switch console built into the switch or Telnet to the switch console See chapter 2 Using the Menu Interface and chapter 3 Using the Command Line Interface CLD for console operation information These tools are available through the switch console Status and Counters screens Event Log Diagnostics tools Link test Ping test configuration file browser and advanced user commands HP ProCurve Manager ProCurve Manager Use HP ProCurve Manager to help isolate problems and recommend solutions C 4 Troubleshooting Chassis Over Temperature Detection Chassis Over Temperature Detection If a Switch 2800 Series device reaches an over temperature condition it generates a chassis module Warning message in the Event Log and in any optionally configured debug destinations console session and SyslogD serv ers If the switch later returns to its acceptable temperature range it signals this event with a chassis module Information message to the same destina tions These messages include the number of times the switch has detected the eve
258. he HP Web Browser Interface Starting an HP Web Browser Interface Session with the Switch HP switch Status Information a ns CS NE a Identity Status Configuration Security Diagnostics Support Legend E Unicast Rx or All Tx E Non Unicast Pkts Rx Mi Error Packets Rx Port Connected AS A4 as AS MO A11 AIZ AIS AIG Port Not Connected M a2 a5 AB OAT e 0 0 0 0 oo oo o GG 9 BPP ort Disabled Description sex First Time Installation 16 Jun 01 4 01 53 PM Important installation information for your switch i First Time Install Alert Refresh Open Event Acknowledge Selected Events Delete Selected Events Figure 5 1 Example of Status Overview Screen Note The above screen appears somewhat different if the switch is configured as a stack Commander For an example see figure 2 3 on page 2 5 5 6 Using the HP Web Browser Interface Tasks for Your First HP Web Browser Interface Session Tasks for Your First HP Web Browser Interface Session The first time you access the web browser interface there are three tasks that you should perform m Review the First Time Install window m Set Manager and Operator passwords m Set access to the web browser interface online help Viewing the First Time Install Window When you access the switch s web browser interface for the first time the Alert log contains a First Time Install alert as shown in figure 5 2 This gives you information ab
259. how management brief displays this output HPswitch PWUR config show power management brief Status and Counters Port Power Status Power Configured Detection Power Enable Priority Type ae Critical Telephone _ Delivering Critical Telephone i Delivering High Wireless i Delivering High Wireless i Delivering Low _ Searching Low Searching Low Searching Low Searching Ports 1 through 4 are _ delivering power The remaining ports are available to supply power but currently do not detect a connected PD O wwe 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 eee OOO Figure 2 Example of Show Management Brief Output 11 12 Power Over Ethernet PoE Operation for the Series 2600 PWR Switches Viewing PoE Configuration and Status Displaying the PoE Status on Specific Ports Syntax show power management el lt port list gt Displays the following PoE status and statistics since the last reboot for each port in lt port list gt Power Enable Shows Yes for ports enabled to support PoE the default and No for ports on which PoE is disabled Priority Lists the power priority Low High and Critical configured on ports enabled for PoE For more on this topic refer to the power command description under Configuring PoE Operation on page 11 9 Detection Status Searching The port is available to support a PD connection Delivering The port is delivering power to a PD Disabled PoE support is
260. hown for VLAN 300 you can either use source port filtering to block unwanted traffic paths or create separate jumbo VLANs one for ports 6 and 7 and another for ports 12 and 13 Outbound Jumbo Traffic Any port operating at 1 Gbps or higher can transmit outbound jumbo packets through any VLAN regardless of the jumbo configuration The VLAN is not required to be jumbo enabled and the port is not required to belong to any other jumbo enabled VLANS This can occur in situations where anon jumbo VLAN includes some ports that do not belong to another jumbo enabled VLAN and some ports that do belong to another jumbo enabled VLAN In this case ports capable of receiving jumbo packets can forward them to the ports in the VLAN that do not have jumbo capability 10 23 Port Status and Basic Configuration Jumbo Packets on the Series 2800 Switches i ae Va Jumbo Enabled VLAN Non Jumbo VLAN VLAN 10 VLAN 20 Port 3 belongs to both VLAN 10 and VLAN 20 Jumbo packets received inbound on port3 can be forwarded out the Non Jumbo ports 4 5 and 6 Figure 10 7 Forwarding Jumbo Packets Through Non Jumbo Ports Jumbo packets can also be forwarded out non jumbo ports when the jumbo packets received inbound on a jumbo enabled VLAN are routed to another non jumbo VLAN for outbound transmission on ports that have no memberships in other jumbo capable VLANs Where either of the above scenarios
261. ic Trunk Monitoring Features CLI Configuring Port and Static Trunk Monitoring Port and Static Trunk Monitoring Commands Used in This Section show monitor below mirror port page B 27 monitor page B 28 You must use the following configuration sequence to configure port and static trunk monitoring in the CLI 1 Assign a monitoring mirror port 2 Designate the port s and static trunk s to monitor Displaying the Monitoring Configuration This command lists the port assigned to receive monitored traffic and the ports and or trunks being monitored Syntax show monitor For example if you assign port A6 as the monitoring port and configure the switch to monitor ports Al A3 show monitor displays the following HPswitch config show monitor Network Monitoring Port Mirror Port A6 lt Portreceiving monitored traffic Monitoring sources Figure B 21 Example of Monitored Port Listing Configuring the Monitor Port This command assigns or removes a mon itoring port and must be executed from the global configuration level Remov ing the monitor port disables port monitoring and resets the monitoring parameters to their factory default settings Syntax no mirror port lt port num gt For example to assign port A6 as the monitoring port HPswitch config mirror port a6 B 27 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Port and Static Trunk Monitoring Features To turn off monit
262. ic over trunked links SA DA source address destination address causes the switch to distribute outbound traffic to the links within the trunk group on the basis of source destination address pairs That is the switch sends traffic from the same 12 26 Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration source address to the same destination address through the same trunked link and sends traffic from the same source address to a different destination address through a different link depending on the rotation of path assign ments among the links in the trunk Likewise the switch distributes traffic for the same destination address but from different source addresses through different links Because the amount of traffic coming from or going to various nodes in a network can vary widely it is possible for one link in a trunk group to be fully utilized while others in the same trunk have unused bandwidth capacity even though the address assignments are evenly distributed across the links in a trunk In actual networking environments this is rarely a problem However if it becomes a problem you can use the HP ProCurve Manager Plus network management software to quickly and easily identify the sources of heavy traffic top talkers and make adjustments to improve performance Broadcasts multicasts and floods from different source addresses are dis tributed evenly across the links As links are added or deleted the switch redistributes tr
263. ice While routing is enabled on the switch the IP default gateway is not used Thus to avoid loss of Telnet access to off subnet management stations you should use the ip route command to configure a static default route before enabling routing Refer to chapter 16 IP Routing Features for more information Configure Time To Live TTL Use this command at the Global config prompt to set the time that a packet outbound from the switch can exist on the network The default setting is 64 seconds Syntax ip tt lt number of seconds gt HPswitch config ip ttl 60 In the CLI you can execute this command only from the global configuration level The TTL range is 2 255 seconds Web Configuring IP Addressing You can use the web browser interface to access IP addressing only if the switch already has an IP address that is reachable through your network 1 Click on the Configuration tab 2 Click on IP Configuration 3 Ifyou need further information on using the web browser interface click on to access the web based help available for the Switch 2512 2524 How IP Addressing Affects Switch Operation Without an IP address and subnet mask compatible with your network the switch can be managed only through a direct terminal device connection to the Console RS 232 port You can use direct connect console access to take advantage of features that do not depend on IP addressing However to realize the full
264. iguration file to download vm is a required entry that specifies the Bootp report format For the switches described in this guide set this parameter to rfc1048 The above Bootp table entry is a sample that will work for the switch when the appropriate addresses and file names are used Network Preparations for Configuring DHCP Bootp In its default configuration the switch is configured for DHCP Bootp opera tion However the DHCP Bootp feature will not acquire IP addressing for the switch unless the following tasks have already been completed m For Bootp operation e A Bootp database record has already been entered into an appropriate Bootp server e The necessary network connections are in place e The Bootp server is accessible from the switch m For DHCP operation e ADHCP scope has been configured on the appropriate DHCP server e The necessary network connections are in place e A DHOP server is accessible from the switch Designating a primary VLAN other than the default VLAN affects the switch s use of information received via DHCP Bootp For more on this topic see the chapter on Virtual LANs in the Advanced Traffic Management Guide After you reconfigure or reboot the switch with DHCP Bootp enabled in a network providing DHCP Bootp service the switch does the following m Receives an IP address and subnet mask and if configured in the server a gateway IP address and the address of a Timep server m Ifthe DHCP B
265. igured TimeP server IP address iii Press gt to move the cursor to the Poll Interval field then go to step 6 Time Syne Method None TIMEP TimeP Mode Disabled Manual Server Address 10 28 227 141 Poll Interval min 720 Time Zone 0 O Daylight Time Rule None None 6 Inthe Poll Interval field enter the time in minutes that you want for a TimeP Poll Interval Press Enter to return to the Actions line then S for Save to enter the new time protocol configuration in both the startup config and running config files CLI Viewing and Configuring TimeP CLI Commands Described in this Section show timep page 9 17 no timesync page 9 18 ff 9 20 ip timep dhcp page 9 18 manual page 9 19 server lt ip addr gt page 9 19 interval page 9 20 no ip timep page 9 21 9 16 Time Protocols TimeP Viewing Selecting and Configuring This section describes how to use the CLI to view enable and configure TimeP parameters Viewing the Current TimeP Configuration This command lists both the time synchronization method TimeP SNTP or None and the TimeP configuration even if SNTP is not the selected time protocol Syntax show timep For example if you configure the switch with TimeP as the time synchroniza tion method then enable TimeP in DHCP mode with the default poll interval show timep lists the following HPswitch config show timep Timep Configuration Time Syne Mode Timep Tim
266. imep interval 60 Disabling Time Synchronization Without Changing the TimeP Configuration The recommended method for disabling time synchroniza tion is to use the timesyne command This halts time synchronization without changing your TimeP configuration Syntax no timesync For example suppose TimeP is running as the switch s time synchronization protocol with DHCP as the TimeP mode and the factory default polling interval You would halt time synchronization with this command HPswitch config no timesync If you then viewed the TimeP configuration you would see the following 9 20 Time Protocols SNTP Unicast Time Polling with Multiple SNTP Servers HPswitch config show timep Timep Configuration Time Sync Mode Disabled TimeP Mode DHCP Poll Interval min 720 Figure 9 14 Example of TimeP with Time Sychronization Disabled Disabling the TimeP Mode Disabling the TimeP mode means to configure it as disabled Disabling TimeP prevents the switch from using it as the time synchronization protocol even if it is the selected Time Sync Method option Syntax no ip timep Disables TimeP by changing the TimeP mode configuration to Disabled For example if the switch is running TimeP in DHCP mode no ip timep changes the TimeP configuration as shown below and disables time synchronization on the switch HPswitch config no ip timep HPswitch config show timep Time Syne Mode Timep ti
267. in its outbound CDP packets 1 If only one VLAN on the port has an IP address the switch uses that IP address 2 Ifthe Primary VLAN on the port has an IP address the switch uses the Primary VLAN IP address 3 If1 and 2 do not apply then the switch determines which VLANs on the port have IP addresses and uses the IP address of the VLAN with the lowest VID VLAN Identification number in this group 13 37 Configuring for Network Management Applications CDP 4 IfaCDP switch does not detect an IP address on the connecting port of a CDP neighbor then the loopback IP address is used 127 0 0 1 For example in figure 13 20 port Al on CDP switch X is connected to port C5 on CDP neighbor switch Y with the indicated VLAN configuration on port C5 VLAN Membership in Port C5 of Switch Y comer IP Address DEFAULT_VLAN Primary VLAN Blue_VLAN 10 28 227 103 Red VLAN 10 28 227 88 Switch X Switch Y CDP Enabled on Port A1 CDP Enabled on Port C5 CDP Neighbor Table Port Data Port C5 Thus CDP switch X detects CDP switch Y on port A1 and shows 10 28 227 103 in its CDP table entry because in CDP switch Y the Primary VLAN does not have an IP address and the Blue_VLAN has a lower VID than the Red_VLAN Figure 13 20 Example of IP Address Selection when a CDP Neighbor Has Multiple VLANs with IP Addresses CDP Neighbor Data and MIB Objects The switch places the data recei
268. in the CLI and then go to the browser interface without executing a write memory command those changes will be saved to the startup config file if you click on Apply Changes or Apply Settings in the web browser interface 6 11 Switch Memory and Configuration Using Primary and Secondary Flash Image Options Using Primary and Secondary Flash Image Options The switch features two flash memory locations for storing switch software image files m Primary Flash The default storage for a switch software image Secondary Flash The additional storage for either a redundant or an alternate switch software image With the Primary Secondary flash option you can test a new image in your system without having to replace a previously existing image You can also use the image options for troubleshooting For example you can copy a problem image into Secondary flash for later analysis and place another proven image in Primary flash to run your system The switch can use only one image at a time The following tasks involve primary secondary flash options m Displaying the current flash image data and determining which switch software versions are available Switch software downloads Replacing and removing erasing a local switch software version System booting Displaying the Current Flash Image Data Use the commands in this section to m Determine whether there are flash images in both primary and secondary flash m Determine
269. ina natens Switch C data Switch C data I I I I Figure 13 10 Example of How the Switch Stores Data on Neighbor CDP Devices Outgoing Packets A switch running CDP periodically transmits a one hop CDP packet out each of its ports This packet contains data describing the switch and if the one hop destination is another device running CDP the receiving device stores the sending device s data in a CDP Neighbors table The receiving device also transmits a similar one hop CDP packet out each of its ports to make itself known to other CDP devices to which itis connected Thus each CDP device in the network provides data on itself to the CDP neighbors to which it is directly connected However there are instances where a packet is forwarded beyond the immediate neighbor or simply dropped 13 27 Configuring for Network Management Applications CDP Accepts but does not forward CDP Switch B packets describing Switch A Also CDP Aware 7 transmits CDP packets describing itself Switch with Switch B out all ports CDP Running Switch C Drops CDP packets describing Switch y A Also does not transmit any CDP eee packets describing itself Switch C CDP Disabled Switch A Switch with CDP Accepts but does not forward CDP Running and Router X packets from Switch A Also transmits Forwarding CDP With CDP 7 CDP packets describing itself Router X Packets to Down
270. ing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters From the CLI you can configure and view all port parameter settings and view all port status indicators Using the CLI To View Port Status Use the following commands to display port status and configuration m show interfaces brief Lists the full status and configuration for all ports on the switch m show interface config Lists a subset of the data shown by the show interfaces command above that is only the enabled disabled mode and flow control status for all ports on the switch Syntax show interfaces brief config These two commands display the information listed in table 10 2 below Table 10 2 Comparing the Show Interfaces Command Options Feature Show Interfaces Brief Show Interfaces Config Port Number and Type Yes Yes Enabled Y N Yes Yes Flow Control Yes Yes Status Up Down Yes No Mode Operating Yes No Intrusion Alert Yes No Mode Configured No Yes MDIX Mode 2600 Operating Configured 2600 PWR and 2800 There is also the show interfaces e lt port number gt option which displays port statistics Refer to Viewing Port and Trunk Group Statistics and Flow Control Status on page B 10 The figures 10 3 thru 10 6 list examples of the output of the above two commands for the same port configuration on two different switches 10 8 Port Status and Basic Configuration Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters
271. ing config file but not in the startup config file In this case you will see HPswitch config vlan 20 HPswitch config menu Do you want to save current configuration y n If you type Y the switch overwrites the startup config file with the running config file and your configuration change s will be preserved across reboots If you type N your configuration change s will remain only in the running config file In this case if you do not subsequently save the running config file your unsaved configuration changes will be lost if the switch reboots for any reason Storing and Retrieving Configuration Files You can store or retrieve a backup copy of the startup config file on another device For more informa tion see appendix A File Transfers 6 4 Note Switch Memory and Configuration Using the CLI To Implement Configuration Changes Using the CLI To Implement Configuration Changes The CLI offers these capabilities m Access to the full set of switch configuration features m The option of testing configuration changes before making them perma nent How To Use the CLI To View the Current Configuration Files Use show commands to view the configuration for individual features such as port status or Spanning Tree Protocol However to view either the entire startup config file or the entire running config file use the following commands show config Displays a listing of
272. ing heavy broadcast or multicast traffic all ports will become highly utilized By color coding the received broadcast and multicast utilization the bar graph quickly and easily identifies the offending port This makes it faster and easier to discover the exact source of the heavy traffic because you don t have to examine port counter data from several ports Error Pkts Rx All error packets received by the port This indicator is a reddish color on many systems Although errors received on a port are not propagated to the rest of the network a consistently high number of errors on a specific port may indicate a problem on the device or network segment connected to the indicated port 5 16 Using the HP Web Browser Interface Status Reporting Features Maximum Activity Indicator As the bars in the graph area change height to reflect the level of network activity on the corresponding port they leave an outline to identify the maximum activity level that has been observed on the port Utilization Guideline A network utilization of 40 is considered the maximum that atypical Ethernet type network can experience before encoun tering performance difficulties If you observe utilization that is consistently higher than 40 on any port click on the Port Counters button to get a detailed set of counters for the port To change the amount of bandwidth the Port Utilization bar graph shows Click onthe bandwidth display control button
273. ion Note This screen gives an overview of the SNMP communities that are currently configured All fields in this screen are read only Deleting or changing the community named public prevents network man agement applications such as auto discovery traffic monitoring SNMP trap generation and threshold setting from operating in the switch Changing or deleting the public name also generates an Event Log message If security for network management is a concern it is recommended that you change the write access for the public community to Restricted Menu Viewing and Configuring non SNMP version 3 Communities To View Edit or Add SNMP Communities 1 From the Main Menu Select 2 Switch Configuration 6 SNMP Community Names CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Switch Configuration SNMP Communities Community Name MIB View Write Access se ee Add and Edit options are mublic Manager Unrestricter used to modify the SNMP options See figure 8 2 Actions gt Back Add Edit Delete Help Return to Irevious screen Use up down arrow keys to change record selection left right arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Figure 13 5 The SNMP Communities Screen Default Values 2 Press A for Add to display the following screen 13 14 If you are adding a community the fields in this sc
274. ion logging destination Session destination All event type Event event type port access auth event type Effect of a Reboot or Reset If any SyslogD server IP addresses are in the startup config file they are saved across a reboot and the logging destination option remains enabled Otherwise the logging destination is disabled Disabled Disabled If a Syslog server is configured in the startup config file resets to enabled regardless of prior setting Disabled if no Syslog server is configured Disabled Debug commands do not affect message output to the Event Log As a separate option invoking debug with the event option causes the switch to send Event Log messages to whatever debug destination s you configure session and or logging as well as to the Event Log C 33 Troubleshooting Diagnostic Tools m Ensure that your Syslog server s will accept Debug messages All Syslog messages the switch generates carry the configured facility All Syslog messages resulting from debug operation carry a debug severity If you configure the switch to transmit debug messages to a SyslogD server ensure that the server s Syslog application is configured to accept the debug severity level The default configuration for some Syslog applications ignores the debug severity level A reboot temporarily suspends Syslog logging After a reboot the switch suspends configured Syslog logging
275. ion When SNTP Is the Selected Time Synchronization Method In the factory default configuration where TimeP is the selected time synchronization method show sntp still lists the SNTP configuration even though it is not currently in use For example 9 8 Time Protocols SNTP Viewing Selecting and Configuring HPswitch show sntp Even though in this example TimeP is the SNTP Configuration current time synchronous method the switch maintains the SNTP configuration Time Syne Mode Timep SNTP Mode Broadcast Poll Interval sec 720 720 Figure 9 3 Example of SNTP Configuration When SNTP Is Not the Selected Time Synchronization Method Configuring Enabling or Disabling the SNTP Mode Enabling the SNTP mode means to configure it for either broadcast or unicast mode Remember that to run SNTP as the switch s time synchronization protocol you must also select SNTP as the time synchronization method by using the CLI timesyne command or the Menu interface Time Sync Method parameter Syntax timesync sntp Selects SNTP as the time protocol sntp lt broadcast unicast gt Enables the SNTP mode below and page 9 10 sntp server lt ip addr gt Required only for unicast mode page 9 10 sntp poll interval lt 30 720 gt Enabling the SNTP mode also enables the SNTP poll interval default 720 seconds page 9 12 Enabling SNTP in Broadcast Mode Because the switch provides an SNTP polling interv
276. ion is the DEFAULT_VLAN If the primary VLAN has been moved to another VLAN it may be disabled or does not have ports assigned to it VLAN Related Problems Monitor Port When using the monitor port in a multiple VLAN environ ment the switch handles broadcast multicast and unicast traffic output from the monitor port as follows Ifthe monitor port is configured for tagged VLAN operation on the same VLAN as the traffic from monitored ports the traffic output from the monitor port carries the same VLAN tag m Ifthe monitor portis configured for untagged VLAN operation on the same VLAN as the traffic from the monitored ports the traffic output from the monitor port is untagged m Ifthe monitor port is not a member of the same VLAN as the traffic from the monitored ports traffic from the monitored ports does not go out the monitor port None of the devices assigned to one or more VLANs on an 802 1Q compliant switch are being recognized Ifmultiple VLANs are being used on ports connecting 802 1Q compliant devices inconsistent VLAN IDs may have been assigned to one or more VLANS For a given VLAN the same VLAN ID must be used on all connected 802 1Q compliant devices Link Configured for Multiple VLANs Does Not Support Traffic for One or More VLANs One or more VLANs may not be properly configured as Tagged or Untagged A VLAN assigned to a port connecting two 802 1Q compliant devices must be configured the same on both
277. ipped with your switch For the latest version of this guide visit the HP ProCurve web site For information on the Management VLAN feature refer to See the chapter on VLANs in the Advanced Traffic Management Guide Configuring for Network Management Applications Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch SNMP Management Features SNMP management features on the switch include SNMP version 1 version 2c or version 3 over IP Security via configuration of SNMP communities page 13 4 Security via authentication and privacy for SNMP Version 3 access Event reporting via SNMP e Version 1 traps e RMON HP ProCurve Manager Plus support Flow sampling using either EASE or sFlow ProCurve 2800 only Standard MIBs such as the Bridge MIB RFC 1493 Ethernet MAU MIB RFC 1515 and others The switch SNMP agent also uses certain variables that are included in a Hewlett Packard proprietary MIB Management Information Base file To ensure that you have the latest version in the database of your SNMP network management tool you can copy the MIB file from the HP ProCurve World Wide Web site at http www hp com go hpprocurve Click on software then MIBs Configuring for SNMP Access to the Switch SNMP access requires an IP address and subnet mask configured on the switch For managed switches HP recommends permanent IP addressing Refer to IP Configuration on page 8 3 Once an IP address has been configured the main
278. is alive time 15 ms HPswitch gt ping 28 227 103 repetitions 3 10 26 227 103 is alive iteration 1 time 15 ms 10 28 227 103 is alive iteration 2 time 15 ms 10 28 227 103 is alive iteration 3 time 15 ms Ping with Repetitions Inet HPswitch gt ping 28 227 103 repetitions 3 timeout 2 g 10 28 227 103 is alive iteration 1 time 15 ms Repetitions s _ Anai meai 10 28 227 103 alive iteration 2 time 10 ms 10 28 227 103 is alive iteration 3 time 15 ms p A HPswitch gt ping 10 26 227 105 Ping Failure a target did not respond Figure C 15 Examples of Ping Tests To halt a ping test before it concludes press Ctrl C C 37 Troubleshooting Diagnostic Tools Link Tests You can issue single or multiple link tests with varying repeti tions and timeout periods The defaults are m Repetitions 1 1 999 m Timeout 5 seconds 1 256 seconds Syntax link lt mac address gt repetitions lt 1 999 gt timeout lt 1 256 gt vlan lt vlan id gt Brae limk Tes HPswitch link 0030c1 7fcc40 Link test passed HPswitch link 0030c1 7fec40 repetitions 3 Link Test with a 802 2 TEST packets sent 3 responses received 3 Repetitions HPswitch link 0030c1 7fec40 repetitions 3 timeout 1 802 2 TEST packets sent 3 responses received 3 Link Test with Repetitions and Timeout HPswitch link 0030c1 7fec40 repetitions 3 timeout 1 wlan 1 802 2 TEST packets sent
279. is command shows the last operating MDI mode the port was using If a port ona given switch has not detected a link to another device since the last reboot this command lists the MDI mode to which the port is currently configured For example show interfaces config displays the following data when port 1 is configured for auto mdix port 2 is configured for mdi and port 3 is configured for mdix 10 15 Port Status and Basic Configuration Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters HPswitch config show interfaces config Per Port MDI A Configuration Port Settings a Enabled Mode Flow Ctrl MDI 10 100TX Disable Auto 10 100TX Disable MDI 10 100TX Disable MDIX 10 100TX Disable Auto 10 100TX Disable Auto Figure 10 2 Example of Displaying the Current MDI Configuration HPswitch config show interfaces brief Per Port MDI Operating Mode Status and Counters Port Status Intrusion Alert Enabled Status l 10 100TX 100FDx 10 100TX 100FDx 10 100TX 100FDx 10 100TZ 10FDx 10FDx 10 100TX Figure 10 3 Example of Displaying the Current MDI Operating Mode Note Port Response to Switch Software Updates m Series 2600 or 2600 PWR Switch software updated from H_07 XX or earlier m Series 2800 Switch software updated from I_07 XX or earlier 1 Copper ports in auto negotiation still default to auto mdix mode 2 Copper ports in forced speed duplex default to mdix mod
280. is command is valid in all cases switching or routing because all of the ports are in the same port group HPswitch config trunk 9 14 trk2 This command is NOT valid if IP routing is enabled on the switch because the selected ports are in different port groups and IP routing is enabled If IP routing is enabled this command generates an error message and will not be executed If a trunk group with ports in different port groups is created before IP routing is enabled then using the ip routing command to enable IP routing generates an error message indicating the trunk group that violates the above rule You can remedy this problem by reducing the trunk to only the ports that are in the same port group To remove ports from an existing trunk use the following command HPswitch config no trunk lt ports to remove gt Trunk Group Boundary Requirement for the Series 4100g1 Switch 10 100 1000 Module J4908A On the J4908A a trunk group manual or dynamic LACP must be comprised of ports from the same port group as shown in table 3 Table 10 3 Port Group Boundaries for Trunks on a Series 4100gl Switch 10 100 1000 Module J4908A Ports Group 1 1 5 7 11 16 Group 2 6 12 15 17 22 Manually or dynamically configuring a trunk with ports in different groups is not suppported For example configuring a port trunk with ports 10 14 is not supported because the ports used are from two separate groups Refer
281. is the switch s primary VLAN The switch uses the primary VLAN for learning the default gateway address packet Time To Live TTL and Timep via DHCP or Bootp Other VLANs can also use DHCP or BootP to acquire IP addressing However the switch s gateway TTL and TimeP values will be acquired through the primary VLAN only For more on VLANS see the Advanced Traffic Management Guide 8 4 Note Configuring IP Addressing IP Configuration m The IP addressing used in the switch should be compatible with your network That is the IP address must be unique and the subnet mask must be appropriate for your IP network m If you change the IP address through either Telnet access or the web browser interface the connection to the switch will be lost You can reconnect by either restarting Telnet with the new IP address or entering the new address as the URL in your web browser IP Addressing in a Stacking Environment If you are installing the switch into an HP ProCurve stack management environment entering an IP address may not be required See the chapter on stack management in the Advanced Traffic Management Guide Menu Configuring IP Address Gateway and Time To Live TTL Do one of the following To manually enter an IP address subnet mask set the IP Config parameter to Manual and then manually enter the IP address and subnet mask values you want for the switch m To use DHCP or Bootp use the menu inte
282. ist the options for a specific command Listing Commands Available at Any Privilege Level At a given privilege level you can list and execute the commands that level offers plus all of the commands available at preceding levels For example at the Operator level you can list and execute only the Operator level commands However at the Manager level you can list and execute the commands available at both the Operator and Manager levels Type 2 To List Available Commands 1 Typing the symbol lists the commands you can execute at the current privilege level For example typing at the Operator level produces this listing HPswitch gt enable exit link test logout menu ping show setup HPswitch gt Figure 4 3 Example of the Operator Level Command Listing 4 8 Using the Command Line Interface CLI Using the CL Typing at the Manager level produces this listing HPswitch boot Reboot the device clear Clear table statistics or authorized client public keys configure Enter the Configuration context copy Copy datafiles to from the switch end Return to the Manager Exec context erase startup c Erase configuration file stored in flash getmib Retrieve and display the value of the MIB objects specified kill Kill all other active console telnet or ssh sessions log Display log events page Toggle paging mode print Execute a command and redirect its output to the device channel for cu
283. istributes traffic originally destined for that link to the remaining links in the trunk The trunk remains operable as long as there is at least one link in operation If a link is restored that link is automatically included in the traffic distribution again The LACP option also offers a standby link capability which enables you to keep links in reserve for service if one or more of the original active links fails See Trunk Group Operation Using LACP on page 12 18 Trunk Configuration Methods Dynamic LACP Trunk The switch automatically negotiates trunked links between LACP configured ports on separate devices and offers one dynamic trunk option LACP To configure the switch to initiate a dynamic LACP trunk with another device use the interface ethernet command in the CLI to set the default LACP option to Active on the ports you want to use for the trunk For example the following command configures ports C1 C4 to LACP active HPswitch config int cl c4 lacp active Note that the above example works if the ports are not already operating in a trunk To change the LACP option on ports already operating as a trunk you must first disable the trunked ports that you want to reconfigure For example if ports C1 C4 were LACP active and operating in a trunk with another device you would do the following to change them to LACP passive Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration Note 1 Goto the port context for ports c
284. itches Configuring PoE Operation Configuring PoE Operation Inits default configuration PoE support is enabled on the switch s 10 100Base TX ports with Priority set to Low and the power threshold set to 80 Syntax power threshold lt 1 99 gt The power threshold is a configurable percentage of the total PoE power available on the switch When PoE consumption exceeds the threshold the switch automatically generates an SNMP trap and also sends a message to the Event Log For example if the power threshold is set to 80 the default and an increasing PoE power demand crosses this threshold the switch sends an SNMP trap and generates this Event Log message PoE usage has exceeded threshold of 80 If the switch is configured for debug logging it also sends the same message to the configured debug destination s The switch automatically invokes the power threshold at the global configuration level with a default setting of 80 You can configure the power threshold to a value in the range of 1 to 99 If an increasing PoE power load 1 exceeds the configured power threshold which triggers the log message and SNMP trap and then 2 later begins decreasing and drops below the threshold again the switch generates another SNMP trap plus a message to the Event Log and any configured Debug destinations To continue the above example PoE usage is below configured threshold of 80 Refer to on page 1
285. k Monitoring B 25 CLI Configuring Port and Static Trunk Monitoring B 27 Web Configuring Port Monitoring 0005 B 29 Troubleshooting Contents oee a oe eee ae ee et HIN A C 1 OVERVIEW senkapa beean i ne dnd aaah da a ae e at e a C 3 Troubleshooting Approaches 00 c eee eee ee eee eee C 3 Chassis Over Temperature Detection 00002 eee eee eee C 5 Browser or Telnet Access Problems 0 0 cece eeeees C 6 Unusual Network Activity 0 00 ec eeee eae C 8 General Problems lt e 20 0 ee ree cn nec nee ne ee en C 8 Prioritization Problems 00 0 0 eee e eee eens C 9 CDP Problem 0 5 5 vaeauch seins bowed s4ee evade olen eg ean C 9 IGMP Related Problems 000 e eee eee eee eee C 10 LACP Related Problems 0000 e eee ee ene eee C 11 Port Based Access Control 802 1X Related Problems C 11 Radius Related Problems 00 0 cece eee eee ees C 14 Spanning Tree Protocol STP and Fast Uplink Problems C 15 SSH Related Problems 0 0 cece eee eee eee eens C 16 Stacking Related Problems 2 0 e eee ee eens C 17 TACACS Related Problems 0 00 cee cece eee eens C 18 TimeP SNTP or Gateway Problems 0 45 C 20 VLAN Related Problems 0 0 0 e eee eee eee eee C 20 Using Logging To Identify Problem Sources 2 0
286. k Settings You can reconfigure one or more console parameters with one console command Syntax console terminal lt vt100 ansi gt screen refresh lt 1 13151101 201301451 60 gt baud rate lt speed sense 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 138400 57600 gt flow control lt xon xoff none gt inactivity timer lt 0 1 5 10 15 20 30 60 120 gt events lt none all non info critical debug If you change the Baud Rate or Flow Control settings for the switch you should make the corresponding changes in your console access device Oth erwise you may lose connectivity between the switch and your terminal emulator due to differences between the terminal and switch settings for these two parameters All console parameter changes except events require that you save the config uration with write memory and then execute boot before the new console configuration will take effect 7 6 Interface Access and System Information Interface Access Console Serial Link Web and Telnet For example to use one command to configure the switch with the following VT100 operation 19 200 baud No flow control 10 minute inactivity time Critical log events you would use the following command sequence HPswitch config console terminal vt100 baud rate 19200 flow control none inactivity timer 10 events critical Command will take effect after saving configuration and reboot HPswitch confiq write memory HPswitch config
287. l sec 720 Time Zone 0 O Daylight Time Rule None None Server Version 3 3 6 Inthe Poll Interval field enter the time in seconds that you want for a Poll Interval For Poll Interval operation see table 9 1 SNTP Parameters on page 9 5 7 Press Enter to return to the Actions line then S for Save to enter the new time protocol configuration in both the startup config and running config files 9 7 Time Protocols SNTP Viewing Selecting and Configuring CLI Viewing and Configuring SNTP CLI Commands Described in this Section show sntp page 9 8 no timesync pages 9 9 and ff 9 12 sntp broadcast page 9 9 sntp unicast page 9 10 sntp server pages 9 10 and ff Protocol Version page 9 12 poll interval page 9 12 no sntp page 9 13 This section describes how to use the CLI to view enable and configure SNTP parameters Viewing the Current SNTP Configuration This command lists both the time synchronization method TimeP SNTP or None and the SNTP configuration even if SNTP is not the selected time protocol Syntax show sntp For example if you configured the switch with SNTP as the time synchroni zation method then enabled SNTP in broadcast mode with the default poll interval show sntp lists the following HPswitch show sntp SNTP Configuration Time Syne Mode Sntp SNTP Mode Broadcast Poll Interval sec 720 720 Figure 9 2 Example of SNTP Configurat
288. lays addresses that are important for management of the switch If multiple VLANs are not configured this screen displays a single IP address for the entire switch See the online Help for details CLI Access Syntax show management Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Status and Counters Data Module Information Use this feature to determine which slots have modules installed and which type s of modules are installed Menu Displaying Port Status From the Main Menu select 1 Status and Counters 3 Module Information Status and Counters Module Information Slot Module Type Module Description 100 1000Bas X module HP 7348634 10 100 1000Base TX module HP 7348634 10 100 1000Base TX module HP J4863A 10 100 1000Base TX module HP J4864A Transceiver module Slot Available Slot Available Slot Available IRIKIA wey Actions gt Return to previous J Use up down arrow keys to scroll to other entries left right arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Figure B 4 Example of Module Information in the Menu Interface CLI Access Syntax show module B 8 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Status and Counters Data Port Status The web browser interface and the console interface show the same port status data Menu Displaying Port Status From the Main Menu select 1 Status and Counters 4 Port Status
289. le will again list entries after the switch receives new CDP packets from neighboring CDP devices Figure 13 17 View of the CDP Neighbors Table Immediately After Executing cdp clear Configuring CDP Operation Enabling or Disabling CDP Operation on the Switch Enabling CDP operation the default on the switch causes the switch to m Transmit CDP packets describing itself to other neighboring CDP devices m Addentries to its CDP Neighbors table for any CDP packets it receives from other neighboring CDP devices Disabling CDP operation clears the switch s CDP Neighbors table prevents the switch from transmitting outbound CDP packets to advertise itself to neighboring CDP devices and causes the switch to drop inbound CDP packets from other devices without entering the data in the CDP Neighbors table Syntax no cdp run Enables or disables CDP operation on the switch Default Enabled For example to disable CDP on the switch HPswitch config no cdp run When CDP is disabled m show cdp neighbors displays an empty CDP Neighbors table m show cdp displays Global CDP information Enable CDP Yes No 13 34 CDP Enabled on both ends of the link between A and B Configuring for Network Management Applications CDP Enabling or Disabling CDP Operation on Individual Ports In the factory default configuration the switch has all ports enabled and transmit ting CDP packets Disabling CDP on a port prevents that
290. lear Changes 3 Enter one of the following or use the default setting 4 Click on Apply Changes The URL for the support information source you want the switch to access when you click on the web browser interface Support tab The default is the URL for the HP ProCurve Networking home page The URL of a PCM HP ProCurve Network Manager workstation or other server forthe online Help files for this web browser interface The default setting accesses the switch s browser based Help on the HP ProCurve World Wide Web site Note that if you install PCM in your network the PCM management station acts as the web browser Help server and automatically inserts the necessary URL in this field Figure 5 6 The Default Support Mgmt URLs Window 5 12 Using the HP Web Browser Interface Support Mgmt URLs Feature Support URL This is the site that the switch accesses when you click on the Support tab on the web browser interface The default URL is http www hp com go procurve which is the World Wide Web site for Hewlett Packard s networking products Click on the Support button on that page and you can get to support informa tion regarding your switch including white papers operating system OS updates and more You could instead enter the URL for a local site that you use for entering reports about network performance or whatever other function you would like to be able to easily access by clicking on the Support
291. lems C 6 context level global config 8 11 copyright 1 ii CPU utilization B 6 D date format C 23 date configure 7 13 debug command debug severity and Syslog servers C 34 event C 28 event log C 33 syntax C 28 debug logging configuration viewing C 32 general operation C 27 session not current C 33 status viewing C 32 Syslog configuration C 29 Syslog logging disabled C 29 Syslog server view configuration C 32 Syslog number of servers C 27 Telnet session C 27 default gateway 8 3 default trunk type 12 11 Device Passwords Window 5 8 DHCP address problems C 8 effect of no reply C 8 DHCP Bootp operation 8 12 process 8 13 diagnostics tools C 34 browsing the configuration file C 39 ping and link tests C 35 disclaimer 1 ii DNS name 5 4 Domain Name Server 5 4 download switch to switch A 14 troubleshooting A 17 Xmodem A 11 download OS A 14 download TFTP A 3 A 4 downstream device QoS effect of priority settings 10 30 duplicate MAC address See MAC address Dynl See LACP E ending a console session 3 5 event log 3 7 C 23 navigation C 25 See also debug logging severity level C 23 temperature messages C 5 use during troubleshooting C 23 with debug C 33 excessive packets 10 25 F factory default configuration restoring 6 8
292. less you also make a configuration change in the menu interface only the write memory command in the CLI will actually save the change to the startup config file 6 7 Switch Memory and Configuration Using the Menu and Web Browser Interfaces To Implement Configuration Changes How To Reset the startup config and running config Files to the Factory Default Configuration This command reboots the switch replacing the contents of the current startup config and running config files with the factory default startup configuration Syntax erase startup config For example HPswitch config erase startup config Configuration will be deleted and device rebooted continue y n Figure 6 3 Resetting to the Factory Default Configuration Press Y to replace the current configuration with the factory default config uration and reboot the switch Press N to retain the current configuration and prevent a reboot Using the Menu and Web Browser Interfaces To Implement Configuration Changes The menu and web browser interfaces offer these advantages m Quick easy menu or window access to a subset of switch configuration features See the Menu Features List on page 3 14 and the web browser General Features list on page m Viewing several related configuration parameters in the same screen with their default and current settings Immediately changing both the running config file and the startup config file
293. ling the power reboots the switch with the boot up configuration m Disconnect the switch from network access to any TACACS servers and then log in to the switch using either Telnet or direct console port access Because the switch cannot access a TACACS server it will default to local authentication You can then use the switch s local Operator or Manager username password pair to log on As a last resort use the Clear Reset button combination to reset the switch to its factory default boot up configuration Taking this step means you will have to reconfigure the switch to return it to operation in your network No Communication Between the Switch and the TACACS Server Application If the switch can access the server device that is it can ping the server then a configuration error may be the problem Some possibilities include m The server IP address configured with the switch s tacacs server host command may not be correct Use the switch s show tacacs server command to list the TACACS server IP address C 18 Troubleshooting Unusual Network Activity m The encryption key configured in the server does not match the encryption key configured in the switch by using the tacacs server key command Verify the key in the server and compare it to the key configured in the switch Use show tacacs server to list the global key Use show config or show config running to list any server specific keys m The accessible
294. lt configuration The erase startup config command does not clear passwords Using the Clear Reset Buttons To execute the factory default reset perform these steps 1 Using pointed objects simultaneously press both the Reset and Clear buttons on the front of the switch 2 Continue to press the Clear button while releasing the Reset button 3 When the Self Test LED begins to flash release the Clear button The switch will then complete its self test and begin operating with the configuration restored to the factory default settings C 43 Troubleshooting Restoring a Flash Image Note Restoring a Flash Image The switch can lose its operating system if either the primary or secondary flash image location is empty or contains a corrupted OS file and an operator uses the erase flash command to erase a good OS image file from the opposite flash location To Recover from an Empty or Corrupted Flash State Use the switch s console serial port to connect to a workstation or laptop computer that has the following Aterminal emulator program with Xmodem capability such as the Hyper Terminal program included in Windows PC software A copy of a good OS image file for the switch The following procedure requires the use of Xmodem and copies an OS image into primary flash only This procedure assumes you are using HyperTerminal as your terminal emu lator If you use a different terminal emulator you may need to
295. ly port names are not allowed and if used cause an invalid input error The switch interprets a blank space as aname terminator In a port listing not assigned indicates that the port does not have a name assignment other than its fixed port number 10 34 Port Status and Basic Configuration Using Friendly Optional Port Names m To retain friendly port names across reboots you must save the current running configuration to the startup config file after entering the friendly port names In the CLI use the write memory command Configuring Friendly Port Names Syntax interface lt port list gt name lt port name string gt Assigns a port name to port list no interface lt port list name Deletes the port name from port list Configuring a Single Port Name Suppose that you have connected port A3 on the switch to Bill Smith s workstation and want to assign Bill s name and workstation IP address 10 25 101 73 as a port name for port A3 HPswitch config int e A3 name Bill Smith 10 25 101 73 HPswitch config write mem HPswitch config show name A3 Port Names Port AS Type 10 100TX Name Bill Smith 10 25 101 73 Figure 10 10 Example of Configuring a Friendly Port Name 10 35 Port Status and Basic Configuration Using Friendly Optional Port Names Configuring the Same Name for Multiple Ports Suppose that you want to use ports A5 through A8 as a trunked link to a server used by a drafting
296. m Manually enter the earlier values you had for the changed settings This is recommended if you want to restore a small number of parameter settings to their previous boot up values m Update the running config file to match the startup config file by reboot ing the switch This is recommended if you want to restore a larger number of parameter settings to their previous boot up values If you use the CLI to change a parameter setting and then execute the boot command without first executing the write memory command to save the change the switch prompts you to specify whether to save the changes in the current running config file For example 6 6 Note Switch Memory and Configuration Using the CLI To Implement Configuration Changes Disables port 1 inthe running configuration which causes port 1 to block all traffic HPswitch config interfac 1 Uere HPswitch config boot Device will be rebooted do you want to continue y n y Press Y to continue the rebooting process i You will then see this prompt Do you want to save current configuration y n Figure 6 2 Boot Prompt for an Unsaved Configuration The above prompt means that one or more parameter settings in the running config file differ from their counterparts in the startup config file and you need to choose which config file to retain and which to discard If you want to update the startup config file to match the running config
297. mand HPswitch config ip ssh version 2 As a matter of policy administrators should not enable the SSHv1 only or the SSHv1 or v2 advertisement modes SSHv1 is supported on only some legacy switches such as the HP ProCurve Series 2500 switches To confirm that SSH is enabled type in the command HPswitch config show ip ssh 3 Once you have confirmed that you have enabled an SSH session with the show ipssh command you can then open your third party software client application to begin using the SCP or SFTP commands to safely transfer files or issue commands to the switch If you need to disable secure file transfer HPswitch config no ip ssh filetransfer A 9 File Transfers Downloading Switch Software Note Authentication Switch memory allows up to ten public keys This means the authentication and encryption keys you use for your third party client SCP SFTP software can differ from the keys you use for the SSH session even though both SCP and SFTP use a secure SSH tunnel SSH authentication through a TACACS server and use of SCP or SFTP through an SSH tunnel are mutually exclusive Thus ifthe switch is configured to use TACACS for authenticating a secure Telnet SSH session on the switch you cannot enable SCP or SFTP Also if SCP or SFTP is enabled on the switch you cannot enable TACACS authentication for a secure Telnet SSH The switch displays a message similar t
298. mand sequence WHPswitch iconfig int e Al name Print Serverg10 25 101 43 oa saves the friendly port name HPswitch config write mem for port A1 in the startup HPswitch config int e A2 name Herbert s PC config file but does not do so Ss 7 for the name entered for port HPswitchiconfig show config A2 Startup configuration J48654 Configuration Editor Created on release G 05 01 hostname HPswitch time daylight time rule None Listing includes friendly no cdp run port name for port A1 ee ils a only interface Al l v I l name Print Server 10 25 101 43 snmp server community public Unrestricted vian 1 In this case show config lists name DEFAULT VLAN only port A1 Executing write untagged 1 24 mem after entering the name for ip address dhcep bootp port A2 and then executing exit show config again would result in a listing that includes both no aaa port access authenticator active g Figure 10 15 Example Listing of the Startup Config File with a Friendly Port Name Configured and Saved 10 39 Port Status and Basic Configuration Using Friendly Optional Port Names This page is intentionally unused 10 40 11 Power Over Ethernet PoE Operation for the Series 2600 PWR Switches Contents Applicable Switch Models 00 0 c eee ee eee eee IMtrOdUCHON srr es 4 ciecis nak Moen eRe a Net at ne date dase oh General Operation
299. me trunk 4 9 Using the Command Line Interface CLI Using the CL telnet terminal HPswitch config t As mentioned above if you type part of a command word and press Tab the CLI completes the current word if you have typed enough of the word for the CLI to distinguish it from other possibilities including hyphenated exten sions For example HPswitch config port Tab HPswitch config port security _ Pressing Tab after a completed command word lists the further options for that command HPswitch config stack Tab commander lt commander str gt join lt mac addr gt auto join transmission interval lt integer gt lt C gt HPswitch config stack Command Option Displays Conventions for Command Option Displays When you use the CLI to list options for a particular command you will see one or more of the following conventions to help you interpret the command data m Braces lt gt indicate a required choice m Square brackets indicate optional elements m Vertical bars separate alternative mutually exclusive options in a command 4 10 Using the Command Line Interface CLI Using the CLI Listing Command Options You can use the CLI to remind you of the options available for a command by entering command keywords followed by For example suppose you want to see the command options for config uring port C5 This exampl
300. me synchronization is disabled because no ip TimeP Mode Disabled timep has disabled the TimeP Mode parameter Timep Configuration ar Even though the Time Sync Mode is set to Timep Figure 9 15 Example of Disabling Time Synchronization by Disabling the TimeP Mode Parameter SNTP Unicast Time Polling with Multiple SNTP Servers When running SNTP unicast time polling as the time synchronization method the switch requests a time update from the server you configured with either the Server Address parameter in the menu interface or the primary server in a list of up to three SNTP servers configured using the CLI If the switch does not receive a response from the primary server after three consecutive polling intervals the switch tries the next server if any in the list If the switch tries 9 21 Time Protocols SNTP Unicast Time Polling with Multiple SNTP Servers all servers in the list without success it sends an error message to the Event Log and reschedules to try the address list again after the configured Poll Interval time has expired Address Prioritization If you use the CLI to configure multiple SNTP servers the switch prioritizes them according to the decimal values of their IP addresses That is the switch compares the decimal value of the octets in the addresses and orders them accordingly with the lowest decimal value assigned as the primary address the second lowest decimal value assigned as the next address
301. mmand output lt cli commana gt tftp lt ip address gt lt filepath filename gt copy command output lt cli command gt xmodem For example to use Xmodem to copy the output of show config to a serially connected PC At this point press HPswitch copy command output show config xmodem pe Enter and start the Press Enter and start XMODEM on your host Xmodem command sequence in your Transfer complete terminal emulator Figure A 8 Example of Sending Command Output to a File on an Attached PC Indicates the operation is finished Note that the command you specify must be enclosed in double quote marks File Transfers Copying Diagnostic Data to a Remote Host PC or Unix Workstation Copying Event Log Output to a Destination Device This command uses TFTP or Xmodem to copy the Event Log content to a PC or UNIX workstation on the network Syntax copy event log tftp lt ip address gt lt filepath and filename gt copy event log xmodem For example to copy the event log to a PC connected to the switch At this point press HPswitch copy event log xmodem pe Enter and startthe Press Enter and start XMODEM on your host Xmodem command sequence in your Transfer complete terminal emulator Figure A 9 Example of Sending Event Log Content to a File on an Attached PC Copying Crash Data Content to a Destination Device This command uses TFTP or Xmodem to copy th
302. modem protocol e Click on Send If you are using HyperTerminal you will see a screen similar to the following to indicate that the download is in progress C 45 Troubleshooting Restoring a Flash Image Xmodem file send for Terminal HAsupportiswitchihpd108 cade g0502 swi Figure C 19 Example of Xmodem Download in Progress 8 When the download completes the switch reboots from primary flash using the OS image you downloaded in the preceding steps plus the most recent startup config file C 46 MAC Address Management Contents Overview ichecg pit nct pees Sade setae tg ee oe aa Determining MAC Addresses in the Switch Menu Viewing the Switch s MAC Addresses CLI Viewing the Port and VLAN MAC Addresses Viewing theMAC Addresses of Connected Devices on Series 2600 2600 PWR 2800 and 4100gl Switches D 1 MAC Address Management Overview Note Note Overview The switch assigns MAC addresses in these areas m For management functions e One Base MAC address assigned to the default VLAN VID 1 e Additional MAC address es corresponding to additional VLANs you configure in the switch For internal switch operations One MAC address per port See CLI Viewing the Port and VLAN MAC Addresses on page D 4 MAC addresses are assigned at the factory The switch automatically implements these addresses for VLANs and ports as they are added to the switch The
303. n To Display the Port Counter Summary Report on page B 12 To Reboot the switch use the Reboot Switch option in the Main Menu Note that the Reboot Switch option is not available if you log on in Operator mode that is if you enter an Operator password instead of a manager password at the password prompt Seseesessesesessesesssee s CONSOLE MANAGER NODE 2 2 222seeseeeseeeeeeeeeee e Main Menu Status and Counters Switch Configuration Console Passwords Event Log Command Line CLI Reboot Switch Download 05 Run Setup Stacking Logout ow ma anon fb One Provides the menu to display configuration status and counters To select menu item press item number or highlight item and press lt Enter gt Figure 6 5 The Reboot Switch Option in the Main Menu Asterisk indicates a configuration change that requires a reboot in order to take effect Reminder to reboot the switch to activate configuration changes Note Switch Memory and Configuration Using the Menu and Web Browser Interfaces To Implement Configuration Changes Rebooting To Activate Configuration Changes Configuration changes for most parameters become effective as soon as you save them However you must reboot the switch in order to implement a change in the Maximum VLANs to support parameter To access these parameters go to the Main menu and select 2 Switch Configuration then 8 VLAN Menu then 1
304. n The switch s base MAC address is assigned to VLAN VID 1 and appears in the walkmib listing after the MAC addresses for the ports If multiple VLANs are configured the MAC addresses assigned to these VLANs appear after the base MAC address To display the switch s MAC addresses use the walkmib command at the command prompt This procedure displays the MAC addresses for all ports and existing VLANs in the switch regardless of which VLAN you select 1 Ifthe switch is at the CLI Operator level use the enable command to enter the Manager level of the CLI 2 Type the following command to display the MAC address for each port on the switch HPswitch walkmib ifPhysAddress The above command is not case sensitive For example with a six port module in slot 1 a three port module in slot 3 and three VLANs present D 4 MAC Address Management Determining MAC Addresses in the Switch HPswitch walkmib ifPhysAddress ifPhysAddress 1 00 O1 e7 a0 99 ff ifPhysAddress 1 6 Ports A1 AG in Slot 1 ifPhysAddress 00 O1 e a0 99 Addresses 7 24 in slot 1 and 25 48 in slot 2 are ifPhysAddress 00 O1 e7 a0 99 fd unused ifPhysAddress 00 O1 e a0 99 fe ifPhysAddress 00 O41 e7 a0 99 fb ifPhysAddress 49 51 Ports C1 C3 in Slot 3 ifPhysAddress 6 00 O1 e7 a0 99 fa Addresses 52 72 in slot 3 are unused ifPhysAddress 49 00 O1 e7 a0 99 cf ifPhysAddress 50 00 01 e7 al 99 ce ifPhysAddress 205 Base MAC Addre
305. n configure a new trunk or the switch can dynamically configure an LACP trunk comprised of ports 1 3 4 7 8 10 11 and 12 and another trunk comprised of ports 13 14 17 18 20 21 22 and 24 However for example configuring a trunk or allowing a dynamic LACP trunk to occur with some ports in the range of 1 12 and other ports in the range of 13 24 is not supported if IP routing is enabled When IP routing is disabled any eligibleswitch ports having the same media type and mode speed and duplex can be used in a trunk group 12 8 Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration Trunk Group Boundary Requirement for the Series 4100g Switch 10 100 1000 Module J4908A Trunks must be created manually or dynamically with ports from the same group Group or Group2 Group Ports 1 5 7 11 16 Groupz2 Ports 6 12 15 17 22 For example a trunk made up of ports 3 5 is valid a trunk made up of ports 4 6 is not port 6 is a member of Group2 not Group 1 Ports 21 and 22 for use with mini GBICs may be used to form a trunk Spanning Tree Spanning Tree operates as a global setting on the switch one instance of Spanning Tree per switch However you can adjust Spanning Tree parameters on a per port basis A static trunk of any type appears in the Spanning Tree configuration display and you can configure Spanning Tree parameters for a static trunk in the same way that you would configure Spanning Tree parameters on a non trunked
306. n if needed For information on how IP addressing affects switch performance refer to How IP Addressing Affects Switch Operation on page 8 11 Multinetting Assigning Multiple IP Addresses to a VLAN Fora given VLAN you can assign one primary IP address and up to seven secondary IP addresses This allows you to combine two or more subnets on the same VLAN which enables devices in the combined subnets to communicate normally through the network without needing to reconfigure the IP address ing in any of the combined subnets Default Gateway Operation The default gateway is required when a router is needed for tasks such as reaching off subnet destinations or forward ing traffic across multiple VLANs The gateway value is the IP address of the next hop gateway node for the switch which is used if the requested destina tion address is not on a local subnet VLAN If the switch does not have a manually configured default gateway and DHCP Bootp is configured on the primary VLAN then the default gateway value provided by the DHCP or Bootp server will be used If the switch has a manually configured default gateway 8 3 Configuring IP Addressing IP Configuration Notes then the switch uses this gateway even if a different gateway is received via DHCP or Bootp on the primary VLAN This is also true for TimeP and a non default Time To Live See Notes on page 8 4 and refer to the chapter on Virtual LANs in the Advanced Traf
307. nables or disables port based priority on a per port basis You can either enter the command on the interface context level or include the interface in the command Syntax interface lt port gt qos priority lt 1 7 gt Configures a non default port based 802 1p priority for incoming untagged packets or tagged packets arriving with a 0 priority on the designated ports as described under Operating Rules for Port Based Priority above interface lt port gt qos priority 0 Returns a port based priority setting to the default 0 for untagged packets received on the designated port s In this state the switch handles the untagged packets with Normal priority Refer to table 10 3 on page 10 30 show running config Lists any non default 1 7 port based priority settings in the running config file on a per port basis If the priority is set to the default 0 the setting is not included in the show config listing show config Lists any non default 1 7 port based priority settings in the startup config file on a per port basis If the priority is set to the default 0 the setting is not included in the show config listing 10 32 Port Status and Basic Configuration Configuring Port Based Priority for Incoming Packets on the 4100gl and 6108 Switches For example suppose you wanted to configure ports A10 A12 on the switch to prioritize all untagged inbound VLAN traffic as Low priority level 1 re
308. nd high to two queues normal amp high Optimizes outbound port buffers for a two queue scheme m All packets received with an 802 1p priority tag of 0 to 5 dow normal or medium priorities or tagged by the switch s QOS feature will be serviced by the now larger normal priority queue m Allpackets received with an 802 lp priority tag of 6 or 7 high priority or tagged by the switch s QoS feature will be serviced by the high priority queue m High priority packets sourced by the switch itself such as Spanning Tree packets will be serviced in the high priority queue m Any 802 1p tagging on a received packet or any tag added to a received frame by the switch via its QoS configuration will be preserved as it is transmitted from the switch NOTE As stated earlier use of this QoS Passthrough Mode feature generally assumes that QoS tagged packets are not being sent through the 2800 Switch The receipt of priority 6 or 7 packets may in fact suffer packet drops depending on the traffic load of non priority 6 or 7 packets QoS Priority Mapping With and Without QoS Pass Through Mode The switch supports 802 1p VLAN tagging which is used in conjunction with the outbound port priority queues to prioritize outbound traffic 10 26 Port Status and Basic Configuration QoS Pass Through Mode on the Series 2800 Switches An 802 1Q VLAN tagged packet carries an 802 1p priority setting 0 7 If the switch receives a
309. nd returns you to the Overview screen A sample Detail View describing an Excessive CRC Alignment Error alert is shown here 5 20 Using the HP Web Browser Interface Status Reporting Features Excessive CRC Alignment Errors on port A8 Description A high percentage of data errors was detected on port A8 Possible causes The possible causes include faulty cabling or topology halfffull duplex mismatch a misconfigured NIC or a malfunctioning NIC NIC driver or transceiver Actions 1 If port ASis 100Base T make sure the cable connectors punch down blocks and patch panels connecting to that port are Category 5 or better Verify the correctness of the installation using a Category 5 test device 2 Check the directly connected device for mismatches in halfffull duplex operation half duplex on the switch and full duplex on the connected device or the reverse Update the NIC driver software Verify that the network topology conforms to IEEE 802 3 standards Replace or relocate the cable Also check the wiring closet components transceivers and NICs for proper operation W a w Cancel Retest Acknowledge Event Delete Event Figure 5 14 Example of Alert Log Detail View 5 21 Using the HP Web Browser Interface Status Reporting Features The Status Bar The Status Bar is displayed in the upper left corner of the web browser interface screen Figure 5 15 shows an expanded view of the status bar
310. ndwidth and fault tolerance Figure 12 10 Example of Criteria for Automatically Forming a Dynamic LACP Trunk Syntax interface lt port list gt lacp active This example uses ports C4 and C5 to enable a dynamic LACP trunk group HPswitch config interface c4 c5 lacp active Removing Ports from a Dynamic LACP Trunk Group To remove a port from dynamic LACP trunk operation you must turn off LACP on the port On aport in an operating dynamic LACP trunk you cannot change between LACP Active and LACP passive without first removing LACP operation from the port Unless STP is running on your network removing a port from a trunk can result in a loop To help prevent a broadcast storm when you remove a port from a trunk where STP is not in use HP recommends that you first disable the port or disconnect the link on that port 12 17 Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration Note Syntax no interface lt port list gt lacp In this example port C6 belongs to an operating dynamic LACP trunk To remove port C6 from the dynamic trunk and return it to passive LACP you would do the following HPswitch gt config no interface c6 lacp HPswitch gt config interface c6 lacp passive Note that in the above example if the port on the other end of the link is configured for active LACP or static LACP the trunked link will be re established almost immediately Web Viewing Existing Port Tru
311. ne having serial port Telnet or web browser access to the switch can reach all CLI levels For more on setting passwords refer to the local manager and operator password chapter in the Access Security Guide for your switch When you use the CLI to log on to the switch and passwords are set you will be prompted to enter a password For example Copyright C 1991 2003 Hewlett Packard Co All Rights Reserved RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivision b 3 11 of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at 52 227 7013 HEWLETT PACKARD COMPANY 3000 Hanover t Palo Alto CA 94303 pe Password Prompt Password _ Figure 4 1 Example of CLI Log On Screen with Password s Set In the above case you will enter the CLI at the level corresponding to the password you provide operator or manager If no passwords are set when you log onto the CLI you will enter at the Manager level For example HPswitch 4 3 Using the Command Line Interface CLI Using the CLI Caution HP strongly recommends that you configure a Manager password If a Man ager password is not configured then the Manager level is not password protected and anyone having in band or out of band access to the switch may be able to reach the Manager level and compromise switch and network security Note that configurin
312. nfiguration File Management 2 5 6 2 Using the CLI To Implement Configuration Changes 6 5 Using the Menu and Web Browser Interfaces To Implement Configuration CHANSES s aaia ek ee Seeded el ee aad Sees 6 8 Configuration Changes Using the Menu Interface 6 8 Using Save and Cancel in the Menu Interface 6 9 Rebooting from the Menu Interface 0 0055 6 10 Configuration Changes Using the Web Browser Interface 6 11 Using Primary and Secondary Flash Image Options 6 12 Displaying the Current Flash Image Data 6 12 Switch Software Downloads 0 0 e eee eee eee 6 14 Local Switch Software Replacement and Removal 6 15 Rebooting the Switch 00 0 cece eee ene 6 17 Operating Notes 0 cc cece cece ene eee eee 6 19 Interface Access and System Information CONTENUS avis ee cei Sale Bere ord th Dated weal EE E als aa Wig SA as 7 1 QVCIVIEW acs ace eae feed sale ae died BEEE as ate cates E EA A 7 2 Interface Access Console Serial Link Web and Telnet 7 3 Menu Modifying the Interface Access 0002s eee 7 4 CLI Modifying the Interface Access 000 c eee eee eee 7 5 Denying Interface Access by Terminating Remote Management Sessions 7 8 System Information 2 0 0 c cece cence eee eee 7 9 Menu Viewing and Configuring System Inf
313. ng Methods To convert a trunk from static to dynamic you must first eliminate the static trunk 12 23 Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration Static LACP Trunks Where a port is configured for LACP Active or Passive but does not belong to an existing trunk group you can add that port to a static trunk Doing so disables dynamic LACP on that port which means you must manually configure both ends of the trunk Dynamic LACP Trunks You can configure a port for LACP active or LACP passive but on a dynamic LACP trunk you cannot configure the other options that you can on static trunks If you want to manually configure a trunk use the trunk command Refer to Using the CLI To Configure a Static or Dynamic Trunk Group on page 12 15 VLANs and Dynamic LACP A dynamic LACP trunk operates only in the default VLAN unless you have enabled GVRP on the switch and use Forbid to prevent the ports from joining the default VLAN If you want to use LACP for a trunk on a non default VLAN and GVRP is disabled configure the trunk as a static trunk m If there are ports that you do not want on the default VLAN ensure that they cannot become dynamic LACP trunk members Otherwise a traffic loop can unexpectedly occur For example VLAN 1 VLAN 1 VLAN 1 VLAN 1 Default Default Default Default
314. ng VLAN status Syntax show vlan Lists o Maximum number of VLANs to support e Existing VLANs Status static or dynamic e Primary VLAN Syntax show vlan lt vian id gt For the specified VLAN lists e Name VID and status static dynamic e Per Port mode tagged untagged forbid no auto e Unknown VLAN setting Learn Block Disable e Port status up down For example suppose that your switch has the following VLANs Ports VLAN VID 1 12 DEFAULT_VLAN 1 1 2 VLAN 33 33 3 4 VLAN 44 44 The next three figures show how you could list data on the above VLANs B 21 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Status and Counters Data Listing the VLAN ID VID and Status for ALL VLANs in the Switch HPswitch gt show vlan Status and Counters VLAN Information VLAN support Yes Maximum VLANs to support 9 Primary VLAN DEFAULT_VLAN 802 10 VLAN ID Name status DEFAULT VLAN Static V LAN 33 Static VLAN 44 static Figure B 15 Example of VLAN Listing for the Entire Switch Listing the VLAN ID VID and Status for Specific Ports Because ports Al HPswitch gt show vlan ports Al a2 ani AZ li Tlas Status and Counters VLAN Information for ports Al a2 members of VLAN 44 it does not appear 802 10 VLAN ID Name status inthislisting 1 DEFAULT VLAN Static 33 VLAN 33 static Figure B 16 Example of VLAN Listing for Specific Ports Listin
315. ng destination SyslogD server and or a session type and involves the logging and debug destination commands Actions you can perform with Debug and Syslog operation include m Configure the switch to send Event Log messages to one or more SyslogD servers Included is the option to send the messages to the user log facility default on the configured servers or to another log facility Note As of August 2003 the logging facility lt facility name gt option described on page C 29 is available on these switch models e Switch 2600 2600 PWR Series and the Switch 6108 software release H 07 30 or greater e Switch 2800 Series For the latest feature information on HP ProCurve switches visit the HP ProCurve web site and check the latest release notes for the switch products you use m Configure the switch to send Event Log messages to the current manage ment access session serial connect CLI Telnet CLI or SSH m Disable all Syslog debug logging while retaining the Syslog addresses from the switch configuration This allows you to configure Syslog messaging and then disable and re enable it as needed m Display the current debug configuration If Syslog logging is currently active this includes the Syslog server list m Display the current Syslog server list when Syslog logging is disabled C 27 Troubleshooting Using Logging To Identify Problem Sources Debug Types This section describes the types of debug messag
316. ng the Configuration File 00 02 eee C 39 CLI Viewing the Configuration File C 39 Web Viewing the Configuration File C 39 Listing Switch Configuration and Operation Details for Help in Troubleshooting 00 0 cece eee eee eee eens C 40 CLI Administrative and Troubleshooting Commands C 42 Restoring the Factory Default Configuration C 43 Using the GLI osos tere e aare r EE Yisn EEIE sae eee C 43 Using the Clear Reset Buttons 00 c eee eee C 43 Restoring a Flash Image 2 0 0c eee eee eee eee eee C 44 C 2 Note Troubleshooting Overview Overview This chapter addresses performance related network problems that can be caused by topology switch configuration and the effects of other devices or their configurations on switch operation For switch specific information on hardware problems indicated by LED behavior cabling requirements and other potential hardware related problems refer to the installation guide you received with the switch HP periodically places switch software updates on the HP ProCurve web site HP recommends that you check this web site for software updates that may have fixed a problem you are experiencing For information on support and warranty provisions see the Support and Warranty booklet shipped with the switch Troubleshooting Approaches Use these approache
317. nk Groups While the web browser interface does not enable you to configure a port trunk group it does provide a view of an existing trunk group To view any port trunk groups Click on the Status tab Click on Port Status Trunk Group Operation Using LACP The switch can automatically configure a dynamic LACP trunk group or you can manually configure a static LACP trunk group LACP requires full duplex FDx links of the same media type 10 100Base T 100FX etc andthe same speed and enforces speed and duplex conformance across a trunk group LACP trunk status commands include Trunk Display Method Static LACP Trunk Dynamic LACP Trunk CLI show lacp command Included in listing Included in listing CLI show trunk command Included in listing Not included Port Trunk Settings screen in menu interface Included in listing Not included Thus to display a listing of dynamic LACP trunk ports you must use the show lacp command 12 18 Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration Note Dynamic LACP trunks operate only in the default VLAN unless GVRP is enabled and Forbid is used to prevent the trunked ports from joining the default VLAN Thus if an LACP dynamic trunk forms using ports that are not in the default VLAN the trunk will automatically move to the default VLAN unless GVRP operation is configured to prevent this from occurring In some cases this can create a traffic loop in your network For more on this to
318. nking Port Status and Configuration Important Menu Viewing and Configuring a Static Trunk Group Configure port trunking before you connect the trunked links to another switch routing switch or server Otherwise a broadcast storm could occur If you need to connect the ports before configuring them for trunking you can temporarily disable the ports until the trunk is configured See Using the CLI To Configure Ports on page 10 10 To View and or Configure Static Port Trunking This procedure uses the Port Trunk Settings screen to configure a static port trunk group on the switch 1 Follow the procedures in the Important note above 2 From the Main Menu Select 2 Switch Configuration 2 Port Trunk Settings 3 Press E for Edit and then use the arrow keys to access the port trunk parameters CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Switch Configuration Port Trunk Settings Enabled Flow Ctrl Group 10 100Tx 10 100Tx Disable 10 100Tx Disable 10 100Tx Disable These two columns indicate 10 100Tx Disable static trunk status 10 100Tx Disable For dynamic LACP trunk status use the CLI show lacp Actions gt Cancel Save Help command page 12 14 Select Yes to enable the port No to disable Use arrow keys to change field selection lt Space gt to toggle field choices and lt Enter gt to go to Actions Figure 12 4 Example of the Menu Screen for Configuring a Port Trunk Group 4 Inthe Group column
319. nly SNMPv3 agents with the snmpv3 only command A second option is to restrict write access to only SNMPv3 agents with the snmpv3 restricted access command Caution Restricting access to only version 3 messages will make the community named public inaccessible to network management applications such as auto discovery traffic monitoring SNMP trap generation and threshold setting Syntax no snmpv3 enable Enable and disable the switch for access from SNMPv3 agents This includes the creation of the initial user record no snmpv3 only Enables or disables restrictions to access from only SNMPv3 agents When enabled the switch rejects all non SNMPv3 messages no snmpv3 restricted access Enables or disables restrictions from allnon SNMPv83 agents to read only access show snmpv3 enable Displays the operating status of SNMPv3 show snmpv3 only Displays the status of message reception of non SNMPv3 messages show snmpvs restricted access Displays the status of write messages of non SNMPv3 messages 13 6 Configuring for Network Management Applications Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch SNMPv3 Enable The snmpv3 enable command starts a dialog that performs three functions enabling the switch to receive SNMPv3 messages configuring the initial users and optionally to restrict non version 3 messages to read only Figure 13 1 shows and example of this dialog Note For most SNMPv3 manageme
320. nning Tree Operation IP Configuration SNMP Community Names IP Authorized Managers OMOANHUOKPUWUNE VLAN Menu Return to Main Menu Displays the menu to activate and configure or deactivate VLAN support To select menu item press item number or highlight item and press lt Enter gt Needs reboot to activate changes Figure 3 7 Indication of a Configuration Change Requiring a Reboot To activate changes indicated by the asterisk go to the Main Menu and select the Reboot Switch option Executing the write memory command in the CLI does not affect pending configuration changes indicated by an asterisk in the menu interface That is only a reboot from the menu interface or a boot or reload command from the CLI will activate a pending configuration change indicated by an asterisk 3 13 Using the Menu Interface Menu Features List Menu Features List Status and Counters General System Information Switch Management Address Information Port Status Port Counters Address Table Port Address Table Spanning Tree Information Switch Configuration System Information Port Trunk Settings Network Monitoring Port Spanning Tree Operation IP Configuration SNMP Community Names IP authorized Managers VLAN Menu Console Passwords Event Log Command Line CLI Reboot Switch Download OS Run Setup Stacking Logout Stacking Status This Switch Stacking Status All Stack Configurati
321. nnot be redirected to other communities Thus if you change or delete the default public community name these traps will be lost Thresholds The switch automatically sends all messages resulting from thresholds to the network management station s that set the thresholds regardless of the trap receiver configuration In the default configuration there are no trap receivers configured and the authentication trap feature is disabled From the CLI you can configure up to ten SNMP trap receivers to receive SNMP traps from the switch As an option you can also configure the switch to send Event Log messages as traps CLI Configuring and Displaying Trap Receivers Trap Receiver Commands Page show snmp server 13 21 snmp server host 13 22 lt ip addr gt lt community name gt none all non infol critical debug snmp server enable traps authentication 13 22 13 20 Configuring for Network Management Applications Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch Using the CLI To List Current SNMP Trap Receivers This command lists the currently configured trap receivers and the setting for authentication traps along with the current SNMP community name data see SNMP Communities on page 18 12 Syntax show snmp server Displays current community and trap receiver data In the next example the show snmp server command shows that the switch has been previously configured to send SNMP traps to management stations
322. not configured for any trunking Active The port automatically sends LACP protocol packets Passive The port does not automatically send LACP protocol packets and responds only if it receives LACP protocol packets from the opposite device A link having either two active LACP ports or one active port and one passive port can perform dynamic LACP trunking A link having two passive LACP ports will not perform LACP trunking because both ports are waiting for an LACP protocol packet from the opposite device Note In the default switch configuration all ports are configured for passive LACP operation TrkX This port has been manually configured into a static LACP trunk Trunk Group Same as Port Number The port is configured for LACP but is not a member of a port trunk Up The port has an active LACP link and is not blocked or in Standby mode Down The port is enabled but an LACP link is not established This can indicate for example a port that is not connected to the network or a speed mismatch between a pair of linked ports Disabled The port cannot carry traffic Blocked LACP STP or FEC has blocked the port The port is not in LACP Standby mode This may be due to a trunk negotiation very brief or a configuration error such as differing port speeds on the same link or attempting to connect the switch to more than the maximum number of supported trunks Standby The port is configured for dynamic LACP trunking to another devic
323. nt software to be able to create new users they SNMP must have an initial user record clone These records can be downgraded Version 3 given fewer features but not upgraded with new features added For this Initial Users reason HP recommends that you create a second user with SHA and DES at when you enable SNMPv3 HP Switch config smmpy3 enable SNMPyv3 Initialization process Enable Creating user initial Authentication Protocol MDS Enter authentication password Privacy protocol is DES Enter privacy password Create initial user models for SNMPv3 management applications User initial is created Would you like to create a user that uses SHA p Enter user name templateSHa Authentication Protocol SHA Enter authentication password Privacy protocol is DES Set restriction on Enter privacy password non SNMPv3 messages 7 User creation is done SNMPy3 is now functional Would you like to restrict SNMPvl and SNMPvZc messages to have read only access you can set this later by the command snmp restrict access n Figure 13 1 Example of SNMP version 3 Enable Command 13 7 Configuring for Network Management Applications Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch SNMP Version 3 Users The second step to using SNMPv3 on the switch is to configure the users that you assign to different groups To establish users on the switch a Add the users to the U
324. ntaining a specific keyword either since the last boot or all events recorded Syntax show logging a lt search text gt HPswitch gt show logging Lists recorded log messages since last reboot HPswitch gt show logging a Lists all recorded log messages including those before the last reboot HPswitch gt show logging a system Lists log messages with system in the text or module name HPswitch gt show logging system Lists all log messages since the last reboot that have system in the text or module name C 26 Troubleshooting Using Logging To Identify Problem Sources Debug and Syslog Operation You can direct switch debug Event log messages to these destinations m Upto six SyslogD servers m One management access session through e A direct connect RS 232 console CLI session e A Telnet session e An SSH session HPswitch tconfig gt debug destination session HPswitch config gt EUNT I 61 61 96 65 63 45 ports port AI is now off line EUNT I 61 61 96 65 03 45 vlan ULAN_2 virtual LAN disabled EUNT I 61 61 96 03 ip ULAN_2 network disabled on 18 255 120 1 EUNT I 61 61 7906 03 ports port A18 is Blocked by LACP EUNT I 61 61 96 03 ports port A18 is now on line EUNT I 61 61 96 03 vlan ULAN_26 virtual LAN enabled EUNT I 61 61 96 03 5 ip ULAN_2 network enabled on 18 255 120 1 Figure C 9 Example of Debug Output to a Console CLI Session Debug logging requires a loggi
325. nts since the last reboot For example suppose that you notice the following three messages at the end of the current Event Log message listing W 08 17 03 11 28 05 chassis Over temperature detected Failures 1 I 08 17 03 11 33 23 chassis Temperature back to normal Failures 1 W 08 17 03 12 03 18 chassis Over temperature detected Failures 2 Figure C 1 Chassis Over Temperature Messaging The above messages indicate that the switch detected the following chassis conditions since the last reboot 1 An over temperature condition occurred on August 17 2003 at 11 28 05 meaning the switch was operating above its acceptable internal temper ature range The Failure value of 1 indicates this is the first over temperature condition to occur since the last reboot 2 The switch returned to its acceptable temperature range at 11 33 23 on the same day To determine this temperature range refer to the Installa tion and Getting Started Guide shipped with the switch 3 Another over temperature condition occurred on August 17th at 12 03 18 and the switch is currently operating in this condition The Failure value of 2 indicates this is the second over temperature condition to occur since the last reboot CAUTION If an over temperature condition occurs in a Switch Series 2800 device continued operation can result in damage to the device m Checkthe event log for fan failure warnings Ifthe switch has experienced a fan failure
326. o non default settings including Enable Disable Mode speed and duplex Flow Control Broadcast Limit Auto MDIX Jumbo Packets on the Series 2800 Switches QoS Pass Through Mode for Series 2800 Switches Configuring Port Based Priority for Incoming Packets on the 4100gl and 6108 Switches m Using Friendly Optional Port Names Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters Port Status and Configuration Features Feature Default Menu CLI Web viewing port status n a page 10 6 page 10 7 page 10 17 configuring ports See Table 10 1 page 10 7 page 10 10 page 10 17 on pages 10 4 and 10 5 If the switch either fails to show a link between an installed transceiver and another device or demonstrates errors or other unexpected behavior on the link check the port configuration on both devices for a speed and or duplex mode mismatch To check the mode setting for a port on the switch use either the Port Status screen in the menu interface page 10 6 or show interfaces brief in the CLI page 10 7 Port Status and Basic Configuration Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters Table 10 1 Status and Parameters for Each Port Type Status or Description Parameter Enabled Yes default The port is ready for a network connection No The port will not operate even if properly connected in a network Use this setting for example if the port needs to be shut down for diagnostic purposes or while you
327. o the following if there is an attempt to configure either option when the other is already configured RADIUS TACACS authentication for ssh sessions and secure file transfer scp sftp may not be configured simultaneously To provide username password authentication on a switch providing SCP or SFTP support use the switch s local username password facility Otherwise you can use the switch s local public key for authentication Some clients such as PSCP PuTTY SCP automatically compare switch host keys for you Other clients require you to manually copy and paste keys to the HOME ssh known_hosts file Whatever SCP SFTP software tool you use after installing the client software you must verify that the switch host keys are available to the client Because the third party software utilities you may use for SCP SFTP vary you should refer to the documentation provided with the utility you select before performing this process SCP SFTP Operating Notes m When an SFTP client connects the switch provides a file system display ing all of its available files and folders No file or directory creation is permitted by the user Files may only be uploaded or downloaded accord ing to the permissions mask All of the necessary files the switch will need are already in place on the switch You do not need to nor can you create new files m The switch supports one SFTP session or one SCP session at a time A 10 File Transfers D
328. o verify that the trunked ports are operating properly CLI Viewing and Configuring a Static or Dynamic Port Trunk Group Trunk Status and Configuration Commands show trunks below show lacp page 12 14 trunk page 12 16 interface lacp page 12 16 Using the CLI To View Port Trunks You can list the trunk type and group for all ports on the switch or for selected ports You can also list LACP only status information for LACP configured ports Listing Static Trunk Type and Group for All Ports or Selected Ports Syntax show trunks lt port list gt Omitting the lt port list gt parameter results in a static trunk data listing for all LAN ports in the switch For example in a switch where ports A4 and A5 belong to Trunk 1 and ports A7 and A8 belong to Trunk 2 you have the options shown in figures 12 6 and 12 7 for displaying port data for ports belonging to static trunks 12 12 Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration Using a port list specifies for switch ports in a static trunk group only the ports you want to view In this case the command specifies ports A5 through AT However because port AG is not in a static trunk group it does not appear in the resulting listing Port A5 appears with an example of a name that you can optionally assign using the Friendly Port Names feature See Using Friendly Optional Port Names on page 10 34 HPswitch gt show trunks a5 a7 Load Balancing Port
329. odes E Unknown Devices HHC Network Map H E Policies E ii mA F ae FHF F e Discovery running 2 Administrator Figure 2 4 Example of the Home Page for HP ProCurve Manager Plus Selecting a Management Interface Advantages of Using HP ProCurve Manager or HP ProCurve Manager Plus PCM and PCM enable greater control uptime and performance in your network m Features and benefits of HP ProCurve Manager Network Status Summary Upon boot up a network status screen displays high level information on network devices end nodes events and traffic levels From here users can research any one of these areas to get more details Alerts and Troubleshooting An events summary screen displays alerts to the user and categorizes them by severity making it easier to track where bottlenecks and issues exist in the network Alerts present detailed information on the problem even down to the spe cific port Automatic Device Discovery This feature is customized for fast discovery of all HP ProCurve manageable network devices The user can define which IP subnets to discover Topology and Mapping This feature automatically creates a map of discovered network devices Maps are color coded to reflect device status and can be viewed at multiple levels physical view subnet view or VLAN view Device Management Many device focused tasks can be performe
330. oducts and services Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein Hewlett Packard assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that is not furnished by Hewlett Packard Warranty See the Customer Support Warranty booklet included with the product A copy of the specific warranty terms applicable to your Hewlett Packard products and replacement parts can be obtained from your HP Sales and Service Office or authorized dealer Hewlett Packard Company 8000 Foothills Boulevard m s 5551 Roseville California 95747 5551 hitp www hp com go hpprocurve Contents Getting Started Contents sss Yates det eee eat Sead ye PT RO 1 1 IMtPOdUCTION erasoten es eee a ate ee ae als alle ears bela often E E 1 2 About the Feature Descriptions 00 0 cece eee eee eee 1 2 CONVENTIONS is secede Pe Eee ood hee hee abe 1 3 Command Syntax Statements 00 02 e eee eee eee 1 3 Command Prompts 00 0 cece eee eee eee eee n eens 1 3 Screen Simulations 0 eaae ee eee eee eee eens 1 4 Port Identity Convention for Examples 020 2 cee eens 1 4 Related Publications 00 5 c cucisaceacng EEEa E aoe ales Sagal d 1 4 Getting Documentation From the Web 00 0200 cee eee ee 1 6 Sources for More Information 00 0 cece e
331. om Primary Flash This command always boots the switch from primary flash and executes the complete set of subsystem self tests Syntax boot For example to boot the switch from primary flash with pending configuration changes in the running config file HPswitch config boot Device will be rebooted do you want to continue y n y Boot from primary flash Do you want to save current configuration y n Figure 6 13 Example of Boot Command Default Primary Flash In the above example typing either a y or n at the second prompt initiates the reboot operation Also if there are no pending configuration changes in the running config file then the reboot commences without the pause to display Boot from primary flash Booting from a Specified Flash This version of the boot command gives you the option of specifying whether to reboot from primary or secondary flash and is the required command for rebooting from secondary flash This option also executes the complete set of subsystem self tests Syntax boot system flash lt primary secondary gt For example to reboot the switch from secondary flash when there are no pending configuration changes in the running config file HPswitch config boot system flash secondary Device will be rebooted do you want to continue y n y Boot from secondary flash Do you want to save current configuration y n Figure 6 14 Example of Boot Command with Primary Secondary
332. om the config ured SNTP server You can configure one server using the menu interface or up to three servers using the CLI sntp server command This option provides increased security over the Broadcast mode by specifying which time server to use instead of using the first one detected through a broadcast Overview Selecting a Time Synchronization Protocol or Turning Off Time Protocol Operation General Steps for Running a Time Protocol on the Switch l 2 Select the time synchronization protocol SNTP or TimeP the default Enable the protocol The choices are e SNTP Broadcast or Unicast e TimeP DHCP or Manual Configure the remaining parameters for the time protocol you selected The switch retains the parameter settings for both time protocols even if you change from one protocol to the other Thus if you select a time protocol the switch uses the parameters you last configured for the selected protocol 9 3 Time Protocols SNTP Viewing Selecting and Configuring Note that simply selecting a time synchronization protocol does not enable that protocol on the switch unless you also enable the protocol itself step 2 above For example in the factory default configuration TimeP is the selected time synchronization method However because TimeP is disabled in the factory default configuration no time synchronization protocol is running Disabling Time Synchronization You can use either of the follo
333. ommand Directs the switch to poll a specific server for SNTP time synchronization Requires at least one server address Directs the switch to acquire its time synchronization from data broadcast by any SNTP server to the network broadcast address The switch uses the first server detected and ignores any others However if the Poll Interval expires three times without the switch detecting a time update from the original server it the switch accepts a broadcast time update from the next server it detects In Unicast Mode Specifies how often the switch polls the designated SNTP server for a time update In Broadcast Mode Specifies how often the switch polls the network broadcast address for a time update Used only when the SNTP Mode is set to Unicast Specifies the IP address of the SNTP server that the switch accesses for time synchronization updates You can configure up to three servers one using the menu or CLI and two more using the CLI See SNTP Unicast Time Polling with Multiple SNTP Servers on page 9 21 Default 3 range 1 7 Specifies the SNTP software version to use and is assigned on a per server basis The version setting is backwards compatible For example using version 3 means that the switch accepts versions 1 through 3 Menu Viewing and Configuring SNTP To View Enable and Modify SNTP Time Protocol 1 From the Main Menu select 2 Switch Configuration 1 System Information Time Protocol
334. ommunity 13 5 publication data 1 ii Q quick configuration 3 8 quick start 1 8 8 4 R reboot 3 8 3 10 3 12 reboot actions causing 6 3 reboot effect on configuration 3 13 reconfigure 3 10 remote session terminate 7 8 reset 3 12 6 10 Reset button restoring factory default configuration C 43 reset port counters B 10 resetting the switch factory default reset C 43 restricted access 13 14 restricted write access 13 13 RFC See MIB RFC 1493 13 4 RFC 1515 13 4 RMON 13 4 router gateway 8 6 RS 232 2 4 running config viewing 6 5 See also configuration S SCP SFTP session limit A 10 secure copy See SCP SFTP secure FTP See SCP SFTP security 5 11 7 3 Self Test LED behavior during factory default reset C 43 serial number B 6 session See debug logging setting fault detection policy 5 23 setup screen 1 8 8 4 severity code event log C 23 show tech C 40 slow network C 8 SNMP 13 3 CLI commands 13 13 communities 13 4 13 5 13 13 13 14 Communities screen 13 12 configure 13 4 13 5 IP 13 3 public community 13 5 13 14 restricted access 13 14 thresholds 13 20 traps 13 4 13 20 traps well known 13 20 SNMP communities configuring with the CLI 13 16 configuring with the menu 13 14 SNMPv3 public community access caution 13 6 access
335. on Stack Management Available in Stack Commander Only Stack Access Available in Stack Commander Only 3 14 Using the Menu Interface Where To Go From Here Where To Go From Here This chapter provides an overview of the menu interface and how to use it The following table indicates where to turn for detailed information on how to use the individual features available through the menu interface Option Turn to To use the Run Setup option Refer to the nstallation and Getting Started Guide shipped with the switch To use the HP ProCurve Stack Manager See the chapter on stack management in the Advanced Traffic Management Guide To view and monitor switch status and Appendix B Monitoring and Analyzing Switch counters Operation To learn how to configure and use Refer to the Access Security Guide for your passwords and other security features switch To learn how to use the Event Log Using Logging To Identify Problem Sources on page C 23 To learn how the CLI operates Chapter 4 Using the Command Line Interface CLI To download software the OS Appendix A File Transfers For a description of how switch Switch Memory and Configuration on page 6 1 memory handles configuration changes For information on other switch See the Table of Contents at the front of this features and how to configure them manual 3 15 Using the Menu Interface Where To Go From Here This page is
336. on Apply Changes To access the web based help provided for the switch click on in the web browser screen 7 14 Configuring IP Addressing Contents OVGEVIOW ibid eis AAA BA tS Held sion nd wa eee Eta ee eek 8 2 IP Configuration 40 wah iets ees 4 EE wed one Rae be 8 3 Just Want a Quick Start with IP Addressing 8 4 IP Addressing with Multiple VLANs 00 02 e eee 8 4 IP Addressing in a Stacking Environment 4 8 5 Menu Configuring IP Address Gateway and Time To Live TTL 8 5 CLI Configuring IP Address Gateway and Time To Live TTL 8 7 Web Configuring IP Addressing 0 00 eee eee eee 8 11 How IP Addressing Affects Switch Operation 8 11 DHCP Bootp Operation 0 00 c eee ee eee eee 8 12 Network Preparations for Configuring DHCP Bootp 8 15 IP Preserve Retaining VLAN 1 IP Addressing Across Configuration File Downloads EEEE MA A Le es Uhl dD hee lee ea a ed oh 8 16 8 1 Configuring IP Addressing Overview Overview You can configure IP addressing through all of the switch s interfaces You can also m Easily edit a switch configuration file to allow downloading the file to multiple switches without overwriting each switch s unique gateway and VLAN 1 IP addressing m Assign up to seven secondary IP addresses to a VLAN multinetting Why Configure IP Addressing In its factory de
337. onfig show vlans Indicates which static VLANs are configured to Status and Counters VLAN Information enable jumbo packets Maximum VLANs to support 8 Primary VLAN DEFAULT_VLAN Management VLAN 802 10 VLAN ID Name Status Voicg Jumbo ee eee eee eee ee eee ee ee eee eee eee ee eee DEFAULT_V VLAN VLANS VLAN22 Figure 10 4 Example Listing of Static VLANs To Show Jumbo Status Per VLAN Syntax show vlans ports lt port list gt Lists the static VLANs to which the specified port s belong including the Jumbo column to indicate which VLANs are configured to support jumbo traffic Entering only one port in lt port list gt results in a list of all VLANs to which that port belongs Entering multiple ports in lt port list gt results in a superset list that includes the VLAN memberships of all ports in the list even though the individual ports in the list may belong to different subsets of the complete VLAN listing For example if port 1 belongs to VLAN 1 port 2 belongs to VLAN 10 and port 3 belongs to VLAN 15 then executing this command with a lt port list gt of 1 3 results in a listing of all three VLANs even though none of the ports belong to all three VLANS Refer to figure 10 5 10 20 Port Status and Basic Configuration Jumbo Packets on the Series 2800 Switches Indicates which static VLANs are configured to enable jumbo packets HPswitch show vlans ports 1 3 i 3 Status and C
338. onfiguration context level to set the broadcast limit for all ports on the switch Series 2800 Switches The broadcast limit command operates at the port context level to set the broadcast limit on a per port basis In this example ports A7 and A8 have previously been configured as a trunk group Menu Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters From the menu interface you can configure and view all port parameter settings and view all port status indicators Using the Menu To View Port Status The menu interface displays the status for ports and if configured a trunk group From the Main Menu select Status and Counters Port Status Sessssssssssssssssssssssss CONSOLE MANAGER MODE ss s ss ssssssssssssssscces Status and Counters Port Status Intrusion Flow Port Type Alert Enabled Status Mode Ctrl 10 100TX No Yes U 10HDx A2 10 100TX No Yes Up 100FDx off A3 10 100TX No Yes Up 100FDx off Ad 10 100TX No Yes Up 100FDx off AS 10 100TX No Yes Up 100FDx off A6b 10 100TX No Yes Up 10HDx off A Trk2 10 100TX No Yes Up 100FDx off A8 Trk2 10 100TX No Yes Up 100FDx off Ad 10 100TX No Yes Down 10HDx off A10 10 100TxZ No Yes Down 10HDx off All 10 7100TX No Yes Up 10HDx off Actions gt Return to previous sc Use up down arrow keys to scroll to other entries left right arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Figure 10 1 Example of the Port Status S
339. onfigure standby links for a trunk by including more than the maximum number of allowed ports in a dynamic LACP trunk configuration When the maimum number of allowed ports trunk links are up the remaining link s will be held in standby status If a trunked link that is Up fails it will be replaced by a standby link which maintains your intended bandwidth for the trunk See also the Standby entry under Port Status in table 12 5 LACP Port Status Data on page 12 22 In the next example ports Al through A5 have been configured for the same dynamic LACP trunk even though a maximum of four ports are allowed in a trunk by the switch Notice that one of the links shows Standby status while the remaining four links are Up 12 14 Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration HPswitch gt show lacp LACP PORT LACP TRUNK PORT LACP LACP NUMB ENABLED GROUP STATUS PARTNER STATUS AL Success Up Links AZ Up Success AS Up Success g Up Success A5 Active Standby Success Standby Link px eee Fee Figure 12 9 Example of a Dynamic LACP Trunk with One Standby Link Using the CLI To Configure a Static or Dynamic Trunk Group Important Configure port trunking before you connect the trunked links between switches Otherwise a broadcast storm could occur If you need to connect the ports before configuring them for trunking you can temporarily disable the ports until the trunk is configured See Using th
340. onfigured Status VID IP Address Subnet Mask Secondary 20 10 26 33 101 255 255 240 0 Secondary 20 10 27 33 101 255 255 240 0 HPswitch config vlan 20 1 Go to VLAN 20 a HPswitch vlan 20 ip address 10 26 33 101 20 3 Y HPswitch vlan 20 ip address 10 27 33 101 20 2 Configure two secondary IP addresses on VLAN HPswitch vlan 20 show ip 20 Internet IP Service 3 Display IP addressing In a show ip listing the first IP IP Routing Disabled address listed for a VLAN is always that VLAN s pri IP add Default Gateway 2 SO Sans Default TTL 64 Note AVLAN s secondary IP l IP Config IP Address Subnet Mask entries are listed below the DEFAULT_VLAN Manual 10 20 30 255 255 240 VLAN s name and primary IP VLAN_20 Manual 10 25 33 255 255 240 address Manual 10 26 33 255 255 240 0 10 27 33 101 255 255 240 Manual Figure 8 4 Example of Configuring and Displaying a Multinetted VLAN 8 9 Configuring IP Addressing IP Configuration If you then wanted to multinet the default VLAN you would do the following HPswitch vlan 20 vlan 1 HPswitch vlan 1 ip address 10 21 30 100 20 HPswitch vlan 1 show ip Internet IP Service IP Routing Disabled Default Gateway Default TTL 64 IP Config Address Subnet Mask The secondary IP l cea a DEFAULT _VLAN f Manual 20 30 100 immediately after the awi Vee e To ae i IP add jas I Manua 33 A Manual eee ee
341. onfigured on the Switch 1 From the Main Menu Select 1 Status and Counters 2 Switch Management Address Information If the switch has only the default VLAN the following screen appears If the switch has multiple static VLANs each is listed with its address data Status and Counters Management Address Information Time Server Address Disabled Switch Base or Default MAC Address 0001e7 a0990 lt _ VLAN MAC address IP Address 10 28 227 103 Fores Current IP Address Actions gt ees Assigned to the Switch Return to previous screen Use arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Figure D 1 Example of the Management Address Information Screen D 3 MAC Address Management Determining MAC Addresses in the Switch Note CLI Viewing the Port and VLAN MAC Addresses The MAC address assigned to each switch port is used internally by such features as Flow Control and the Spanning Tree Protocol Using the walkmib command to determine the MAC address assignments for individual ports can sometimes be useful when diagnosing switch operation The switch allots 24 MAC addresses per slot For a given slot if a three port module is installed then the switch uses the first three MAC addresses in the allotment for slot 1 and the remaining 21 MAC addresses are unused If a six port module is installed the switch uses the first six MAC addresses in the allotment and so o
342. ontact and location North Data Room data from previous commands Mac Age Interval sec Additional System Time Zone Information Daylight Time Rule Firmware revision Base MAC Addr 0001e7 a0ec00 ROM Version Serial Number 5000394041 Up Time i Memory Total 25 096 312 CPU Util i Free 20 087 448 IP Mgmt Pkts Rx Packet Total 832 Pkts Tx O Buffers Free 783 Lowest 768 MORE next page Space next line Enter quit Control C Figure 7 8 System Information Listing After Executing the Preceding Commands 7 12 Note Interface Access and System Information System Information Reconfigure the Age Time for Learned MAC Addresses This com mand corresponds to the MAC Age Interval in the menu interface and is expressed in seconds Syntax mac age time lt 10 1000000 gt seconds For example to configure the age time to seven minutes HPswitch config mac age time 420 Configure the Time Zone and Daylight Time Rule These commands m Set the time zone you want to use m Define the daylight time rule for keeping the correct time when daylight saving time shifts occur Syntax time timezone lt 720 840 gt time daylight time rule lt none alaska continental us and canada middle europe and portugal southern hemisphere western europe user defined gt n East of the 0 meridian the sign is West of the 0 meridian the sign is For exampl
343. ontext the i wonttor first block of l 3 name lt name str gt commands in I he listi tagged lt ethernet port list gt the f listing forbid lt ethernet port list gt show the untagged lt ethernet ort list gt commandsthat gt st l P aot will affect only vlan 100 l l interface lt ethernet port list gt vian lt vlan id gt boot Th oF configure e remaining commands in ai ies the listing are end Manager erase Operator and getNIB context kill commands iog page print MORE N Figure 4 10 Context Specific Commands Affecting VLAN Context 4 15 Using the Command Line Interface CLI CLI Control and Editing CLI Control and Editing Keystrokes Ctrl A Ctrl B or Ctrl C Ctrl D Ctrl E Ctrl F or Ctrl K Ctrl L or Ctrl R Ctrl N or Ctrl P or Ctrl U or Ctrl X Ctrl W Esc B Esc D Esc F Delete or Backspace Function Jumps to the first character of the command line Moves the cursor back one character Terminates a task and displays the command prompt Deletes the character at the cursor Jumps to the end of the current command line Moves the cursor forward one character Deletes from the cursor to the end of the command line Repeats current command line on a new line Enters the next command line in the history buffer Enters the pre
344. ootp reply provides information for downloading a config uration file the switch uses TFTP to download the file from the designated source then reboots itself This assumes that the switch or VLAN has 8 15 Configuring IP Addressing IP Preserve Retaining VLAN 1 IP Addressing Across Configuration File Downloads connectivity to the TFTP file server specified in the reply that the config uration file is correctly named and that the configuration file exists in the TFTP directory IP Preserve Retaining VLAN 1 IP Addressing Across Configuration File Downloads IP Preserve enables you to copy a configuration file to multiple switches that use the same operating system software while retaining the individual IP address and subnet mask on VLAN 1 in each switch and the Gateway IP address assigned to the switch This enables you to distribute the same configuration file to multiple switches without overwriting their individual IP addresses Operating Rules for IP Preserve When ip preserve is entered as the last line in a configuration file stored on a TFTP server m Iftheswitch s current IP address for VLAN 1 was not configured by DHCP Bootp IP Preserve retains the switch s current IP address subnet mask and IP gateway address when the switch downloads the file and reboots The switch adopts all other configuration parameters in the configuration file into the startup config file m If the switch s current IP addressing
345. or if you are not using VLANs HP recommends that you use the Switch Setup screen to quickly configure IP addressing To do so do one of the following Enter setup at the CLI Manager level prompt HPswitch setup m Inthe Main Menu of the Menu interface select 8 Run Setup For more on using the Switch Setup screen see the Installation and Getting Started Guide you received with the switch To Set Up and Install the Switch in Your Network Use the Installation and Getting Started Guide shipped with your switch for the following Notes cautions and warnings related to installing and using the switch and its related modules Instructions for physically installing the switch in your network m Quickly assigning an IP address and subnet mask set a Manager password and optionally configure other basic features m Interpreting LED behavior For the latest version of the Installation and Getting Started Guide and other documentation for your switch visit to the HP ProCurve website Refer to Getting Documentation From the Web on page 1 6 1 8 Selecting a Management Interface Contents OVERVIEW naho hein BAA AS iea e piai Ari a a wha eee E RA aA 2 2 Understanding Management Interfaces 020 eanne 2 2 Advantages of Using the Menu Interface 0 0020200 2 3 Advantages of Using the CLI 2 0 0 0 cece eee eee 2 4 Advantages of Using the HP Web Browser Interface
346. or unicast mode enables SNTP However for Unicast operation you must also specify the IP address of at least one SNTP server The switch allows up to three unicast servers You can use the Menu interface or the CLI to configure one server or to replace an existing Unicast server with another To add a second or third server you must use the CLI For more on SNTP operation with multiple servers see SNTP Unicast Time Polling with Multiple SNTP Servers on page 9 21 Syntax timesync sntp Selects SNTP as the time synchronization method sntp unicast Configures the SNTP mode for Unicast operation sntp server lt ip addr gt version Specifies the SNTP server The default server version is 3 no sntp server lt ip addr gt Deletes the specified SNTP server Time Protocols SNTP Viewing Selecting and Configuring Note Deleting an SNTP server when only one is configured disables SNTP unicast operation For example to select SNTP and configure it with unicast mode and an SNTP server at 10 28 227 141 with the default server version 3 and default poll interval 720 seconds HPswitch config timesync sntp Selects SNTP HPswitch config sntp unicast Activates SNTP in Unicast mode Pswitch config sntp server 10 28 227 141 Specifies the SNTP server and accepts the current SNTP server version default 3 HPswitch contig show sntp SNTP Configuration Time Syne Mode
347. oring HPswitch config no mirror port Selecting or Removing Ports and Static Trunks As Monitoring Sources After you configure a monitor port you can use either the global configuration level or the interface context level to select ports and static trunks as monitoring sources You can also use either level to remove moni toring sources Syntax no interface ethernet lt monitor list gt monitor where lt monitor list gt includes port numbers and static trunk names such as a4 c7 b5 b8 and trk1 Elements in the monitor list can include port numbers and static trunk names at the same time For example with a port such as port A6 configured as the monitoring mirror port you would use either of the following commands to select these ports and static trunks for monitoring e Al through A3 and A5 e Trunks 1 and 2 HPswitch config int e al a3 a5 trkl trk2 monitor Fromthe global config level HPswitch config int e al a3 aS trkl trk2 selects ports HPswitch eth Al A3 A5 Trk1 Trk2 ae and trunks for monitoring Selects the interface context level then SOUIGES selects the ports as monitoring sources Figure B 22 Examples of Selecting Ports and Static Trunks as Monitoring Sources HPswitch eth 41 43 45 no int e a5 monitor These two commands HPswitch eth amp 1 43 45 no monitor gt show how to disable monitoring at the interface context level for HPswitch config no int e a5
348. ormation 7 10 CLI Viewing and Configuring System Information 7 11 Web Configuring System Parameters 02 e ee ee 7 14 Configuring IP Addressing 570 1005 1 eae a ea a a 8 1 OW CTVIOW ose AAE E Bie eh ee ee Aa EN RR ae ETS SAT 8 2 IP Configuratio 3 65 0 8 Sah ee tea ars wid RAE E A BAN ANSE EE Bans 8 3 Just Want a Quick Start with IP Addressing 8 4 IP Addressing with Multiple VLANs 0 2002 e eee ee 8 4 IP Addressing in a Stacking Environment 2 4 8 5 Menu Configuring IP Address Gateway and Time To Live TTL 8 5 CLI Configuring IP Address Gateway and Time To Live TTL 8 7 Web Configuring IP Addressing 00 0 eee eee eee 8 11 How IP Addressing Affects Switch Operation 8 11 DHCP Bootp Operation 00 0 c eee ee eee eee 8 12 Network Preparations for Configuring DHCP Bootp 8 15 IP Preserve Retaining VLAN 1 IP Addressing Across Configuration File Downloads occse cad ieee BRA edn doe Se Miele ek Sey SA Sig ea ioe Es 8 16 Operating Rules for IP Preserve 00 0 eee eee eee 8 16 9 Time Protocols CONLENUES ies ern Patek Sate eh Ee Ha Ba en ak Gos he as 9 1 Overview eranan ee yeti n Manag a eee e Omer ae bad pe ean ea ede E 9 2 TimeP Time Synchronization 00 cece cee eee eee 9 2 SNTP Time Synchronization 0 0 0 cece eee eee eens 9 2
349. ounters VLAN Information for ports 802 10 VLAN ID Name Status VYoice Jumbo DEFAULT_ LAN LAN1O VLAN1S Figure 10 5 Example of Listing the VLAN Memberships for a Range of Ports Syntax show vlans lt vid gt This command shows port membership and jumbo configuration for the specified lt vid gt HPswitch config show vlan 100 Status and Counters VLAN Information Ports VLAN 100 802 10 VLAN ID 100 Name VLAN100 Status Lists the ports belonging to VLAN Voice No 100 and whether the VLAN is Jumbo No enabled for jumbo packet traffic Unknown VLAN Status Figure 10 6 Example of Listing the Port Membership and Jumbo Status for a VLAN 10 21 Port Status and Basic Configuration Jumbo Packets on the Series 2800 Switches Enabling or Disabling Jumbo Traffic on a VLAN Syntax vlan lt vid gt jumbo no vlan lt vid gt jumbo Configures the specified VLAN to allow jumbo packets on all ports on the switch that belong to that VLAN If the VLAN is not already configured on the switch vlan lt vid gt jumbo also creates the VLAN Note that a port belonging to one jumbo VLAN can receive jumbo packets through any other VLAN statically configured on the switch regardless of whether the other VLAN is enabled for jumbo packets The no form of the command disables inbound jumbo traffic on all ports in the specified VLAN that do not also belong to another VL
350. ounters screens available through the switch console interface and or the web browser interface You can access all console screens from the web browser interface via Telnet to the console Telnet access to the switch is available in the Device View window under the Configuration tab Status or Counters Type Interface Purpose Page Menu Access to Status and Menu Access menu interface for status and counter data B 5 Counters General System Information Menu CLI Lists switch level operating information B 6 Management Address Menu CLI Lists the MAC address IP address and IPX network number for B 7 Information each VLAN or if no VLANs are configured for the switch Module Information Menu CLI Lists the module type and description for each slot in which a B 8 module is installed Port Status Menu CLI Displays the operational status of each port B 9 Web Port and Trunk Statistics Menu CLI Summarizes port activity and lists per port flow control status B 10 and Flow Control Status Web VLAN Address Table Menu CLI Lists the MAC addresses of nodes the switch has detected on B 13 specific VLANs with the corresponding switch port Port Address Table Menu CLI Lists the MAC addresses that the switch has learned from the B 13 selected port STP Information Menu CLI Lists Spanning Tree Protocol data for the switch and for individual B 18 ports If VLANs are configured reports on a per VLAN basis IGMP Status Menu CLI Lists IGMP grou
351. oup access levels There are four levels for use with version 3 users and four are used for access by version 2c or version 1 management applications Group Name Group Access Type Group Read View Group Write View managerpriv Ver3 Must have Authentication ManagerReadView ManagerWriteView and Privacy managerauth Ver3 Must have Authentication ManagerReadView ManagerWriteView operatorauth Ver3 Must have Authentication OperatorReadView DiscoveryView operatornoauth Ver3 No Authentication OperatorReadView DiscoveryView commanagerrw Ver2c or Ver1 ManagerReadView ManagerWriteView commanagerr Ver2c or Ver1 ManagerReadView DiscoveryView comoperatorrw Ver2c or Ver1 OperatorReadView OperatorReadView comoperatorr Ver2c or Ver1 OperatorReadView DiscoveryView Each view allows you to view or modify a different set of MIBs m Manager Read View access to all managed objects m Manager Write View access to all managed objects except the follow ing vacmContextTable vacmAccessTable vacmViewTreeFamilyTable OperatorReadView no access to icfSecurityMIB hpSwitchIpTftp Mode vacmContextTable vacmAccessTable vacmViewTreeFami lyTable usmUserTable snmpCommunityTable m Discovery View Access limited to samplingProbe MIB Note All access groups and views are predefined on the switch There is no method to modify or add groups or views to those that are pre defined on the switch 13 11 Configuring for Network Management Applications Using
352. out first time installations and provides an immediate opportunity to set passwords for security and to specify a Fault Detection policy which determines the types of messages that will be displayed in the Alert Log Double click on First Time Install in the Alert log figure 5 1 on page 5 6 The web browser interface then displays the First Time Install window below First Time Install Description The following information presents possible first time settings which can be configured Steps to take during first time installation o It is recommended that you secure access to the device to prevent unauthorized users from manipulating device configuration o You are also encouraged to select the fault detection configuration which best suits your network environment Acknowledge Event Delete Event Figure 5 2 First Time Install Window 5 7 Using the HP Web Browser Interface Tasks for Your First HP Web Browser Interface Session This window is the launching point for the basic configuration you need to perform to set web browser interface passwords to maintain security and Fault Detection policy which determines the types of messages that will be displayed in the Alert Log To set web browser interface passwords click on secure access to the device to display the Device Passwords screen and then go to the next page You can also access the password screen by clicking on the Security tab To set
353. ownloading Switch Software m All files have read write permission Several SFTP commands such as create or remove are not allowed and return an error message The switch displays the following files ta erg running config startup config H 10g crash data crash log event log os primary secondary ssh mgr_keys authorized_keys oper_keys authorized_keys Once you have configured your switch for secure file transfers with SCP and SFTP files can be copied to or from the switch in a secure encrypted environment and TFTP is no longer necessary Using Xmodem to Download Switch Software From a PC or UNIX Workstation This procedure assumes that m The switch is connected via the Console RS 232 port to a PC operating as a terminal Refer to the Installation and Getting Started Guide you received with the switch for information on connecting a PC as aterminal and running the switch console interface The switch software is stored on a disk drive in the PC The terminal emulator you are using includes the Xmodem binary transfer feature For example in the HyperTerminal application included with Windows NT you would use the Send File option in the Transfer dropdown menu Menu Xmodem Download to Primary Flash Note that the menu interface accesses only the primary flash File Transfers Downloading Switch Software 1 From the console Main Menu select 7 Download OS 2 Press
354. performance capabilities HP proactive networking offers through the 8 11 Configuring IP Addressing IP Configuration switch configure the switch with an IP address and subnet mask compatible with your network The following table lists the general features available with and without a network compatible IP address configured Table 8 1 Features Available With and Without IP Addressing on the Switch Features Available Without an IP Address Additional Features Available with an IP Address and Subnet Mask e Direct connect access tothe CLI andthe menu interface e HP web browser interface access with configuration e Stacking Candidate or Stack Member security and diagnostic tools plus the Alert Log for e DHCP or Bootp support for automatic IP address discovering problems detected in the switch along with configuration and DHCP support for automatic Timep suggested solutions server IP address configuration e SNMP network management access such as HP e Spanning Tree Protocol ProCurve Manager network configuration monitoring problem finding and reporting analysis and e Port settings and port trunking recommendations for changes to increase control and e Console based status and counters information for uptime monitoring switch operation and diagnosing problems TACACS RADIUS SSH SSL and 802 1X authentication through the CLI or menu interface Rahn A ase e Multinetting on VLANs e VLANs and GVRP CDP support e Serial
355. pic refer to VLANs and Dynamic LACP on page 12 24 In most cases trunks configured for LACP operate as described in table 12 4 on the next page 12 19 Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration Table 12 4 LACP Trunk Types LACPPortTrunk Operation Configuration Dynamic LACP This option automatically establishes an 802 3ad compliant trunk group with LACP for the port Type parameter and DynX for the port Group name where Xis an automatically assigned value from 1 to 6 2600 2600 PWR 4100gl and 6108 or 1 to 24 2800 depending on how many dynamic and static trunks are currently on the switch The 2600 2600 PWR 4100gl and 6108 switches allow a maximum of six trunk groups in any combination of static and dynamic trunks the 2800 switch allows a maximum of 24 trunk groups in any combination of static and dynamic trunks Under the following conditions the switch automatically establishes a dynamic LACP port trunk group and assigns a port Group name e The ports on both ends of a link have compatible mode settings speed and duplex e The port on one end of a link must be configured for LACP Active and the port on the other end of the same link must be configured for either LACP Passive the default or LACP Active For example Switch 1 Switch 2 Port X Port A LACP Enable Active p Active TO RCtIVE a LACP Enable Active Port Y Port B LACP Enable Active p Active to Passive g LACP Enable
356. ply a comment attached to the preceding key entry Where a public key file has more than one entry ensure that all entries terminate with a new line CR While this is optional for the last entry in the file not adding a new line to the last entry creates an error potential if you either add another key to the file at a later time or change the order of the keys in the file An attempt to copy a client public key file into the switch has failed and the switch lists one of the following messages Download failed overlength key in key file Download failed too many keys in key file Download failed one or more keys is not a valid RSA public key The public key file you are trying to download has one of the following problems m A key in the file is too long The maximum key length is 1024 characters including spaces This could also mean that two or more keys are merged together instead of being separated by a lt CR gt lt LF gt There are more than ten public keys in the key file One or more keys in the file is corrupted or is not a valid rsa public key Client ceases to respond hangs during connection phase The switch does not support data compression in an SSH session Clients will often have compression turned on by default but will disable it during the negotia tion phase A client which does not recognize the compression request FAIL URE response may fail when attempting to connect Ensure that compression i
357. pped from the packet which then exits from the switch without a priority setting Outbound Port Queues and Packet Priority Settings Ports on the HP ProCurve switches have the following outbound port queue structure Switch Model Outbound Port Queues Switch 6108 4 Series 5300x Switch 4 Series 4100gl Switch 3 Series 3400cl Switch Series 2600 2600 PWR Switch 4 Series 2800 Switch 4 Series 2500 Switch 2 Switches 1600M 2400M 2424M 4000M 8000M 2 As shown below these port queues map to the eight priority settings specified in the 802 1p standard Table 10 3 Mapping Priority Settings to Device Queues Queue Assignment in Downstream Devices 802 1p Priority Settings Used Switches with In Tagged VLAN Packets 3 Outbound With Port Queues A Queues 1 low Low Low 2 low Low Low 0 normal priority Normal Normal 3 Normal Normal 4 High Medium 5 High Medium 6 High High 7 high priority High High 8 Queues Low High 2 Queues Low High 10 30 Note Port Status and Basic Configuration Configuring Port Based Priority for Incoming Packets on the 4100gl and 6108 Switches For example suppose you have configured port A10 to assign a priority level of 1 dow m An untagged packet coming into the switch on port A10 and leaving the switch through any other port configured as a tagged VLAN member would leave the switch as a tagged packet with a priority level of 1 m A
358. ps reports queries and port on which querier is B 20 located VLAN Information Menu CLI For each VLAN configured in the switch lists 802 10 VLAN ID and B 21 up down status Port Status Overview and Web Shows port utilization and counters and the Alert Log B 23 Port Counters Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Status and Counters Data Menu Access To Status and Counters Beginning at the Main Menu display the Status and Counters menu by select ing 1 Status and Counters DERRE CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Status and Counters Menu em Information Switch Management Address Information Module Information Port Status Port Counters Vlan Address Table Port Address Table Spanning Tree Information Return to Main Menu OMAN OBFWNE switch management information including software versions To select menu item press item number or highlight item and press lt Enter gt Figure B 1 The Status and Counters Menu Each of the above menu items accesses the read only screens described on the following pages Refer to the online help for a description of the entries displayed in these screens B 5 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Status and Counters Data General System Information Menu Access From the console Main Menu select 1 Status and Counters 1 General System Information ES CONSOLE MANAGER MODE
359. pying a Configuration File from the Switch to a Serially Connected PC or Unix Workstation To use this method the switch must be connected via the serial port to a PC or Unix workstation to which you want to copy the configuration file You will need to m Determine a filename to use Know the directory path you will use to store the the configuration file Syntax copy lt startup config running config gt xmodem lt pc unix gt For example to copy a configuration file to a PC serially connected to the switch 1 Determine the file name and directory location on the PC 2 Execute the following command HPswitch copy startup config xmodem pc 3 After you see the following prompt press Enter Press Enter and start XMODEM on your host 4 Execute the terminal emulator commands to begin the file transfer A 19 File Transfers Transferring Switch Configurations Xmodem Copying a Configuration File from a Serially Connected PC or Unix Workstation To use this method the switch must be connected via the serial port to a PC or Unix workstation on whichis stored the configuration file you want to copy To complete the copying you will need to know the name of the file to copy and the drive and directory location of the file Syntax copy xmodem startup config lt pc unix gt For example to copy a configuration file from a PC serially connected to the switch l 2 3
360. r Interface Session 5 7 Viewing the First Time Install Window 20 5 5 7 Creating Usernames and Passwords in the Browser Interface 5 8 Using the Passwords 000 cece cece eee e eee 5 10 Using the User Names 0000 eee eee eee eens 5 10 If You Lose a Password 0 0 c eee eee eee eens 5 11 Online Help for the HP Web Browser Interface 5 11 Support Mgmt URLs Feature 00 0 cece eee eee 5 12 Support URL 4 3 43 saeei eens eed he ve iwaee ee ehewe ae eas 5 13 Help and the Management Server URL 0 000 e eee 5 13 Status Reporting Features 00 0 cece eee eee eee 5 15 The Overview Window 00 cece cece eee eect n nee 5 15 The Port Utilization and Status Displays 5 16 Port Utilization ccc checenp cg are eta eh ee wrk he bee 5 16 Port Status ssa ka Se CR Ce A Ole ae led Be 5 18 The Alert Log oati 0 eg oh helen ian eee ge de 5 19 Sorting the Alert Log Entries 00 02 00 ee eee 5 19 Alert Types and Detailed Views 0 002s eeee 5 20 Phe Status Bare sits ie teed aA hi te Rive eae Se 5 22 Setting Fault Detection Policy 0 e eee eee eee ee 5 23 Switch Memory and Configuration Contents setak iaa SSN ate oth LD tek Cle oto toad ad each a A Bl 6 1 Overview sieer a ee Ah aa eee Soke ae eee RS inh ea ceentnd aedee ae 6 2 Overview of Co
361. r more information refer to the documentation provided with the PCM software 5 15 Using the HP Web Browser Interface Status Reporting Features Bandwidth Display Control Port Status Indicators The Port Utilization and Status Displays The Port Utilization and Status displays show an overview of the status of the switch and the amount of network activity on each port The following figure shows a sample reading of the Port Utilization and Port Status Port Utilization Bar Graphs Port Utilization Legend E Unicast Rx or All Tx E Non Unicast Pkts Rx B Error Packets Rx Port Connected Port Not Connected Port Disabled Figure 5 9 The Graphs Area Port Utilization The Port Utilization bar graphs show the network traffic on the port with a breakdown of the packet types that have been detected unicast packets non unicast packets and error packets The Legend identifies traffic types and their associated colors on the bar graph Unicast Rx amp All Tx This is all unicast traffic received and all transmitted traffic of any type This indicator a blue color on many systems can signify either transmitted or received traffic Non Unicast Pkts Rx All multicast and broadcast traffic received by the port This indicator a gold color on many systems enables you to know at a glance the source of any non unicast traffic that is causing high utilization of the switch For example if one port is receiv
362. ration File For example consider Figure 8 7 TFTP DHCP Server Server r gt a Management config Station i sree Address Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 VLAN 1 VLAN 1 VLAN 1 VLAN 1 DHCP 10 31 22 101 10 31 22 102 10 31 22 103 iS 3 Switch 4 also copies and implements the Switches 1 through 3 copy and implement the config txt file config txtfile fromthe TFTP server figure 8 8 but from the TFTP server figure 8 8 but retain their current IP acquires new IP addressing from the DHCP Figure 8 7 Example of IP Preserve Operation with Multiple Switches Using the Same OS Software If you apply the following configuration file to figure 8 7 switches 1 3 will retain their manually assigned IP addressing and switch 4 will be configured to acquire its IP addressing from a DHCP server 8 17 Configuring IP Addressing IP Preserve Retaining VLAN 1 IP Addressing Across Configuration File Downloads J48654 Configuration Editor Created on release 4G 07 5X hostname HPswitch time daylight time rule None cdp run interface All no lacp exit T interface A12 no lacp exit trunk A11 A12 Terki Trunk ip default gateway 10 33 32 1 snmp server community public Unrestricted wlan 1 name DEFAULT VLAN ip address dhcep bootp exit password manager assword operator A Pao IP Preserve Command ip preserve Using figure 8 7
363. receive an ip address that is temporarily leased Periodically the switch may be required to renew its lease of the IP configuration Thus the IP addressing provided by the server may be different each time the switch reboots or renews its configuration from the server However you can fix the address assignment for the switch by doing either of the following m Configure the server to issue an infinite lease m Using the switch s MAC address as an identifier configure the server with a Reservation so that it will always assign the same IP address to the switch For MAC address information refer to Appendix D MAC Address Management 8 13 Configuring IP Addressing IP Configuration For more information on either of these procedures refer to the documenta tion provided with the DHCP server Bootp Operation When a Bootp server receives a request it searches its Bootp database for a record entry that matches the MAC address in the Bootp request from the switch If a match is found the configuration data in the associated database record is returned to the switch For many Unix systems the Bootp database is contained in the etc bootptab file In contrast to DHCP operation Bootp configurations are always the same for a specific receiving device That is the Bootp server replies to a request with a configuration previously stored in the server and designated for the requesting device Bootp Database Record Entries
364. reen are blank If you are editing an existing community the values for the currently selected Community appear in the fields Configuring for Network Management Applications Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Switch Configuration SNMP Communities Community Name M MIB View Manager Write Access Restricted Nees Type the value for this field Use the Space bar to select Actions gt Cancel Edit Save Help values for other fields Enter Community Name up to 16 characters case sensitive no spaces Use arrow keys to change field selection lt Space gt to toggle field choices and lt Enter gt to go to Actions Figure 13 6 The SNMP Add or Edit Screen Need Help If you need information on the options in each field press Enter to move the cursor to the Actions line then select the Help option on the Actions line When you are finished with Help press E for Edit to return the cursor to the parameter fields 3 Enter the name you want in the Community Name field and use the Space bar to select the appropriate value in each of the other fields Use the Tab key to move from one field to the next 4 Press Enter then S for Save 13 15 Configuring for Network Management Applications Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch CLI Viewing and Configuring SNMP Community Names Community N
365. rface to ensure that the IP Config parameter is set to DHCP Bootp then refer to DHCP Bootp Operation on page 8 12 To Configure IP Addressing 1 From the Main Menu Select 2 Switch Configuration 5 IP Configuration If multiple VLANs are configured a screen showing all VLANs appears instead of the following screen 8 5 Configuring IP Addressing IP Configuration For descriptions of these parameters see the online Help for this screen Before using the DHCP Bootp option refer to DHCP Bootp Operation on page 8 12 CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Switch Configuration Internet IP Service Default Gateway Default TTL 64 IP Config DHCP Bootp Manual IP Address 15 30 248 184 Subnet Mask 255 255 248 0 Actions gt Edit save Help Cancel changes and return to previous screen Use arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Figure 8 1 Example of the IP Service Configuration Screen without Multiple VLANs Configured 2 Press E for Edit 3 Ifthe switch needs to access a router for example to reach off subnet destinations select the Default Gateway field and enter the IP address of the gateway router 4 Ifyouneed to change the packet Time To Live TTL setting select Default TTL and type in a value between 2 and 255 seconds 5 To configure IP addressing select IP Config and do one of the following e Ifyou want to have the switch retrieve
366. ring Port Parameters HPswitch config show interface config Port Settings Current Configured Mode Type Enabled Mode low Ctrl MDI 10 100TX isable 10 100TX Au isable 10 100TX Au isable 10 100TX Au isable 10 100TX Au isable 10 100TX Au isable 10 100TX Au isable Figure 10 6 Example Show Interface Config Command Listing 2600 Switch Using the CLI To Configure Ports You can configure one or more of the following port parameters For details on each option see Table 10 1 on page 10 4 Syntax no interface lt ethernet port list gt disable enable speed duplex lt 10 half 1100 half 10 full 100 full 1000 full auto auto 10 auto 100 auto 1000 gt flow control Note that in the above syntax you can substitute an int for interface and an e for ethernet that is int e lt port list For example to configure ports C1 through C3 and port C6 for 100 Mbps full duplex you would enter these commands HPswitch config int e cl c3 c6 speed duplex 100 full Similarly to configure a single port with the settings in the above command you could either enter the same command with only the one port identified or go to the context level for that port and then enter the command For example to enter the context level for port C6 and then configure that port for 100FDx HPswitch config int c6 HPswitch eth C6 speed duplex 100 full 10 10 Note Port Statu
367. rived On the source neighbor device the number of the port through which the CDP packet was sent Platform name designated by vendor 1 or R Router 2 Transparent Bridge 4 or B Source Route Bridge 8 or S Switch 16 or H Host 32 or IGMP conditional filtering 64 or r Repeater Displaying CDP Neighbor Data Syntax walkmib CdpCacheEntry Displays the superset of CDP neighbor held in the MIB For example with two CDP devices connected to ports Al and A3 on the switch you would see a walkmib listing similar to this 13 39 Configuring for Network Management Applications CDP CDP MIB datais HPswitch walkmib CdpCacheEntry grouped bytype cdpCacheAddressType I 2 1 i That is the _cdpCache ddressType 3 1 1 a Address Types icdpCacheAddress 1 2 42 3c a4 Ob maldad Te aa oo on ieaie n edpCacheVersion 1 2 Revision F 02 C1 sw code build info f00 the IP edpCacheVersion 3 1 Revision 09 02 sw code build vgro c09 addressesofthe edpCacheDevicelId 1 2 HP ProCurve Switch 2512 005004 18df9c source devices edpCacheDeviceld 3 HP4000 0060b0 fc904b and so on edpCacheDevicePort 12 edpCacheDevicePort A4 edpCachePlatform 1 HP J4812A ProCurve Switch 2512 edpCachePlatform 3 1 HP J4121A ProCurve Switch 4000M edpCacheCapabilities 1 2 8 edpCacheCapabilities 3 1 8 lew I a The first number after the MIB string is the switch port on which the data point for that entry
368. roCurve Manager Plus PCM HP ProCurve Manager and HP ProCurve Manager Plus are designed for installation on a network management workstation For this reason the system requirements are different from the system requirements for accessing the switch s web browser interface from a non management PC or worksta tion For HP PCM and PCM requirements refer to the information provided with the software This procedure assumes that m Youhave installed the recommended web browser ona PC or workstation that serves as your network management station m The networked device you want to access has been assigned an IP address and optionally a DNS name and has been discovered by PCM or PCM For more on assigning an IP address refer to IP Configuration on page 8 3 To establish a web browser session with HP PCM or PCM running do the following on the network management station 1 Make sure the Java applets are enabled for your web browser If they are not refer to the web browser online Help for specific information on enabling the Java applets 2 Inthe Interconnected Devices listing under Network Manager Home in the PCM PCM sidebar right click on the model number of the device you want to access 3 The web browser interface automatically starts with the Status Overview window displayed for the selected device as shown in figure 5 1 If the Registration window appears click on the Status tab 5 5 Using t
369. rompt m Manager level Provides all Operator level privileges plus the ability to perform system level actions that do not require saving changes to the system configuration file The prompt for the Manager level contains only the system name and the delimiter as shown above To select this level enter the enable command at the Operator level prompt and enter the Manager password when prompted For example HPswitch gt enable Enter enable at the Operator prompt HPswitch The Manager prompt Global Configuration level Provides all Operator and Manager level privileges and enables you to make configuration changes to any of the switch s software features The prompt for the Global Configuration level includes the system name and config To select this level enter the config command at the Manager prompt For example HPswitch Enter config at the Manager prompt HP switch config _The Global Config prompt m Context Configuration level Provides all Operator and Manager privileges and enables you to make configuration changes in a specific context such as one or more ports or a VLAN The prompt for the Context Configuration level includes the system name and the selected context For example HPswitch eth 1 HPswitch vlan 10 The Context level is useful for example if you want to execute several commands directed at the same port or VLAN or if you want to shorten the
370. rrent session redo Re execute a command from history reload Warm reboot of the switch repeat Repeat execution of a previous command setmib Set the value of a MIB object setup Enter the Switch Setup screen for basic switch configuration telnet Initiate an outbound telnet session to another network device MORE next page Space next line Enter quit Control C When MORE appears use the Space bar or Return to list additional commands Figure 4 4 Example of the Manager Level Command Listing When MORE appears there are more commands in the listing To list the next set of commands press the Space bar To list the remaining commands one by one repeatedly press Enter Typing at the Global Configuration level or the Context Configuration level produces similar results In a particular context level the first block of command in the listing are the commands that are most relevant to the current context Use Tab To Search for or Complete a Command Word You can use Tab to help you find CLI commands or to quickly complete the current word in a command To do so type one or more consecutive characters in a command and then press Tab with no spaces allowed For example at the Global Configuration level if you press Tab immediately after typing t the CLI displays the available command options that begin with t For example HPswitch config t Tab telnet server ti
371. rt Date Time Description tO Excessive CRC 16 Sep 03 7 58 44 AM Excessive CRC Alignment errors on port 8 alignment errors 86 Firsttime installation 13 Sep 03 3 36 29 PM Important installation information for your switch Refresh Open Event Acknowledge Selected Events i Figure 5 13 Example of the Alert Log Each alert has the following fields of information m Status The level of severity of the event generated Severity levels can be Information Normal Warning and Critical If the alert is new has not yet been acknowledged the New symbol is also in the Status column Alert The specific event identification Date Time The date and time the event was received by the web browser interface This value is shown in the format DD MM YY HH MM SS AM PM for example 16 Sep 99 7 58 44 AM Description A short narrative statement that describes the event For example Excessive CRC Alignment errors on port 8 Sorting the Alert Log Entries The alerts are sorted by default by the Date Time field with the most recent alert listed at the top of the list The second most recent alert is displayed below the top alert and so on If alerts occurred at the same time the simultaneous alerts are sorted by order in which they appear in the MIB The alert field that is being used to sort the alert log is indicated by which column heading is in bold You can sort by any of the other columns by clicking on the column hea
372. rwards traffic on the other 13 36 Switch A CDP Enabled Port Data CDP Neighbor Table Configuring for Network Management Applications CDP Switch B CDP Enabled STP Root Device CDP Packets from Switch B to Switch A CDP Neighbor Table Port Data 7 Port D8 STP block on port C5 of switch A blocks outbound transmission of CDP packets from switch A but does not block inbound packets to switch A from switch B Figure 13 19 Example of STP Effect on CDP Packet Transmission Switch A sends outbound CDP packets on the forwarding link and the switch B CDP Neighbors table shows switch A on only one port Switch B sends outbound CDP packets on both links and the switch A CDP Neighbors table shows switch B on both ports To summarize in a CDP neighbor pair running STP with redundant links if one of the switches is the STP root it transmits CDP packets out all ports connecting the two switches while the other switch transmits CDP packets out only the unblocked port Thus the STP root switch will appear on multiple ports in the non root switch s CDP Neighbors table while the non root switch will appear on only one port in the root switch s CDP Neighbors table How the Switch Selects the IP Address To Include in Outbound CDP Packets Aswitch with CDP enabled uses the following prioritized criteria to determine which IP address to include
373. s ix Trunk Configuration Methods 00 e eee eee eee 12 5 Menu Viewing and Configuring a Static Trunk Group 12 10 CLI Viewing and Configuring a Static or Dynamic Port Trunk Group 00 c cece eee ee eee 12 12 Using the CLI To View Port Trunks 12 12 Using the CLI To Configure a Static or Dynamic Trunk Group 12 15 Web Viewing Existing Port Trunk Groups 12 18 Trunk Group Operation Using LACP 004 12 18 Default Port Operation 0 0 c eee eee eee eee 12 21 LACP Notes and Restrictions 00 0202 ee eee 12 23 Trunk Group Operation Using the Trunk Option 12 25 Trunk Operation Using the FEC Option 12 25 How the Switch Lists Trunk Data 00 00 0002 eee 12 26 Outbound Traffic Distribution Across Trunked Links 12 26 13 Configuring for Network Management Applications Contents ia haat BERR A BRO Sig gd Gao ee 13 1 Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch 0 000 13 3 COVENVICW 38 irk i fe Bg ed A aes bl ALB ote et oe ole ad ad 13 3 SNMP Management Features 0 000 eee eee ee eee eee 13 4 Configuring for SNMP Access to the Switch 13 4 Configuring for SNMP Version 3 Access to the Switch 13 5 SNMP Version 3 Commands 02 00 eee cece eee eee 13 6 SNMPv3 Enable fa eir aac
374. s SNTP Viewing Selecting and Configuring gt SSS SSS SS SSS gt S gt gt CONSOLE MANAGER MODE gt gt gt gt gt gt SSS gt gt gt S gt S gt S gt gt Switch Configuration System Information System Name HPswitch System Contact System Location Inactivity Timeout min 0 0 MAC Age Time sec 300 300 Inbound Telnet Enabled Yes Yes Web Agent Enabled Yes Yes Time Syne Method TIMEP TIMEP lt Time Protocol Selection Parameter TimeP Mode Disabled Disabled TIMEP SNTP Time Zone 0 0 None Daylight Time Rule None None Actions gt Edit Save Help Cancel changes and return to previous screen Use arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Figure 9 1 The System Information Screen Default Values 2 Press E for Edit The cursor moves to the System Name field 3 Use J to move the cursor to the Time Sync Method field 4 Use the Space bar to select SNTP then press 4 once to display and move to the SNTP Mode field 5 Do one of the following e Use the Space bar to select the Broadcast mode then press 1 to move the cursor to the Poll Interval field and go to step 6 For Broadcast mode details see SNTP Operating Modes on page 9 2 Time Syne Method None SNTP SNTP Mode Disabled Broadcast Poll Interval sec 720 Time Zone 0 O Daylight Time Rule None
375. s Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch Overview You can manage the switch via SNMP from a network management station running an application such as HP ProCurve Manager PCM or HP ProCurve Manager Plus PCM For more on PCM and PCM4 visit the HP ProCurve web site at http www hp com go hpprocurve Click on products index in the sidebar then click on the appropriate link appearing under the Network Management heading This section includes m An overview of SNMP management for the switch Configuring the switches for e SNMP Communities page 13 12 e Trap Receivers and Authentication Traps page 13 18 m Information on advanced management through RMON Support page 13 24 To implement SNMP management the switch must have an IP address configured either manually or dynamically using DHCP or Bootp If multiple VLANs are configured each VLAN interface should have its own IP address For DHCP use with multiple VLANs see the chapter on VLANs in the Advanced Traffic Management Guide If you use the switch s Authorized IP Managers and Management VLAN features ensure that the SNMP management station and or the choice of switch port used for SNMP access to the switch are compatible with the access controls enforced by these features Otherwise SNMP access to the switch will be blocked For more on Authorized IP Managers refer to the Access Security Guide on the Documentation CD ROM sh
376. s disabled CDP it is not a CDP neighbor to either B or E No CDP Neighbor Table f This switch drops CDP packets s l Figure 13 12 Example of Incoming CDP Packet Results 13 29 Configuring for Network Management Applications CDP Using the example in figure 13 12 the CDP Neighbor table for switches A and B would appear similar to these Platform Capability XYZ 0050c0 814b01 XYZ Workstation XYZ 0050c0 850a43 EYZ Workstation XYZ 0050c0 850b87 l XYZ Workstation HP4108 0030c1 7fec40 HP J4861A ProCurve Switch Platform Capability Switch A 0030c1 583b39 HP J4861A ProCurve Switch B7 Switch B 0060b0 889e00 HP J4813A ProCurve Switch Note that no CDP devices appear on port B5 which is connected to a device on which CDP is present but disabled Figure 13 13 Example of Viewable CDP Neighbor Table for Switches A and B in Figure 13 6 Thus based on the CDP packets it receives each CDP device maintains a per port data entry for each of its neighbors that are running CDP but not for other CDP devices that are accessible only through a CDP neighbor See the relationship between switches A B and C in figure 13 12 In other words a CDP device will have data on its immediate CDP neighbors including those reached through a device that is transparent to CDP but not to other CDP devices in the network Table 13 3 How Devices Handle Incoming CD
377. s Manual MPS Maintenance Power Signature the signal a PD sends to the switch to indicate that the PD is connected and requires power Refer to figure 3 on page 14 PD Powered Device This is an IEEE 802 3af compliant device that receives its power through a direct connection to a 10 100Base TX PoE RJ 45 port onthe switch Examples of PDs include Voice over IP VoIP telephones wireless access points and remote video cameras port number Refers to the type of power prioritization where within a priority class priority the switch assigns the highest priority to the lowest numbered port the second highest priority to the second lowest numbered port and so on Note that power priority rules apply only if PoE provisioning on the switch becomes oversubscribed PoE Power Over Ethernet the method by which PDs receive power from the switch in compliance with the IEEE 802 3af standard PSE Power Sourcing Equipment A PSE such as a Switch 2626 PWR or 2650 PWR provides power to IEEE 802 3af compliant PDs directly connected to 10 100Base TX PoE RJ 45 ports on the switch The Switch 2626 PWR and 2650 PWR are endpoint PSEs RPS Redundant Power Supply for example an HP 600 RPS EPS An RPS device provides power to a switch if the switch s internal power supply fails RPS power does not provision PoE ports on a switch whose internal power supply has failed See also EPS above General PoE Operation Configuration Options In the
378. s Table MAC Address Loc ated on Port Oc c0 c0 30 c0 00 c0 70 c0 20 00 Pet eaaa WOWOKAAM EWN Figure D 3 Displaying MAC Addresses Detected by a Switch Daylight Savings Time on HP ProCurve Switches Configuring Daylight Savings Time This information applies to the following HP ProCurve switches 2512 2524 2626 2650 2626 PWR 2650 PWR 2824 2848 3400cl 4108g1 4104g 6108 5304x1 5308x1 1600M 2400M 2424M 4000M 8000M 212M 224M e HP AdvanceStack Switches e HP AdvanceStack Routers HP ProCurve switches provide a way to automatically adjust the system clock for Daylight Savings Time DST changes To use this feature you define the month and date to begin and to end the change from standard time In addition to the value none no time changes there are five pre defined settings named The pre defined settings follow these rules Alaska Canada and Continental US Middle Europe and Portugal Southern Hemisphere Western Europe Alaska e Begin DST at 2am the first Sunday on or after April 24th e End DST at 2am the first Sunday on or after October 25th E 1 Daylight Savings Time on HP ProCurve Switches Configuring Daylight Savings Time Canada and Continental US e Begin DST at 2am the first Sunday on or after April 1st e End DST at 2am the first Sunday on or after October 25th Middle Europe and Portugal e Begin DST at 2am the first Sunday on or after March 25th
379. s a port P P configured as port c5 port a5 rt trunk trunk group port c Sort a6 ee run port c7 port a7 portn portn Figure 12 1 Conceptual Example of Port Trunking Port Connections and Configuration All port trunk links must be point to point connections between the switch and a router server workstation or another switch configured for port trunking No intervening non trunking devices are allowed It is important to note that ports on both ends of a port trunk group must have the same mode speed and duplex and flow control settings Link Connections The switch does not support trunking through an intermediate non trunking device such as a hub or using more than one media type in a port trunk group Similarly all links in the same trunk group must have the same speed duplex and flow control Trunk Group Boundary Requirement with IP Routing Enabled on the Series 2800 Switch On the Switch 2824 and Switch 2848 trunk groups can generally be specified as any grouping of ports on the switch However if IP routing is enabled on the switch all of the ports in a given trunk group must be in the same group of ports as shown in table 2 Table 10 2 Port Group Boundaries when IP Routing Enabled 2800 Switches Port Groups Switch 2824 1 12 13 24 n a n a Switch 2848 1 12 13 24 25 36 37 48 Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration For example HPswitch config trunk 1 8 trkl Th
380. s already set to HDx the switch does not allow you to configure it for a static or dynamic LACP trunk Dynamic Static LACP Interoperation A port configured for dynamic LACP can properly interoperate with a port configured for static TrkX LACP but any ports configured as standby LACP links will be ignored Trunk Group Operation Using the Trunk Option This method creates a trunk group that operates independently of specific trunking protocols and does not use a protocol exchange with the device on the other end of the trunk With this choice the switch simply uses the SA DA method of distributing outbound traffic across the trunked ports without regard for how that traffic is handled by the device at the other end of the trunked links Similarly the switch handles incoming traffic from the trunked links as if it were from a trunked source Use the Trunk option when you are trying to establish a trunk group between the switch and another device but the other device s trunking operation fails to interoperate properly with LACP or FEC trunking configured on the switch itself Trunk Operation Using the FEC Option This is the most flexible method for distributing traffic over trunked links when connecting to devices that use the FEC Fast EtherChannel technology FEC trunks offer the following benefits m Provide trunked connectivity to a FEC compliant server switch or router m Enable quick convergence to remaining links
381. s an access level of CommunityOperatorReadOnly Add mapping to allow write access for Operator community on MgrStation1 HP Switch config snmpvy3 community index 30 name Operator sec n ame CommunityManagerReadWrite tag MgrStationl HP Switch fi h 3 it wirch config skow saupro COMMUNSET Two Operator Access Levels snmpCommunityTable rfcz2576 Index Name Community Name Security Name public ConmanityManagerReadWrite Operator CommunityOperatorReadtnly Manager CommunityManagerReadWrite Operato CommunityManagerReadWrite Figure 13 4 Assigning a Community to a Group Access Level Table 13 1 SNMP Community Features Feature Default Menu CLI Web show SNMP communities n a page page 13 14 13 16 configure identity information none page 13 17 configure community names public page page MIB view for a community name 13 14 13 17 operator manager manager write access for default 7 7 community name unrestricted Use SNMP communities to restrict access to the switch by SNMP management stations by adding editing or deleting SNMP communities You can configure up to five SNMP communities each with either an operator level or a manager level view and either restricted or unrestricted write access Using SNMP requires that the switch have an IP address and subnet mask compatible with your network 13 13 Configuring for Network Management Applications Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch Caut
382. s and Basic Configuration Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters If port C8 was disabled and you wanted to enable it and configure it for 100FDx with flow control active you could do so with either of the following command sets m These commands enable and configure port C8 from the config level HPswitch config int e c8 enable HPswitch config int e c8 speed duplex 100 full HPswitch config int e c8 flow control m These commands select the context level for port C8 and then apply all of the configuration commands to port C8 HPswitch config int c8 HP switch eth C8 nabl HPswitch eth C8 speed duplex 100 full h eth C8 flow control HPswitc Using the CLI To Configure a Broadcast Limit The Series 2800 Switches use per port broadcast limit settings The Switch 6108 Series 2600 Series 2600 PWR and Series 4100GL Switches use a single broadcast limit setting for all ports on the switch Broadcast Limit on the Switch 6108 Series 2600 Series 2600 PWR and Series 4100gl Switches This command operates at the global config uration level to configure one global instance of the broadcast limit for all ports on the switch To implement the command you must also execute write memory and reboot the switch You must execute write memory and reboot the switch to implement the new broadcast limit setting Even though the broadcast limit setting appears in the show
383. s as an MDI port If you connect a copper port using a straight through cable to a port on an end node such as a server or PC that uses MDI ports the switch port automatically operates as an MDI X port HP Auto MDIX was developed for auto negotiating devices and was shared with the IEEE for the development of the IEEE 802 3ab standard HP Auto MDIX and the IEEE 802 3ab Auto MDI MID X feature are completely compat ible Additionally HP Auto MDIX supports operation in forced speed and duplex modes If you want more information on this subject please refer to the IEEE 802 3ab Standard Reference For more information on MDI X refer to the appendix titled Switch Ports and Network Cables in the Installation and Getting Started Guide for your switch Manual Auto MDIX Override on the Series 2600 2600 PWR and 2800 Switches This feature is supported only on the Series 2600 2600 PWR and 2800 Switches If you require control over the MDI MDI X feature you can set the switch to either of two non default modes Manual MDI m Manual MDI X Table 10 1 shows the cabling requirements for the MDI MDI X settings Table 10 1 Cable Types for Auto and Manual MDI MDI X Settings MDI MDI X Device Type Setting PC or Other MDI Device Type Switch Hub or Other MDI X Device Manual MDI Crossover Cable Straight Through Cable Manual MDI X Straight Through Cable Crossover Cable Auto MDI X Either Crossover or Straight Through Cable
384. s is indicated by this Event Log message ip Invalid ARP source IP address on IP address where both instances of IP address are the same address indicating the switch s IP address has been duplicated somewhere on the network Duplicate IP Addresses in a DHCP Network If you use a DHCP server to assign IP addresses in your network and you find a device with a valid IP address that does not appear to communicate properly with the server or other devices a duplicate IP address may have been issued by the server This can occur if a client has not released a DHCP assigned IP address after the intended expiration time and the server leases the address to another device C 8 Troubleshooting Unusual Network Activity This can also happen for example if the server is first configured to issue IP addresses with an unlimited duration then is subsequently configured to issue IP addresses that will expire after a limited duration One solution is to configure reservations in the DHCP server for specific IP addresses to be assigned to devices having specific MAC addresses For more information refer to the documentation for the DHCP server One indication of a duplicate IP address in a DHCP network is this Event Log message ip Invalid ARP source IP address on IP address where both instances of IP address are the same address indicating the IP address that has been duplicated somewhere on the network The Switch Has Be
385. s only a global key configured then it either must match the server key or you must configure a server specific key If the switch already has a server specific key assigned to the server s IP address then it overrides the global key and must match the server key 10 33 18 119 config show radius Status and Counters General RADIUS Information Deadtime imin O Timeout secs 5 Global RADIUS Encryption Key Retransmit Attempts 3 ee Port Encryption Key 10 33 18 119 Unique RADIUS Encryption Key for the RADIUS server at 10 33 18 119 Figure C 3 Example of How To List the Global and Server Specific Radius Encryption Keys C 13 Troubleshooting Unusual Network Activity Also ensure that the switch port used to access the RADIUS server is not blocked by an 802 1X configuration on that port For example show port access authenticator lt port list gt gives you the status for the specified ports Also ensure that other factors such as port security or any 802 1X configura tion on the RADIUS server are not blocking the link The authorized MAC address on a port that is configured for both 802 1X and port security either changes or is re acquired after execution of aaa port access authenticator lt port list gt initialize Ifthe portis force authorized with aaa port access authenticator lt port list gt control authorized command and port security is enabled on the port then executing initialize causes the port
386. s serial port for a console session and want to terminate a currently active Telnet session you would do the follow ing HPswitch config show ip ssh SSH Enabled Yes IP Port Number z 22 Timeout sec 120 Server Key Size bits 512 Source IP and Port console Session 2 is an active telnet eee ell Telnet session ssh 15 30 252 195 1531 inactive HPswitch config kill HPswitchi config show ip ssh SSH Enabled Yes IP Port Number 22 Timeout sec 120 Server Key Size bits 512 The kill 2 command terminates session 2 inactive ssh 15 30 252 195 1531 inactive Figure 7 5 Example of Using the Kill Command To Terminate a Remote Session 7 8 Interface Access and System Information System Information System Information System Information Features Feature Default Menu CLI Web System Name switch product page page page name 7 10 7 12 7 14 System Contact n a page page page 7 10 7 12 7 14 System Location n a page page page 7 10 7 12 7 14 MAC Age Time 300 seconds page page 7 10 7 13 Time Sync Method None See Chapter 9 Time Protocols Time Zone 0 page page 7 10 7 13 Daylight Time Rule None page page 7 10 7 13 Time January 1 1990 at _ page 00 00 00 at last 7 13 power reset Configuring system information is optional but recommended System Name Using a unique name helps you to identify individual devices in stacking environments and where you are usin
387. s to diagnose switch problems m Check the HP ProCurve web site the web site may have software updates or other information to help solve your problem http www hp com go hpprocurve m Check the switch LEDs The LEDs on the switch are a fundamental diagnostic tool They provide indications of proper switch operation and of any hardware faults that may have occurred e Each switch port has a Link LED that should light whenever an active network device is connected to the port e Problems with the switch hardware and software are indicated by flashing the Fault and other switch LEDs See the Installation Guide shipped with the switch for a description of the LED behavior and information on using the LEDs for trouble shooting m Check the network topology installation See the Installation Guide shipped with the switch for topology information C 3 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Approaches Check the network cables Cabling problems are a frequent cause of network faults Check the cables for damage correct type and proper connections You should also use a cable tester to check your cables for compliance to the relevant IEEE 802 3 specification See the Installation Guide shipped with the switch for correct cable types and connector pin outs Use the software tools Web Browser Interface Use the Port Utilization Graph and Alert Log in the web browser interface included in the switch to help isolate problems See C
388. s turned off before attempting a connection to prevent this problem Stacking Related Problems The Stack Commander Cannot Locate any Candidates Stacking oper ates on the primary VLAN which in the default configuration is the DEFAULT_VLAN However if another VLAN has been configured as the primary VLAN and the Commander is not on the primary VLAN then the Commander will not detect Candidates on the primary VLAN C 17 Troubleshooting Unusual Network Activity TACACS Related Problems Event Log When troubleshooting TACACS operation check the switch s Event Log for indications of problem areas All Users Are Locked Out of Access to the Switch If the switch is func tioning properly but no username password pairs result in console or Telnet access to the switch the problem may be due to how the TACACS server and or the switch are configured Use one of the following methods to recover m Access the TACACS server application and adjust or remove the configuration parameters controlling access to the switch m Ifthe above method does not work try eliminating configuration changes in the switch that have not been saved to flash boot up configuration by causing the switch to reboot from the boot up configuration which includes only the configuration changes made prior to the last write memory command If you did not use write memory to save the authentication configuration to flash then pressing the Reset button or cyc
389. s with high traffic levels to copy more traffic to a monitor port than the link can support In this case some packets may not be copied to the monitor port Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Port and Static Trunk Monitoring Features Menu Configuring Port and Static Trunk Monitoring This procedure describes configuring the switch for monitoring when moni toring is disabled If monitoring has already been enabled the screens will appear differently than shown in this procedure 1 From the Console Main Menu Select 2 Switch Configuration 3 Network Monitoring Port S SSS S S S S S S S CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Switch Configuration Network Monitoring Port Monitoring Enabled No Enable monitoring by setting this parameter to Yes Actions gt Cancel Edit Save Help Select whether to enable traffic monitoring Use arrow keys to change field selection lt Space gt to toggle field choices and lt Enter gt to go to Actions Figure B 19 The Default Network Monitoring Configuration Screen 2 Inthe Actions menu press E for Edit 3 Ifmonitoring is currently disabled the default then enable it by pressing the Space bar or Y to select Yes 4 Press the downarrow key to display a screen similar to the following and move the cursor to the Monitoring Port parameter B 25 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation
390. sed for telephone access to a VLAN reserved for telephone traffic Applying Security Features to PoE Configurations You can utilize security features built into the switch to control device or user access to the network through PoE ports in the same way as non PoE ports m MAC Address Security Using Port Security you can configure each switch port with a unique list of up to eight MAC addresses for devices that are authorized to access the network through that port For more information refer to the chapter titled Configuring and Monitoring Port Security in the Access Security Guide for your switch m Username Password Security If you are connecting a device that allows you to enter a username and password that is forwarded to a networked server for authentication then you can also configure the following security features TACACS RADIUS Authentication and Accounting 802 1X Authentication For more information refer to the Access Security Guide for your switch 11 15 Power Over Ethernet PoE Operation for the Series 2600 PWR Switches PoE Operating Notes PoE Operating Notes Simply disabling a PoE port does not affect power delivery through that port To cycle the power on a PD receiving power from a PoE port on the switch disable then re enable the power to that port For example to cycle the power on a PoE device connected to port 1 on a 2600 PWR switch HPswitch config no interface 1 power
391. ser table This is done with the snmpv3 user command To view the users in the list you use the show snmpv3 user command b Assign users to Security Groups based on their security model Caution When stacking is enabled SNMPv3 provides security only between an SNMPv3 management station and the stack manager Communications between the stack commander and stack members is not secure Syntax no snmpv3 user user_name auth lt md5 sha gt lt auth_pass gt priv priv_pass Add or Deletes an user entry for snmpv8 Authorization and Privacy are optional but to use privacy you must use authorization When deleting a user only the user_name is required auth lt md5 sha gt lt auth_pass gt With authorization you can select either md5 authentication or sha authentication The auth_pass must be 6 32 characters in length and must be included when authentication is included Default None priv priv_pass With privacy the switch only supports DES 56 bit encryption The privacy password priv_pass must be 6 32 characters in length and must be included when priv is included Default None no snmpv3 group group_name user user_name sec model lt ver1 ver2c ver3 gt This command assigns or removes a user to a security group for access right to the with To delete a entry all fields must be used group group_name This is the group privileges that will be assigned to the user For more details see Group Access L
392. session and if you are using Telnet disconnects the Telnet session See Rebooting To Activate Configuration Changes on page 3 13 Exit from the terminal program turn off the terminal or close the Telnet application program 3 6 Using the Menu Interface Main Menu Features Main Menu Features Provides the menu to display configuration status and counters To select menu item press item number or highlight item and press lt Enter gt Main Menu Status and Counters Switch Configuration Console Passwords Event Log Command Line CLI Reboot Switch Download 05 Run Setup Stacking Logout owvmoa non Sb ON Figure 3 3 The Main Menu View with Manager Privileges The Main Menu gives you access to these Menu interface features Status and Counters Provides access to display screens showing switch information port status and counters port and VLAN address tables and spanning tree information See Appendix B Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Switch Configuration Provides access to configuration screens for displaying and changing the current configuration settings See the Con tents listing at the front of this manual For a listing of features and parameters configurable through the menu interface see the Menu Fea tures List on page 3 14 Console Passwords Provides access to the screen used to set or change Manager level and Operator l
393. splays the switch shutdown history show history Displays the current command history no page Toggles the paging mode for display commands between continuous listing and per page listing setup Displays the Switch Setup screen from the menu interface repeat Repeatedly executes the previous command until a key is pressed kill Terminates all other active sessions C 42 Note Note Troubleshooting Restoring the Factory Default Configuration Restoring the Factory Default Configuration As part of your troubleshooting process it may become necessary to return the switch configuration to the factory default settings This process momen tarily interrupts the switch operation clears any passwords clears the console event log resets the network counters to zero performs a complete self test and reboots the switch into its factory default configuration including deleting an IP address There are two methods for resetting to the factory default configuration m CLI m Clear Reset button combination HP recommends that you save your configuration to a TFTP server before resetting the switch to its factory default configuration You can also save your configuration via Xmodem to a directly connected PC Using the CLI This command operates at any level except the Operator level Syntax erase startup configuration Deletes the startup config file in flash so that the switch will reboot with its factory defau
394. ss MAC ifPhysAddress 51 00 O1 e aD 99 ed Address for default VLAN ifPhysAddress 205 00 O1 e7 a0 99 0 VID 1 ifPhysAddress 226 00 O1 e a0 99 01 ifPhysAddress 237 00 01 e7 a0 99 O02 ifPhysAddress 226 amp 237 MAC Addresses for non default VLANs Figure D 2 Example of Port MAC Address Assignments D 5 MAC Address Management Viewing theMAC Addresses of Connected Devices on Series 2600 2600 PWR 2800 and 4100gI Switches Viewing theMAC Addresses of Connected Devices on Series 2600 2600 PWR 2800 and 4100g1 Switches Syntax show mac address mac addr Lists the MAC addresses of the devices the switch has detected along with the number of the specific port on which each MAC address was detected port list Lists the MAC addresses of the devices the switch has detected on the specified port s mac adar Lists the port on which the switch detects the specified MAC address Returns the following message if the specified MAC address is not detected on any port in the switch MAC address lt mac addr gt not found vlan lt vid gt Lists the MAC addresses of the devices the switch has detected on ports belonging to the specified VLAN along with the number of the specific port on which each MAC address was detected To list the MAC addresses of devices the switch has detected use the show mac address command For example HPswitch show mac address S tatus and Counters Port Addres
395. startup config file session Enables and disables debug logging to the current ses sion The current session is the session that most recently executed debug destination session on the switch since the last reboot This makes it easy to move session logging from one session to another For example figure C 11 shows the process for checking the current Syslog status and then disabling Syslog logging Troubleshooting Using Logging To Identify Problem Sources HPswitch lt config gt show debug Shows that Syslog Destination logging is enabled and transmitting log messages to IP Debug Logging _ address 18 120 38 155 Also shows that the logging facility is set to user the default and that session logging is enabled Destination Logging 18 120 38 155 l Facility user z Disables Syslog logging but retains the Session Syslog IP address in the switch configuration Does not affect Session logging HPswitch config gt no debug destination logging Zoe HPswitch config gt show debug a E Shows Syslog Destination logging now Debug Logging disabled Session logging continues to Destination operate Session Figure C 11 Example of Disabling Syslog Operation Viewing Debug Syslog and Session Status Use these commands to determine the current debug configuration and status Syntax show lt config running gt Lists the current startup config or running config file wit
396. stem show version or show flash CLI commands Check the Firmware revision line It should show the switch software version that you downloaded in the preceding steps If you need information on primary secondary flash memory and the boot commands refer to Using Primary and Secondary Flash Image Options on page 6 12 A 13 File Transfers Downloading Switch Software Switch to Switch Download You can use TFTP to transfer a switch software file between two HP ProCurve switches that use the same software code base The menu interface enables you to transfer primary to primary or secondary to primary The CLI enables all combinations of flash location options Menu Switch to Switch Download to Primary Flash Using the menu interface you can download switch software from either the primary or secondary flash of one switch to the primary flash of another switch 1 From the switch console Main Menu in the switch to receive the down load select 7 Download OS screen 2 Ensure that the Method parameter is set to TFTP the default 3 Inthe TFP Server field enter the IP address of the remote switch contain ing the switch software you want to download 4 For the Remote File Name enter one of the following e To download the switch software from the primary flash of the source switch type flash or os primary in lowercase characters e To download the switch software from the secondary flash of the source switch
397. t or higher At lower port speeds only standard 1522 byte or smaller packets are allowed regardless of the jumbo configuration Flow Control Disable flow control the default setting on any ports or trunks through which you want to transmit or receive jumbo packets Leaving flow control enabled on a port can cause a high rate of jumbo drops to occur on the port GVRP Operation A VLAN enabled for jumbo traffic cannot be used to create a dynamic VLAN A port belonging to a statically configured jumbo enabled VLAN cannot join a dynamic VLAN Port Adds and Moves If you add a port to a VLAN that is already configured for jumbo traffic the switch enables that port to receive jumbo traffic If you remove a port from a jumbo enabled VLAN the switch disables jumbo traffic capability on the port only ifthe port is not currently a member of another jumbo enabled VLAN This same operation applies to port trunks Jumbo Traffic Sources A port belonging to ajumbo enabled VLAN can receive inbound jumbo packets through any VLAN to which it belongs including non jumbo VLANS For example if VLAN 10 without jumbos enabled and VLAN 20 with jumbos enabled are both configured on a switch and port 1 belongs to both VLANs then port 1 can receive jumbo 10 18 Port Status and Basic Configuration Jumbo Packets on the Series 2800 Switches traffic from devices on either VLAN For a method to allow only some ports in a VLAN to receive jumbo traf
398. tab Help and the Management Server URL The Management Server URL field specifies the URL the switch uses to find online Help for the web browser interface If you install PCM HP ProCurve Manager in your network the PCM management station acts as the web browser Help server for the switch and automatically inserts the necessary URL in this field Inthe default configuration and if PCM is not running on your network this field is set to the URL for accessing online Help from the HP ProCurve World Wide Website http www hp com rnd device_help Using this option the Help files are automatically available if your work station can access the World Wide Web In this case if Online Help fails to operate ensure that the above URL appears in the Management Server URL field shown in figure 5 7 Using the HP Web Browser Interface Support Mgmt URLs Feature HPswitch Status Information identity j Status Configuration Sec urity Diagnostic S Support _Monitor Port _MLAN Configuration E Support URL http Avww hp com go procurve Management Server URL htto www hp com mnd device_help Clear Changes In the default configuration the switch uses the URL for aside 2 g accessing the web browser interface help files on the HP ProCurve World Wide Web site Figure 5 7 How To Access Web Browser Interface Online Help 5 14 Using the HP Web Browser Interfac
399. tagged packet it is placed into the appropriate queue based on the frame s 802 1p priority setting The mapping with without QoS Pass Through Mode is as follows 802 1p Priority Prioritization Queue Placement Setting DefaultQoS QoS Passthrough Setting Mode 1 1 low 2 normal 2 1 low 2 normal Oor 2 normal 2 normal Unspecified 3 2 normal 2 normal 4 3 medium 2 normal 5 3 medium 2 normal 6 4 high 4 high 7 4 high 4 high How to enable disable QoS Pass Through Mode QoS Pass Through Mode is disabled by default and is available only in 1 07 52 and later switch software versions Synta no qos passthrough mode x write memory reload The above command sequence enables QoS pass through mode The no form of the command sequence disables QoS pass through mode Default Disabled For example HP ProCurve Switch 2824 config qos passthrough mode Command will take effect after saving configuration and reboot HP ProCurve Switch 2824 config write memory HP ProCurve Switch 2824 config reload 10 27 Port Status and Basic Configuration QoS Pass Through Mode on the Series 2800 Switches This command can be enabled and disabled only from the switch s CLI QoS passthrough mode cannot be enabled or disabled through either the switch s menu or web browser interfaces Once enabled this feature adds qos passthrough mode to the switch s startup
400. tagged packet with an 802 1p priority setting of 0 zero coming into the switch on port A10 and leaving the switch through any other port config ured as a tagged VLAN member would leave the switch as a tagged packet with a priority level of 1 m A tagged packet with an 802 1p priority setting 1 7 coming into the switch on port A10 and leaving the switch through any other port config ured as a tagged VLAN member would keep its original priority setting regardless of the port based priority setting on port A10 For apacket to carry a given 802 1p priority level from end to end in anetwork the VLAN for the packet must be configured as tagged on all switch to switch links Otherwise the tag is removed and the 802 1p priority is lost as the packet moves from one switch to the next Operating Rules for Port Based Priority These rules apply to the operation of port based priority on the switch m Inthe switch s default configuration port based priority is configured as 0 zero for inbound traffic on all ports m Ona given port when port based priority is configured as 0 7 an inbound untagged packet adopts the specified priority and is sent to the corresponding outbound queue on the outbound port See table 10 3 Mapping Priority Settings to Device Queues on page 10 30 If the outbound port is atagged member of the applicable VLAN then the packet carries a tag with that priority setting to the next downstream device
401. tch config vlan 1 ip igmp Port Identity Convention for Examples This guide describes software applicable to both chassis based and stackable HP ProCurve switches Where port identities are needed in an example this guide uses the chassis based port identity system suchas A1 B3 B5 C7 etc However unless otherwise noted such examples apply equally to the stackable switches which typically use only numbers such as 1 3 5 15 etc for port identities Related Publications Read Me First The Read Me First shipped with your switch provides soft ware update information product notes and other information A printed copy is shipped with your switch For the latest version refer to Getting Documentation From the Web on page 1 6 Installation and Getting Started Guide Use the Installation and Get ting Started Guide shipped with your switch to prepare for and perform the physical installation This guide also steps you through connecting the switch to your network and assigning IP addressing as well as describing the LED indications for correct operation and trouble analysis A PDF version of this guide is also provided on the Product Documentation CD ROM shipped with the switch And you can download a copy from the HP ProCurve website See Getting Documentation From the Web on page 1 6 1 4 Getting Started Related Publications Advanced Traffic Manag
402. tem Contact WND Tech Support Eric Henderson X55415 System Location R3L Inactivity Timeout min 0 0 3 Address Age Interval min 5 Inbound Telnet Enabled Yes Yes iWeb Agent Enabled Yes Yes F cee an Interface Access Time Zone 0 0 pare ea Daylight Time Rule None None Actions gt Edit save Help Cancel changes and return to previous screen Use arrow keys to change action selection and lt Enter gt to execute action Figure 7 1 The Default Interface Access Parameters Available in the Menu Interface S 2 Press E for Edit The cursor moves to the System Name field 3 Use the arrow keys 4 N to move to the parameters you want to change Refer to the online help provided with this screen for further information on configuration options for these features 4 When you have finished making changes to the above parameters press Enter then press S for Save Interface Access and System Information Interface Access Console Serial Link Web and Telnet CLI Modifying the Interface Access Interface Access Commands Used in This Section show console below no telnet server below no web management page 7 6 console page 7 6 Listing the Current Console Serial Link Configuration This com mand lists the current interface access parameter settings Syntax show console This example shows the switch s default console serial configuration
403. tem control monitoring and diagnostic commands plus any of the Operator level commands For a list of available commands enter at the prompt Execute configuration commands plus all Operator and Manager commands For a list of available commands enter at the prompt Execute context specific configuration commands such as a particular VLAN or switch port This is useful for shortening the command strings you type and for entering a series of commands for the same context For a list of available commands enter at the prompt 4 6 Using the Command Line Interface CLI Using the CLI How To Move Between Levels Change in Levels Operator level to Manager level Manager level to Global configuration level Global configuration level toa Context configuration level Context configuration level to another Context configuration level Move from any level to the preceding level Move from any level to the Manager level Example of Prompt Command and Result HPswitch gt enable Password _ After you enter enable the Password prompt appears After you enter the Manager password the system prompt appears with the symbol HPswitch HPswitch config HP switch config HPswitch config vlan 10 HPswitch vlan 10 HPswitch vlan 10 interfac 3 HPswitch int 3 The CLI accepts e as the abbreviated form o
404. tes use of a CLI command part of a CLI command syntax or other displayed element in general text For example Use the copy tftp command to download the key from a TFTP server m Italics indicate variables for which you must supply a value when executing the command For example in this command syntax lt port list gt indicates that you must provide one or more port numbers Syntax aaa port access authenticator lt port list gt Command Prompts In the default configuration your switch displays one of the following CLI prompts HP ProCurve Switch 4104 HP ProCurve Switch 4108 HP ProCurve Switch 2626 HP ProCurve Switch 2650 HP ProCurve Switch 6108 To simplify recognition this guide uses HPswitch to represent command prompts for all models For example HPswitch You can use the hostname command to change the text in the CLI prompt 1 3 Getting Started Port Identity Convention for Examples Screen Simulations Figures containing simulated screen text and command output look like this HPswitch gt show version Image stamp sw code build info Ap 1 2004 13 43 13 G 07 5X 520 HPswitch gt Figure 1 1 Example of a Figure Showing a Simulated Screen In some cases brief command output sequences appear outside of a num bered figure For example HPswitch config ip default gateway 18 28 152 1 24 HPswitch config vlan 1 ip address 18 28 36 152 24 HPswi
405. that attempting to create redundant paths through the use of VLANs will cause problems with some switches One symptom is that a duplicate MAC address appears in the Port Address Table of one port and then later appears on another port While the switch has multiple forwarding databases and thus does not have this problem some switches with a single forwarding database for all VLANs may produce the impression that a connected device is moving among ports because packets with the same MAC address but different VLANs are received on different ports You can avoid this problem by creating redundant paths using port trunks or spanning tree C 21 Troubleshooting Unusual Network Activity Server MAC Address A VLAN 1 A MAC Address A VLAN 2 HP ProCurve Switches Covered by this Guide Multiple Forwarding Database Figure C 6 Example of Duplicate MAC Address Switch with Single Forwarding Database Fi Problem This switch detects continual moves of MAC address A between ports C 22 Troubleshooting Using Logging To Identify Problem Sources Using Logging To Identify Problem Sources Event Log Operation The Event Log records operating events as single line entries listed in chrono logical order and serves as a tool for isolating problems Each Event Log entry is composed of five fields Severity Date Time System Module Event Message ee a
406. the image in the destination flash location In this case the switch will not have a valid flash image in either flash location but will continue running on a temporary flash image in RAM Do not reboot the switch Instead immediately download another valid flash image to primary or secondary flash Otherwise if the switch is rebooted without a software image in either primary or secondary flash the temporary flash image in RAM will be cleared and the switch will go down To recover see Restoring a Flash Image on page C 44 in the Trouble shooting chapter Syntax copy flash flash lt destination flash gt where destination flash primary or secondary For example to copy the image in secondary flash to primary flash Switch Memory and Configuration Using Primary and Secondary Flash Image Options Caution No Undo 1 Verify that there is a valid flash image in the secondary flash location The following figure indicates that a software image is present in secondary flash If you are unsure whether the image is secondary flash is valid try booting from it before you proceed by using boot system flash secondary HPswitch config show flash The unequal code Size Bytes Date Version size differing dates and differing Primary Image 2589041 04 01 04 G 07 53 version numbers Secondary Image 2687489 11 11 03 6 07 50 indicates two Boot Rom V ion G 05 1 different versions of oo om Version G O5 o
407. the question mark button in the upper right corner of any of the web browser interface screens The Help Button Status Configuration Security Diagnostics Support Legend E Unicast Rx or All Tx E Non Unicast Pkts Rx Figure 5 5 The Help Button Note Context sensitive help is provided for the screen you are on To access the online Help for the HP web browser interface you need either HP ProCurve Manager version 1 5 or greater installed on your network or an active connection to the World Wide Web Otherwise Online help for the web browser interface will not be available For more on Help access and operation refer to Help and the Management Server URL on page 5 13 5 11 Using the HP Web Browser Interface Support Mgmt URLs Feature Support Mgmt URLs Feature The Support Mgmt URLs window enables you to change the World Wide Web Universal Resource Locator URL for two functions Support URL a support information site for your switch m Management Server URL The web site for web browser online Help 1 Click Here 2 Click Here HPswitch Status Information O E Identity Status Configuration f Security Diagnostics Support Device View Fault Detection _ _System Info IP Configuration Port Configuration Monitor Port Device Features Stacking _MLAN Configuration Support URL htta Awww hp com go pracurve M t Sena URE htt Awwwhp com md device_help Apply Changes C
408. the switch If you do not specify the event level then the switch does not send event log messages as traps You can specify up to 10 trap receivers network management stations Note In all cases the switch sends any threshold trap s to the network management station s that explicitly set the threshold s lt none all non info critical debug gt Options for sending switch Event Log messages to a trap receiver Refer toTable 13 2 Options for Sending Event Log Messages as Traps on page 13 22 The levels specified with these options apply only to Event Log messages and not to threshold traps Table 13 2 Options for Sending Event Log Messages as Traps Event Level None default All Not INFO Critical Debug Description Send no log messages Send all log messages Send the log messages that are not information only Send critical level log messages Reserved for HP internal use 13 22 Configuring for Network Management Applications Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch For example to configure a trap receiver in a community named red team with an IP address of 10 28 227 130 to receive only critical log messages HPswitch config snmp server trap receiver red team 10 28 227 130 Notes Note Critical To replace one community name with another for the same IP address you must use no snmp server host lt community name gt lt ip address gt to delete the unwant
409. ting Using Logging To Identify Problem Sources For example on a switch where there are no SyslogD servers configured you would do the following to configure SyslogD servers 18 120 38 155 and 18 120 43 125 and automatically enable Syslog logging with user as the default logging facility HPswitch lt config gt logging 18 120 38 155 HPswitch lt config gt logging 18 120 43 125 a HPswitch lt conf igo write men HPswitch lt config gt show config logging lt syslog ip addr gt Startup configuration configures the Syslog server s to use and J4887A Configuration Editor Created on release Z 67 2z enables Syslog debug logging In this case Syslog is automatically hostname HPswitch cdp run enabled because debug module 1 type J4862A destination logging has ip default gateway 18 38 224 1 The configured Syslog server not been previously ip routing IP addresses appear in the switch s configuration file disabledwithotherSyslog logging 18 120 38 155 servers already logging 18 120 43 125 configured in the switch snmp server commun Refer to the Syntax box vlan 1 under Configuring the name DEFAULT_ULAN Switch To Send Debug Messages to One or More gh oo ee z bss Ot sae SyslogD Servers onpage HPswitch lt confiq gt show debug C 29 Debug Logging l i This command shows that Pare iae Tan 4 Syslog logging is enabled for l 18 120 38 155 i the listed IP address
410. ting Addresses To delete an address you must use the CLI If there are multiple addresses and you delete one of them the switch re orders the address priority See Address Prioritization on page 9 22 Syntax no sntp server lt ip addr gt For example to delete the primary address in the above example and automatically convert the secondary address to primary HPswitch config no sntp server 10 28 227 141 9 23 Time Protocols SNTP Messages in the Event Log Menu Interface Operation with Multiple SNTP Server Addresses Configured When you use the Menu interface to configure an SNTP server IP address the new address writes over the current primary address if one is configured If there are multiple addresses configured the switch re orders the addresses according to the criteria described under Address Prioritization on page 9 22 For example suppose the switch already has the following three SNTP server IP addresses configured m 10 28 227 141 primary m 10 28 227 153 secondary m 10 29 227 100 tertiary If you use the Menu interface to add 10 28 227 160 the new prioritized list will be New Address List Address Status 10 28 227 153 New Primary The former primary 10 28 227 141 was deleted when you used the menu to add 10 28 227 160 10 28 227 160 New Secondary 10 29 227 100 Same Tertiary This address still has the highest decimal value SNTP Messages in the Event Log
411. to clear the learned address and learn a new address from the first packet it receives after you execute initialize A trunked port configured for 802 1X is blocked If you are using RADIUS authentication and the RADIUS server specifies a VLAN for the port the switch allows authentication but blocks the port To eliminate this prob lem either remove the port from the trunk or reconfigure the RADIUS server to avoid specifying a VLAN Radius Related Problems The switch does not receive a response to RADIUS authentication requests In this case the switch will attempt authentication using the secondary method configured for the type of access you are using console Telnet or SSH There can be several reasons for not receiving a response to an authentication request Do the following Use ping to ensure that the switch has access to the configured RADIUS server m Verify that the switch is using the correct encryption key for the desig nated server Verify that the switch has the correct IP address for the RADIUS server Ensure that the radius server timeout period is long enough for network conditions m Verify that the switch is using the same UDP port number as the server RADIUS server fails to respond to a request for service even though the server s IP address is correctly configured in the switch Use show radius to verify that the encryption key the switch is using is correct for the server being contacted If the s
412. tor password enables full manager privileges For more information on passwords see the chapter on local passwords in the Access Security Guide for your switch m The menu interface displays the current running config parameter set tings You can use the menu interface to save configuration changes made in the CLI only if the CLI changes are in the running config when you save changes made in the menu interface For more on how switch memory manages configuration changes see Chapter 6 Switch Memory and Configuration A configuration change made through any switch interface overwrites earlier changes made through any other interface m The Menu Interface and the CLI Command Line Interface both use the switch console To enter the menu from the CLI use the menu command To enter the CLI from the Menu interface select Command Line CLI option Starting and Ending a Menu Session You can access the menu interface using any of the following m Adirect serial connection to the switch s console port as described in the installation guide you received with the switch m A Telnet connection to the switch console from a networked PC or the switch s web browser interface Telnet requires that an IP address and subnet mask compatible with your network have already been configured on the switch m The stack Commander if the switch is a stack member This section assumes that either a terminal device is already configured and
413. ts configured for fast uplink STP and has become the root device due to a failure in the original root device SSH Related Problems Switch access refused to a client Even though you have placed the cli ent s public key in a text file and copied the file using the copy tftp pub key file command into the switch the switch refuses to allow the client to have access If the source SSH client is an SSHv2 application the public key may be in the PEM format which the switch SSHv1 does not interpret Check the SSH client application for a utility that can convert the PEM formatted key into an ASCII formatted key Executing ip ssh does not enable SSH on the switch The switch does not have a host key Verify by executing show ip host public key If you see the message ssh cannot be enabled until a host key is configured use crypto command then you need to generate an SSH key pair for the switch To do so execute crypto key generate Refer to 2 Generating the Switch s Public and Private Key Pair in the Access Security Guide for your switch C 16 Troubleshooting Unusual Network Activity Switch does not detect a client s public key that does appear in the switch s public key file show ip client public key The client s public key entry in the public key file may be preceded by another entry that does not terminate with a new line CR In this case the switch interprets the next sequential key entry as sim
414. ty For your switch this feature controls the types of alerts reported to the Alert Log based on their level of severity Set this policy in the Fault Detection window figure 5 16 HP switch Status Information a e Identity Status Configuration Security Diagnostics Support Device View System Info IP Configuration Port Configuration _Monitor Port _Device Features _Stacking VLAN Configuration _SupportMgmt URL This switch features automatic fault detection capability which can protect your network from being brought down by problems such as network loops defective cables transceivers and faulty network interface cards Configure the fault detection sensitivity which best suits your network environment When done click the Apply Changes button to save your settings to the device Log Network Problems Medium Sensitivity 7 Automatically detect network problems and report them with their causes in the alert log located under the Status tab High sensitivity setting causes the switch to act on any network problem Low sensitivity setting causes the switch to act only when severe problems occur Reset to Default Settings Apply Changes Clear Changes Figure 5 16 The Fault Detection Window The Fault Detection screen contains a list box for setting fault detection and response policy You set the sensitivity level at which a network problem should generate an alert and send it to the Alert Log
415. ty ports This operation occurs regardless of the order in which PDs connect to the switch s PoE configured ports How Does the Switch Prioritize Power Allocations The switch simul taneously uses two priority methods m The priority class method enables port PoE priority class assign ments of Low the default High and Critical m The port number priority method gives a lower numbered port priority over a higher numbered port within the same configured priority class Suppose for example that you configure PoE priority as shown in table 2 Power Over Ethernet PoE Operation for the Series 2600 PWR Switches General PoE Operation Table 2 Example of PoE Priority Operation Port Priority Setting 25 48 Critical 9 12 High 1 8 Low 13 24 n a Configuration Command and Resulting Operation This priority class always receives power If there is not enough power to provision PDs on all of the ports configured for this class then no power goes to ports configured for High and Low priority If there is enough power to provision PDs on only some of the Critical ports then power is allocated to the Critical ports in ascending order beginning with the lowest numbered port in the class which in this case is port 25 For this example the CLI command to set ports to Critical is HPswitch config interfac 25 48 power critical This priority class receives power only if all PDs on ports
416. type os secondary 5 Press Enter then X for eXecute to begin the switch software download 6 A progress bar indicates the progress of the download When the entire operating system has been received all activity on the switch halts and the following messages appear Validating and writing system software to FLASH 7 After the primary flash memory has been updated with the new operating system you must reboot the switch to implement the newly downloaded software From the Main Menu press 6 for Reboot Switch You will then see this prompt Continue reboot of system No Press the space bar once to change No to Yes then press Enter to begin the reboot 8 To confirm that the operating system downloaded correctly a From the Main Menu select Status and Counters A 14 File Transfers Downloading Switch Software General System Information b Check the Firmware revision line CLI Switch To Switch Downloads You can download a switch software file between two switches that use the same code base and which are connected on your LAN To do so use a copy tftp command from the destination switch The options for this CLI feature include Copy from primary flash in the source to either primary or secondary in the destination m Copy from either primary or secondary flash in the source to either primary or secondary flash in the destination Downloading from Primary Only This command executed
417. ue Port lt port gt applying power to PD A PoE device is connected to the port and receiving power Port lt port gt PD detected The switch has detected a PoE device connected to the port Power Over Ethernet PoE Operation for the Series 2600 PWR Switches PoE Event Log Messages W MM DD YY HH MM SS chassis PO Message header with severity date system time and system module type For more information on Event Log operation refer to the Troubleshooting appendix in the Management and Configuration Guide for your switch Ext Power Supply connected but not responding The switch detects an external power supply but is not receiving power from the device Ext Power Supply failure lt fault type gt Failures Indicates an external power supply failure where lt fault type gt is one of the following e Over Current fault The HP 600 RPS EPS or HP 610 EPS reported a fault condition Contact your HP ProCurve support representative e Fan fault A fan in an external power supply has failed e Temperature fault The operating temperature in an external power supply has exceeded the normal operating range e 50V fault The HP 600 RPS EPS or HP 610 EPS reported a fault condition Contact your HP ProCurve support representative e 12V fault The HP 600 RPS EPS or HP 610 EPS reported a fault condition Contact your HP ProCurve support representative E usage has exceeded threshold of lt 1 99
418. ue team operator restricted To eliminate a previously configured community named gold team HPswitch config no snmp server community gold team 13 17 Configuring for Network Management Applications Using SNMP Tools To Manage the Switch SNMP Notification and Traps The switches covered in this guide support the SNMPv3 notification process They also support version lor version 2c traps For more information on version lor version2c traps see Trap Features on page 13 20 The SNMPv3 notification process allows for the messages passed to be authenticated and encrypted if you choose To set up aSNMPv3 notification there are three steps 1 2 Syntax Establish a Notification with the snmpv3 notify command Point the notification to a Address with the snmpv3 targetaddress com Establish a parameter record for the target address with the snmpv3 params command no snmpv3 notify lt notify name gt tagvalue lt tag name gt This adds or deletes a notification request To remove a mapping you only need the notify name no snmpv3 targetaddress lt addr name gt params lt parms name gt lt IP Addr gt Add or delete an address where notification messages are sent filter lt none debug all not info critical gt This filter messages to restrict type of messages transmitted to address Default none udp port lt port gt This specifies the UDP port to use Def
419. ule Information Port Status Port Counters Vlan Address Table Port Address Table Prompt for Selecting Spanning Tree Information Return to eee eee the Port To Search Select port W OCMOANOFWYNPE ce gt to scroll ports Press lt Enter gt to select m number or highlight item and press lt Enter gt Type port number or press To select menu item press Figure B 10 Listing MAC Addresses for a Specific Port 2 Use the Space bar to select the port you want to list or search for MAC addresses then press Enter to list the MAC addresses detected on that port Determining Whether a Specific Device Is Connected to the Selected Port Proceeding from step 2 above 1 Press S for Search to display the following prompt Enter MAC address 2 Type the MAC address you want to locate and press Enter The address is highlighted if found If the switch does not find the address it leaves the MAC address listing empty 3 Press P for Prev page to return to the previous per port listing CLI Access for MAC Address Views and Searches Syntax show mac address vlan lt vian id gt ethernet lt port list gt lt mac addr gt To List All Learned MAC Addresses on the Switch with The Port Number on Which Each MAC Address Was Learned HPswitch gt show mac address To List All Learned MAC Addresses on one or more ports with Their B 16 Note Monitoring and Analyzing S
420. unk 12 3 link test description C 35 for troubleshooting C 35 link serial 7 3 load balancing See port trunk logical port 12 9 loop network 12 5 lost password 5 11 M MAC address 8 14 B 6 D 2 duplicate C 15 C 21 learned B 13 B 14 listing connected devices D 6 port D 2 D 3 switch D 2 VLAN D 2 management interfaces described 2 2 server URL 5 12 5 13 server URL default 5 13 management VLAN See VLAN manager access 13 13 manager password 5 8 5 10 MDI MDI X configuration display 10 15 MDI MDI X port mode display 10 15 media type port trunk 12 3 memory flash 3 10 6 2 startup configuration 3 10 menu interface configuration changes saving 3 10 MIB 13 4 MIB listing 13 4 MIB HP proprietary 13 4 MIB standard 13 4 mirroring See port monitoring monitoring traffic B 24 multinetting 8 9 multinetting limit 8 9 multiple VLAN 13 3 multi port bridge 8 2 N navigation console interface 3 9 3 10 navigation event log C 25 network management functions 13 5 network manager address 13 4 13 5 network monitoring traffic overload B 24 Network Monitoring Port screen B 24 network slow C 8 Not Current One debug session C 33 notices 1 ii 0 online help 5 13 online help location 5 13 operation not allowed LACP C 11 operator access
421. used 11 20 12 Port Trunking Contents OVCIVIEW nests peg bbe SoG eens HER eee SEAS ate Eda lesan 12 2 Port Status and Configuration 2 0 0 cece eee eee eee eee 12 2 Port Connections and Configuration 2 ee eee 12 3 Link Connections osean e e ea aa eben nee ee ene E i 12 3 Trunk Group Boundary Requirement with IP Routing Enabled on the Series 2800 Switch 00 0 0 ce eee eee eee 12 3 Trunk Group Boundary Requirement for the Series 4100g1 Switch 10 100 1000 Module J4908A 200 5 12 4 Port Trunk Options and Operation 00 02 ee eens 12 5 Trunk Configuration Methods 00 02 e eee eee eee 12 5 Menu Viewing and Configuring a Static Trunk Group 12 10 CLI Viewing and Configuring a Static or Dynamic Port Trunk Groupe enorer sic eA EERE Sab teas WARE ata eg tha baked 12 12 Using the CLI To View Port Trunks 12 12 Using the CLI To Configure a Static or Dynamic Trunk Group 12 15 Web Viewing Existing Port Trunk Groups 12 18 Trunk Group Operation Using LACP 004 12 18 Default Port Operation 00 0 c cee ee eee 12 21 LACP Notes and Restrictions 0 00 02 e eee 12 23 Trunk Group Operation Using the Trunk Option 12 25 Trunk Operation Using the FEC Option 12 25 How the Switch Lists Trunk Data 00
422. ved from inbound CDP packets into its MIB Management Information Base This data is available in three ways Using the switch s show cdp neighbors command to display a subset of Neighbor data Using the walkmib command to display a listing of the CDP MIB objects m Electronically using an SNMP utility designed to search the MIB for CDP data As shown under Viewing the Switch s Current CDP Neighbors Table on page 13 32 you can list a subset of data for each CDP device currently found in the switch s CDP Neighbors table Table 13 4 CDP Neighbors Data describes the CDP Neighbor data set available in the switch 13 38 Table 13 4 CDP Neighbors Data Configuring for Network Management Applications CDP CDP Neighbor Data Address Type CDP Cache Address Software Version Device Name ASCII string Device MAC Address Destination Port Number Source Port Number Product Name ASCII string Capability Code Device Type Displayed Neighbors Table No No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes alpha character Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes numeric character Always 1 IP address only IP address of source device ASCII String In HP ProCurve switches this is the value configured for the System Name parameter Included in the Device Name entry On the switch itself the receiving device the number of the port through which the CDP packet ar
423. view Screen B 23 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Port and Static Trunk Monitoring Features Note Port and Static Trunk Monitoring Features Port Monitoring Features Feature Default Menu CLI Web display monitoring disabled page B 25 page B 27 page B 29 configuration configure the monitor port s ports none page B 25 page B 27 page B 29 selecting or removing ports none selected page B 25 page B 28 page B 29 Switch 6108 and Series 4100g1 Switches You can designate a port for monitoring inbound ingress traffic of other ports and of static trunks on the switch The switch monitors the network activity by copying all traffic inbound on the specified interfaces to the designated monitoring port to which a network analyzer can be attached Series 2600 2600 PWR and 2800 Switches You can designate a port for monitoring inbound ingress and outbound egress traffic of other ports and of static trunks on the switch The switch monitors the network activity by copying all inbound and outbound traffic on the specified interfaces to the designated monitoring port to which a network analyzer can be attached The instructions below apply to all of the switches covered in this manual When using a Series 2600 2600 PWR and 2800 Switch both inbound and outbound traffic is sent to the monitoring port Port trunks cannot be used as a monitoring port It is possible when monitoring multiple interfaces in network
424. vious command line in the history buffer Deletes from the cursor to the beginning of the command line Deletes the last word typed Moves the cursor backward one word Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word Moves the cursor forward one word Deletes the first character to the left of the cursor in the command line 4 16 Using the HP Web Browser Interface Contents OVETVIEW op a aa hee a Rin ees Be ee ts a E 5 2 General Features 2 ic046 54 6254 ae oe oe aha ta dale sale cles ended mad 5 3 Starting an HP Web Browser Interface Session with the Switch 5 4 Using a Standalone Web Browser in a PC or UNIX Workstation 5 4 Using HP ProCurve Manager PCM or HP ProCurve Manager Plus PCM 00 02 eee eee eee 5 5 Tasks for Your First HP Web Browser Interface Session 5 7 Viewing the First Time Install Window 0055 5 7 Creating Usernames and Passwords in the Browser Interface 5 8 Using the Passwords 00 e cece eee eee eens 5 10 Using the User Names 00 0c eee eee eee eresas 5 10 If You Lose a Password 0 0 c eee eee eee eens 5 11 Online Help for the HP Web Browser Interface 5 11 Support Mgmt URLs Feature 20 5 12 Support URL 33 edie eegrek eee dee aber ds dateen A N 5 13 Help and the Management Server URL 0 0000 e eee 5 13 Status Reporting Features 0 00 cec
425. vity level 5 23 sorting the entries 5 19 applicable products 1 ii asterisk 3 10 3 13 authentication trap 13 20 13 23 See also SNMP authentication trap configuring 13 23 authorized IP managers SNMP blocking 13 3 auto MDI MDI X configuration display 10 15 auto MDI MDI X operation 10 15 auto MDI MDI X port mode display 10 15 auto negotiation 10 4 10 5 Auto 10 12 5 12 8 auto discovery 13 5 B bandwidth displaying utilization 5 16 boot effect on configuration 3 13 See also reboot boot ROM console A 3 boot ROM mode C 44 Bootp Bootp table file 8 14 Bootptab file 8 14 effect of no reply C 8 operation 8 14 using with Unix systems 8 14 broadcast limit 10 6 10 11 broadcast storm 12 5 C 15 browser interface See web browser interface C CDP CDP on hubs 13 41 configuration 13 31 13 34 configuration viewing 13 32 default CDP operation 13 31 effect of spanning tree 13 36 factory default 13 31 general operation 13 27 hold time 13 36 IP address in outbound packet 13 37 mib objects 13 38 neighbor 13 26 neighbor data 13 38 neighbor maximum 13 40 neighbors table 13 30 13 32 resetting 13 33 on individual ports 13 35 overview of operation 13 25 port trunking 13 40 requirements 13 25 terminology 13 26 transmission interval 13 36 transparent
426. was received In this case the switch CDP packets on ports A1 and A3 For CDP purposes port numbering is consecutive from 1 to n where n is the last consecutive port on the switch Figure 13 21 Example of CDP Neighbor Data For the current switch MIB go to the HP ProCurve World Wide Web site at http ww hp com go hpprocurve Click on software then MIBs Operating Notes Neighbor Maximum The switch supports up to 60 entries neighbors in the CDP Neighbors table Remember that multiple CDP devices can be neighbors onthe same port if they are connected to the switch through anon CDP device CDP Version Data The switch uses CDP V1 but do not include IP prefix information which is a router function not a switch application Port Trunking with CDP Where a static or LACP trunk forms the link between the switch and another CDP device only one physical link in the trunk is used to transmit outbound CDP packets 13 40 Configuring for Network Management Applications CDP CDP Capable Hubs Some hubs are capable of running CDP but also forward CDP packets as if the hub itself were transparent to CDP Such hubs will appear in the switch s CDP Neighbor table and will also maintain a CDP neighbor table similar to that for switches For more information refer to the documentation provided for the specific hub Troubleshooting CDP Operation Turn to Using Logging To Identify Problem Sources on page C 23 13 41
427. when a failure is detected on a trunked port link 12 25 Port Trunking Port Status and Configuration m Depending on the capabilities of the device on the other end of the trunk negotiate the forwarding mechanism on the trunk to the non protocol option m When auto negotiated to the SA DA forwarding mechanism provide higher performance on the trunk for broadcast multicast and flooded traffic through distribution in the same manner as non protocol trunking Support FEC automatic trunk configuration mode on other devices That is when connecting FEC trunks to FEC capable servers switches or routers having FEC automatic trunk configuration mode enabled the FEC trunks allow these other devices to automatically form trunk groups How the Switch Lists Trunk Data Static Trunk Group Appears in the menu interface and the output from the CLI show trunk and show interfaces commands Dynamic LACP Trunk Group Appears in the output from the CLI show lacp command Interface Option Dynamic LACP Static LACP Static Non Protocol Trunk Group Trunk Group or FEC Trunk Group Menu Interface No Yes Yes CLI show trunk No Yes Yes show interfaces No Yes Yes show lacp Yes Yes No show spanning tree No Yes Yes show igmp No Yes Yes show config No Yes Yes Outbound Traffic Distribution Across Trunked Links All three trunk group options LACP Trunk and FEC use source destination address pairs SA DA for distributing outbound traff
428. whether the images in primary and secondary flash are the same Identify which switch software version is currently running Viewing the Currently Active Flash Image Version This command identifies the software version on which the switch is currently running and whether the active version was booted from the primary or secondary flash image Syntax show version 6 12 Switch Memory and Configuration Using Primary and Secondary Flash Image Options For example if the switch is using a software version of G 01 01 stored in Primary flash show version produces the following HPswitchiconfig show version Image stamp su code build info s03 Jun 01 2003 10 50 26 G 07 21 1796 Boot Image Primary Figure 6 7 Example Showing the Identity of the Current Flash Image Determining Whether the Flash Images Are Different Versions Ifthe flash image sizes in primary and secondary are the same then in almost every case the primary and secondary images are identical This command provides a comparison of flash image sizes plus the boot ROM version and from which flash image the switch booted For example in the following case the images are different versions of the switch software and the switch is running on the version stored in the secondary flash image HPswitch config show flash Size Bytes Date Version The unequal code Primary Image 2589041 04 01 04 G 07 53 57e and differing dates indicate two Secondar
429. wing methods for downloading the switch software code to the switch Switch Software Download Features Feature Default Menu CLI Web TAP a pageA4 pageA6 Xmodem n a page A 11 page A 12 Switch to Switch n a page A 14 page A 15 Software Update Manager in HP PCM Refer to the documentation provided with HP PCM A 2 Note File Transfers Downloading Switch Software General Switch Software Download Rules m A switch software image downloaded through the menu interface always goes to primary flash m After a switch software download you must reboot the switch to imple ment the newly downloaded code Until a reboot occurs the switch continues to run on the software it was using before the download started Downloading new switch software does not change the current switch con figuration The switch configuration is contained in separate files that can also be transferred Refer to Transferring Switch Configurations on page A 18 In most cases if a power failure or other cause interrupts a flash image download the switch reboots with the image previously stored in primary flash In the unlikely event that the primary image is corrupted which may occur if a download is interrupted by a power failure the switch goes into boot ROM mode In this case use the boot ROM console to download a new switch software image to primary flash Refer to Restoring a Flash Image on page C 44 Using TFTP To Downlo
430. wing methods to disable time synchronization without changing the Timep or SNTP configuration m Inthe System Information screen of the Menu interface set the Time Synch Method parameter to None then press Enter then S for Save m Inthe Global config level of the CLI execute no timesync SNTP Viewing Selecting and Configuring SNTP Feature Default Menu CLI Web view the SNTP time synchronization configuration n a page 9 5 page 9 8 E select SNTP as the time synchronization method timep page 9 6 page 9 9 ff disable time synchronization timep page 9 6 page 9 12 enable the SNTP mode Broadcast Unicast or Disabled disabled broadcast n a page 9 6 page 9 9 unicast n a page 9 6 page 9 10 none disabled n a page 9 6 page 9 13 configure an SNTP server address for Unicast mode only none page 9 6 page 9 10 ff change the SNTP server version for Unicast mode only 3 page 9 7 page 9 12 change the SNTP poll interval 720 seconds page 9 7 page 9 12 9 4 Time Protocols SNTP Viewing Selecting and Configuring Table 9 1 SNTP Parameters SNTP Parameter Time Sync Method SNTP Mode Disabled Unicast Broadcast Poll Interval seconds Server Address Server Version Operation Used to select either SNTP TIMEP or None as the time synchronization method The Default SNTP does not operate even if specified by the Menu interface Time Sync Method parameter or the CLI timesync c
431. witch Operation Status and Counters Data Corresponding Port Numbers For example to list the learned MAC address on ports Al through A4 and port A6 HPswitch gt show mac address al a4 a6 To List All Learned MAC Addresses on a VLAN with Their Port Numbers This command lists the MAC addresses associated with the ports for a given VLAN For example HPswitch gt show mac address vlan 100 The switch operates with a multiple forwarding database architecture For more on this topic refer to Duplicate MAC Addresses Across VLANs on page C 21 To Find the Port On Which the Switch Learned a Specific MAC Address For example to find the port on which the switch learns a MAC address of 080009 21ae84 HPswitch show mac address O80009 21ae64 Status and Counters Address Table 080009 21ae84 MAC Address O80009 21ae84 Located on Port A2 Figure B 11 List the Port on which the Switch Deleted a MAC Address B 17 Monitoring and Analyzing Switch Operation Status and Counters Data Spanning Tree Protocol STP Information Menu Access to STP Data From the Main Menu select 1 Status and Counters 8 Spanning Tree Information STP must be enabled on the switch to display the following data CONSOLE MANAGER MODE Status and Counters Spanning Tree Information STP Enabled Yes Switch Priority 32 768 Hello Time 2 Max Age 20 Forward Delay 2 5 Topology Change Count 3
432. witch has only a global key configured then Caution Troubleshooting Unusual Network Activity it either must match the server key or you must configure a server specific key If the switch already has a server specific key assigned to the server s IP address then it overrides the global key and must match the server key Global RADIUS Encryption Key 10 33 18 119 config show radius Status and Counters General RADIUS Information Deadtime min O Timeout secs 5 Retransmit Attempts 3 6 SSS aS Global Encryption Key i My Global Key gt Auth Acct Server IP Addr Port Port Encryption Key 10 33 16 119 1612 1813 lt 119 only key Unique RADIUS Encryption Key for the RADIUS server at 10 33 18 119 Figure C 4 Examples of Global and Unique Encryption Keys Spanning Tree Protocol STP and Fast Uplink Problems If you enable STP it is recommended that you leave the remainder of the STP parameter settings at their default values until you have had an opportunity to evaluate STP performance in your network Because incorrect STP settings can adversely affect network performance you should avoid making changes without having a strong understanding of how STP operates To learn the details of STP operation refer to the IEEE 802 1D standard Broadcast Storms Appearing in the Network This can occur when there are physical loops redundant links in the topology Where this exists you should enable STP on all
433. with a Critical priority setting are receiving full power If there is not enough power to provision PDs on all ports with a High priority then no power goes to ports with a Low priority If there is enough power to provision PDs on only some of the High ports then power is allocated to the High ports in ascending order beginning in this example with port 9 until all available power is in use For this example the CLI command to set ports to High is HPswitch config interfac 9 12 power high This priority class receives power only if all PDs on ports with High and Critical priority settings are receiving power If there is enough power to provision PDs on only some Low priority ports then power is allocated to the ports in ascending order beginning with the lowest numbered port in the class port 1 in this case until all available power is in use For this example the CLI command to set ports to Low is HPswitch config interfac 1 8 power low For this example PoE is disabled on these ports The CLI command for this setting is HPswitch config no interfac 13 24 power 1 For a listing of PoE configuration commands with descriptions refer to Configuring PoE Operation on page 11 9 2 Inthe default PoE configuration the ports are already set to the low priority In this case the command is not necessary 11 8 Power Over Ethernet PoE Operation for the Series 2600 PWR Sw
434. x show name port list Lists the friendly port name with its corresponding port number and port type The show name command alone lists this data for all ports on the switch For example HPswitch config show name Port Names Port Type 10 100TX Ports Without 10 100TX 3 Friendly Name 10 100TX Bill Smith 10 25 101 73 10 100TX not assigned 10 100TX Draft Server Trunk gt Friendly port names 10 100TX Draft Server Trunk assigned in previous 10 100TX Draft Server Trunk examples 10 100TX Draft Server Trunk 10 100TX not assigned 10 100TX not assigned 10 100TX not assigned 10 100TX not assigned Figure 10 12 Example of Friendly Port Name Data for All Ports on the Switch 10 37 Port Status and Basic Configuration Using Friendly Optional Port Names HPswitch config show name A2 A3 A5 Port Names 5 Port Without a Friendly Port Name Type 10 100TX Bill Smith 10 25 101 73 a5 Friendly port names 10 100TX assigned in previous examples Draft Server Trunk Figure 10 13 Example of Friendly Port Name Data for Specific Ports on the Switch Including Friendly Port Names in Per Port Statistics Listings A friendly port name configured to a port is automatically included when you display the port s statistics output Syntax show interface lt port number gt Includes the friendly port name with the port s traffic statistics listing For example if you confi
435. xample of How To Display Help for a Specific Command A similar action lists the Help showing additional parameter options for a given command The following example illustrates how to list the Help for an interface command acting on a specific port 4 12 Using the Command Line Interface CLI Using the CL HPswitch config interface e c5 help flow control speed duplex beast limit unknown vlans enable disable lacp monitor Enable disable flow control on the port Define mode of operation for the port Set a broadcast traffic percentage limit Define what the port will do when it encounters GVRP packet requesting it to join a VLAN Enable port Disable port Define whether LACP is enabled on the port and whether i is in active or passive mode when enabled Define that the port is to be monitored Figure 4 8 Example of Help for a Specific Instance of a Command Note that trying to list the help for an individual command from a privilege level that does not include that command results in an error message For example trying to list the help for the interface command while at the global configuration level produces this result HPswitch interface help Invalid input interface Configuration Commands and the Context Configuration Modes You can execute any configuration command in the global configuration mode or in selected context modes However using a context mode enables you to execut
436. xec level exit Return to previous command level or logout if at first level link test Test the connection to a MAC address on the LAN logout Terminate this console telnet session menu Go to the menu system ping Send IP Ping requests to a device on the network show Display configuration data Figure 4 6 Example of Context Sensitive Command List Help Displaying Help for an Individual Command You can display Help for any command that is available at the current context level by entering enough of the command string to identify the command along with help Syntax lt command string gt help For example to list the Help for the interface command in the Global Configuration privilege level HPswitch config interface help Usage no interface ethernet PORT LIST Description Enter the Interface Configuration Level or execute one command for that level Without optional parameters specified the interface command changes the context to the Interface Configuration Context Level for execution of configuration changes to the port or ports in the PORT LIST The interface ethernet PORT LIST can be followed by any command from the Interface Configuration Context Level in the same command line In this case the context level is not changed but the command is also executed for the port or ports in the PORT LIST Use interface ethernet PORT LIST to get a list of all valid commands Figure 4 7 E
437. xists as a static VLAN on the switch See How 802 1X Authentication Affects VLAN Operation in the Access Security Guide for your switch During RADIUS authenticated client sessions access to a VLAN on the port used for the client sessions is lost If the affected VLAN is config ured as untagged on the port it may be temporarily blocked on that port during an 802 1X session This is because the switch has temporarily assigned another VLAN as untagged on the port to support the client access as specified in the response from the RADIUS server See How 802 1X Authentication Affects VLAN Operation in the Access Security Guide for your switch The switch appears to be properly configured as a supplicant but cannot gain access to the intended authenticator port on the switch to which it is connected If aaa authentication port access is configured for Local ensure that you have entered the local login operator level username and password of the authenticator switch into the identity and secret parame ters of the supplicant configuration If instead you enter the enable manager level username and password access will be denied The supplicant statistics listing shows multiple ports with the same authenticator MAC address The link to the authenticator may have been moved from one port to another without the supplicant statistics having been cleared from the first port Refer to the Note on Supplicant Statistics in the Access
438. xit implement the new setting Figure 10 8 Example of Displaying a Broadcast Limit Setting Using show running displays a similar output for the running config file Refer to the Note on page 10 11 Broadcast Limit on the Series 2800 Switches On the Series 2800 Switches this command operates at the port context level to configure an individual instance of the broadcast limit for the ports included in a given context The switch implements the new broadcast limit immediately in the running config file Rebooting is not necessary Use write memory to save the configuration to the startup config file Syntax interface lt port list gt broadcast limit lt 0 99 gt Configures the theoretical maximum bandwidth percentage that can be used on the specified switch port s for broadcasts and multicasts The switch drops any broadcast or multicast traffic exceeding that limit Zero 0 disables the feature on the specified port s 10 12 Port Status and Basic Configuration Viewing Port Status and Configuring Port Parameters For example to configure a broadcast limit of 45 on ports 1 10 in a Series 2800 Switch _ HPswitch config int 5 7 broadcast limit 45 Configures a broadcast limit of 45 on ports 5 7 in z the running configuration Pai Running configuration Displays the broadcast J4903A Configuration Editor Created on release I 07 3 limit in the running config file hostname HPswitch
439. y Image 2687489 11711703 G 07 50 Giserentversionsof Boot Rom Version G O5 X1 the software Current Boot Primary Figure 6 8 Example Showing Different Flash Image Versions Determining Which Flash Image Versions Are Installed The show ver sion command displays which software version the switch is currently running and whether that version booted from primary or secondary flash Thus if the switch booted from primary flash you will see the version number of the software image stored in primary flash and if the switch booted from second ary flash you will see the version number of the software version stored in secondary flash Thus by using show version then rebooting the switch from the opposite flash image and using show version again you can determine the version s of switch software in both flash sources For example 6 13 Switch Memory and Configuration Using Primary and Secondary Flash Image Options 1 In this example show version indicates the switch has version G 05 01 in primary flash After the boot system command show version indicates that version G 05 00 is in secondary flash HPswitch config show version Image stamp su code build info s02 Apr 1 2004 14 03 06 G O7 5X 520 Boot Image Primary HPswitch config boot system flash secondary Device will be rebooted do you want to contiue y n y HPswitch gt show version mage stamp su code build info s01 Sep 17 2003 11 1
440. your network e Connected through remote access to your network m Using a management station running HP ProCurve Manager on your network Using a Standalone Web Browser in a PC or UNIX Workstation This procedure assumes that you are using a compatible web browser see the software Release Notes for more information and that the switch is configured with an IP address accessible from your PC or workstation For more on assigning an IP address refer to IP Configuration on page 8 3 1 Ensure that the Java applets are enabled for your browser For more information on this topic refer to your browser s online Help 2 Use the web browser to access the switch If your network includes a Domain Name Server DNS your switch s IP address may have a name associated with it for example switch5308 that you can type in the Location or Address field instead of the IP address Using DNS names typically improves browser performance Contact your network adminis trator to enquire about DNS names associated with your HP switch Type the IP address or DNS name of the switch in the browser Location or Address URL field and press Enter It is not necessary to include http switch5308 Enter example of a DNS type name 10 11 12 195 Enter example of an IP address 5 4 Note Using the HP Web Browser Interface Starting an HP Web Browser Interface Session with the Switch Using HP ProCurve Manager PCM or HP P
441. ystem Power Status Maximum Power 406 VW Operational Status On Power In Use gt 75 UW 7 6 W Usage Threshold 80 Figure 1 Example of Show Power Management Output 11 11 Power Over Ethernet PoE Operation for the Series 2600 PWR Switches Viewing PoE Configuration and Status Displaying an Overview of PoE Status on All Ports Syntax show power management brief Displays the following port power status Port Lists all PoE capable ports on the switch Power Enable Shows Yes for ports enabled to support PoE the default and No for ports on which PoE is disabled e Priority Lists the power priority Low High and Critical configured on ports enabled for PoE For more on this topic refer to the power command description under Configuring PoE Operation on page 11 9 Configured Type Lists the type of PD connected to each port For example Telephone Webcam Wireless Other e Detection Status Searching The port is trying to detect a PD connection Delivering The port is delivering power to a PD Disabled PoE support is disabled on the port To re enable refer to Configuring PoE Operation on page 11 9 Fault The switch detects a problem with the connected PD Power Class Shows the 802 3af power class of the PD detected on the indicated port Classes include 0 0 44w to 12 95w 3 6 49w to 12 95w 1 0 44w to 3 84w 4 reserved 2 3 84w to 6 49w For example s

HP 2600-PWR User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents